Southern Food Junkie

menu icon
search icon
×

Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe With Condensed Milk (Easy)

by 2 Comments

Let's talk about a classic favorite with a twist: Southern Sweet Potato Pie recipe with condensed milk. Southern Sweet Potato Pie is often a Southern dessert that’s served around the holidays like Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Easter Dinner. But it doesn’t have to be limited to those occasions.

This creamy, decadent pie is perfect for any time of the year, whether it's a special gathering or just a regular weeknight treat. Let’s see how this delicious dessert can become a regular in your kitchen, no matter the season.

Most of my childhood memories revolve around the fall and winter seasons. There’s something about this time of year that floods my soul with comforting memories. Fall meant family gatherings, and I looked forward to Thanksgiving so much. All the aunts, uncles, and cousins would come together—about 80 of us at my mom and dad's house. We played in the yard well after dark, catching up with cousins we only saw once a year.

It was a fun time filled with food, family, and fellowship. I miss those days. Every time I take a bite of Southern Sweet Potato Pie, it takes me back to that place and time when my only care was playing hide and seek with my cousins in the yard.

History of Southern Sweet Potato Pie

There has long been a debate about what is better or more popular, sweet potato pie or Pumpkin pie. While I love both of these, Sweet Potato is higher on my list. The reason is that Sweet potato pie is lighter on the warm spices and slightly sweeter. Both of these pies have such a rich history in the South. Thanksgiving dinner just isn't the same without either one. both are delicious Southern Classic desserts. You may be wondering what the history of sweet potato pie is though.

According to NPR's Website, The origins of these two desserts stretch back to the 15th and 16th centuries, when European settlers brought sweet potatoes and pumpkins back to Europe from the Americas.

With sweet potato pie, settlers may have been trying to replicate the European dish carrot pie, a dessert with layered slices of carrots, according to soul food historian and James Beard Award-winning author Adrian Miller.

If you love Pumpkin Desserts, you have to try these Southern Food Junkie Pumpkin Squares. They are similar to Pumpkin Roll but in a very easy-to-make square form. 

Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Rich and Creamy Flavor: The addition of condensed milk makes the pie extra creamy and decadent, enhancing the natural sweetness of the sweet potatoes.
  • Holiday Tradition with a Twist: While it's a traditional holiday dessert, this recipe can be enjoyed any time of the year, bringing a festive touch to any meal.
  • Easy to Make: With simple ingredients and straightforward instructions, this recipe is accessible even for novice bakers.
  • Southern Comfort Food: It captures the essence of Southern comfort food, offering a nostalgic and heartwarming dessert experience.

If you enjoy the rich, comforting flavors of sweet potato pie, you might also want to try another seasonal favorite: my Old-Fashioned Persimmon Pudding recipe. This delightful dessert offers a unique twist with its own set of warm, spiced flavors that perfectly capture the essence of fall.

What Does This Recipe Taste Like?

Sweet potato pie made with condensed milk has a rich, sweet flavor and creamy filling. The sweet potatoes provide a natural sweetness and a slightly earthy taste, while the condensed milk adds a smooth, luscious texture and enhances the overall sweetness.

The spices, often including cinnamon, nutmeg, and vanilla, bring warmth and depth to the pie, making each bite a harmonious blend of sweet, creamy, and subtly spiced flavors. The combination creates a comforting and indulgent dessert that is both familiar and satisfying, just like a classic Sweet Potato Pie.

This recipe was inspired by my Grandma Mildred, my dad always said she made the best Sweet Potato Pie. I can remember the day when my dad said that my mom's tasted like to hers. I know that made my mom's heart happy. Now, I am setting out to make Grandma's sweet potato pie but with my twist on it. 

If you love sweet potatoes, you also have to try another one of my fall favorites: Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole.

What You Need to Make This Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients

Everyone makes Sweet Potato Pie slightly different. They all contain the same core ingredients, but the sugar, spice, and optional ingredients may differ. The ingredients for this sweet potato pie with condensed milk are basic.

Aside from the sweet potatoes, you probably have the other items in your pantry and refrigerator. For precise quantities, refer to the recipe card further down.

Pie Crust: For the pie crust, you have two options: a traditional pastry pie crust or a graham cracker crust. While some people prefer the sweet potato pie on a graham cracker crust, I enjoy it with a buttery pie crust. For this recipe, I’m using a store-bought pre-made pie crust or pie shell. I like them to be buttery and flaky, as I think they complement the sweet potato filling perfectly. However, you can certainly make a pie crust from scratch if you prefer.

Sweet Potato Pie Filling

Sweet Potatoes: For this recipe, you'll use whole sweet potatoes, which you can bake or microwave. Using fresh sweet potatoes is quite simple, but if you only have canned sweet potatoes, they will work, too. For an easy method to cook sweet potatoes quickly, check out my recipe for How to Make Baked Sweet Potato in the Microwave.

Condensed Milk: Condensed milk is used in sweet potato pie to add rich, creamy sweetness, enhance flavor depth, and create a smooth, velvety texture while simplifying the recipe.

Eggs: Eggs are used in sweet potato pies to bind the ingredients together, thicken the filling, and provide a smooth, custard-like texture.

Brown Sugar: Brown sugar in sweet potato pie adds a deep, caramel-like sweetness and moisture, enriching the flavor with its complex, rich taste.

Melted Butter: Butter in sweet potato pie adds richness and a silky texture, enhancing the pie's flavor and helping to achieve a smooth, creamy filling.

Pure Vanilla Extract: Vanilla extract in sweet potato pie enhances the overall flavor, adding a warm, aromatic note that complements the sweetness and spices.

Cinnamon, Nutmeg, and Clove: Adding spices like ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and  Ground clove to sweet potato pie infuses it with warm, aromatic flavors that enhance its rich, comforting taste.

Sea or Kosher Salt: Works as a flavor enhancer. Salt balances out the sweetness and rounds out the flavor profile. 

Optional Ingredients:

​Orange Zest: Adding orange zest to sweet potato pie imparts a bright, citrusy note that complements the pie’s rich sweetness and adds a refreshing twist. To me, it is a secret ingredient.

Toppings

  • Whipped Cream 
  • Marshmallow Cream (fluff)
  • A scoop of vanilla ice cream

Equipment You'll Need

  • Large Mixing Bowl
  • Electric Mixer
  • Potato Masher or Food Processor
  • Measuring Cups and Spoons
  • Baking Sheet or microwave-safe plate
  • Wire rack
  • Pie Pan- If using a homemade crust
  • spoon

For a comprehensive list of recommended equipment and brands I love, check out my Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Use. 

How to Make this Recipe

Step-by-step instructions

  1. ​First, start by preheating the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Prepare Sweet Potatoes

  1. Wash and scrub sweet potatoes. Using a fork, prick holes around the sweet potatoes. If using the oven to bake them, place sweet potatoes on a baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes to 1 hour. If you use my microwave method to bake a sweet potato, place the potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork-tender. For three potatoes, cook for roughly 10 minutes.
  2. Once the sweet potatoes are fork-tender, you will remove the flesh from the skin. A spoon works great for removing the flesh. Use a food processor to process the flesh into a smooth pulp then add the mashed sweet potatoes to a large bowl. An alternative is to add the sweet potatoes to a large mixing bowl and mash the flesh up with a potato masher or fork. 

Prepare the Pie Crust

  1. Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. If you have pie weights, you can use them. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown. After baking, brush the pie crust with a little of the melted butter.

Make the Sweet Potato Pie Filling

  1. Add the eggs, condensed milk, vanilla extract, salt, and the rest of the melted butter to the mixing bowl and mix with the electric mixer or a heavy whisk until smooth and creamy. 

Bake the Pie

  1. Pour the pie filling into the prepared crust and bake for 40 to 50 minutes. Remove the pie when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. Once the pie is done, remove it from the oven and place the pie on a wire cooling rack to cool.  

How to Serve This Dish

Southern Sweet Potato Pie with Condensed Milk can be served slightly warm or at room temperature. Serve with a dollop of homemade Whipped Cream, Cool Whip, or a scoop of Vanilla ice cream on top of the pie. Some folks even serve it cold, so that is an option as well. 

Storage Tips

To store, cover the pie with aluminum foil or plastic wrap and place it in an airtight container in the refrigerator. This will keep it fresh for up to 4 days. If you need to store it for a longer period, you can freeze the pie for up to 3 months; just be sure to wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and aluminum foil before freezing. 

​Tips For Success

  • To keep the edges of the pie from burning, remove the pie about 20 minutes into the bake and cover the edges of the pie with aluminum foil. 

FAQ's

Can I use canned sweet potatoes instead of fresh ones?

Yes, you can use canned sweet potatoes if fresh ones are not available. Just be sure to drain and mash them well before using.

How can I tell when the pie is done?

The pie is done when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. It will continue to firm up as it cools.

What can I do if my pie crust is getting too brown?

If your pie crust is browning too quickly, cover the edges with aluminum foil to prevent them from burning while the filling finishes baking.

Can I use Pumpkin Pie Spice instead of the spices you have listed?

Yes, you can use pumpkin-pie spice in sweet potato pie as a convenient alternative to individual spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, and cloves. It will add a warm, spiced flavor that complements the sweet potato filling. Just replace the combined spices in the recipe with an equal amount of pumpkin-pie spice.

Yield: 2 pies

Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe With Condensed Milk (Easy)

This is a up-close photo of what southern sweet potato looks like completed.

Enjoy a classic Southern sweet potato pie with condensed milk. This rich, creamy dessert is perfect for any occasion and is easy to make from scratch.

Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Additional Time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes

Ingredients

  • 3 Large Sweet potatoes
  • 1 can (14 ounce) of Condensed Milk (sweetened)
  • 6 tablespoons of salted butter
  • 2 Eggs
  • 1 Teaspoon of vanilla Extract
  • 1 teaspoon of ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon of ground nutmeg
  • 1 9-inch frozen unbaked pie crust (pie shell)

Instructions

Step-by-step Instructions

  1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Prepare Sweet Potatoes

  1. Wash and scrub sweet potatoes. Using a fork, prick holes around the sweet potatoes. If using the oven to bake them, place sweet potatoes on a baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes to 1 hour. If you use my microwave method to bake a sweet potato, place the potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork-tender. For three potatoes, cook for roughly 10 minutes.
  2. Once the sweet potatoes are fork-tender, you will remove the flesh from the skin. A spoon works great for removing the flesh. Use a food processor to process the flesh into a smooth pulp then add the mashed sweet potatoes to a large bowl. An alternative is to add the sweet potatoes to a large mixing bowl and mash the flesh up with a potato masher or fork. 

Prepare the Pie Crust (shells)

  1. Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. If you have pie weights, you can use them. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown. After baking, brush the pie crust with a little of the melted butter.

Make the Sweet Potato Pie Filling

  1. Add the eggs, condensed milk, vanilla extract, salt, and melted butter to the mixing bowl and mix with the electric mixer or a heavy whisk until smooth and creamy. 

Bake the Sweet Potato Pie

  1. Pour the pie filling into the prepared crust and bake for 35 to 45 minutes. Remove the pie when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. Once the pie is done remove from the oven and place the pie on a wire cooling rack to cool.  

Did you make this recipe?

Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

© Ronnie Williams
Cuisine: Southern / Category: Dessert Recipes

Easy Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

by Leave a Comment

If you're looking for a crowd-pleasing appetizer to highlight your next party or game day, these Easy Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers are the answer. With crispy bacon wrapped around spicy jalapenos and a zesty kick from Tajin, this recipe combines simple ingredients to create a mouthwatering treat that's both savory and satisfying.

​The jalapenos are filled with a tangy cream cheese mixture that perfectly balances the heat, then wrapped in crispy bacon and topped with a zesty sprinkle of Tajin. Not only are these poppers one of my go-to appetizers, but they're also incredibly simple to make, so you can have a batch ready in no time.

They also can make a great side dish for almost any meal. Trust me, your guests will be coming back for seconds!

They are similar to baked Jalapeno Poppers but what makes that recipe unique is they are made in an air fryer for ease and convenience.

​History of Jalapeno Poppers

Originally from the Southwestern United States, these bite-sized snacks have become a favorite at Super Bowl parties, barbecues, cookouts, tailgate events, holiday gatherings, housewarmings, game nights, Cinco de Mayo celebrations, and casual get-togethers. 

According to Pitco, Many food historians surmise that what we call jalapeño poppers were also simply an alternate variation of chiles rellenos. Nobody is quite sure when or where the first modern jalapeño poppers were served, although popular opinion seems to agree that the dish originated in Texas sometime around 1972. Jalapeño Poppers have long been a favorite in the world of Party appetizers, and it's easy to see why because they are such an easy appetizer to make. 

Explore more mouthwatering appetizer recipes to enhance your party menu by visiting Southern Food Junkie!

​Why You'll Love This Dish​

  • Crispy Perfection: The air fryer delivers perfectly crispy bacon without the mess of frying, giving you a satisfying crunch in every bite.
  • Quick and Easy: With just a few simple ingredients and minimal prep time, you can whip up a batch of these jalapeno poppers in no time—perfect for last-minute gatherings or game-day snacks.
  • Balanced Flavor: The combination of spicy jalapenos, tangy cream cheese, smoky bacon, and a dash of Tajin offers a delicious balance of flavors that everyone will love.
  • Low Carb and Keto Friendly- Keto jalapeno poppers are a mouthwatering treat featuring spicy jalapenos wrapped in crispy bacon, making them a perfect appetizer.

What Does this Dish taste like?

​Air fryer bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers are a flavorful blend of spicy, creamy, smoky, and zesty. The jalapenos bring a mild heat, while the tangy cream cheese filling cools it down, creating a perfect balance. 

The bacon adds a savory, smoky crunch, and the sprinkle of Tajin adds a bright, citrusy kick with a touch of chili spice. Each bite delivers a satisfying mix of textures and flavors, from crispy to creamy, with a delicious hint of heat and zest. Unlike traditional jalapeno poppers, these are usually baked instead of deep fried. 

Why Use the Air Fryer?

There are a few good reasons to use the air fryer when making bacon-wrapped air fryer jalapeño peppers. One of the best reasons is convenience. Using the air fryer is very convenient because it cooks food quickly and efficiently. Not only does this reduce the cooking time, but you are using a small appliance and not a big oven.

Another reason is clean-up. Using the air fryer makes cleaning up a breeze because all you have to clean is the air fryer basket. 

The type of air fryer you use is not as important as most are made pretty much the same. The best air fryer is the one you have but a few of the popular ones that I recommend:

Note: If you're using a new air fryer, be sure to clean it thoroughly before the first use. I also recommend running it through a few heat cycles to break it in properly. 

​Explore a world of delicious possibilities with our air fryer recipes—find easy, healthy, and crispy dishes that will elevate your cooking game and save you time!

What You Need to Make this Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

  • Fresh jalapeño peppers
  • Cream Cheese
  • Sharp Cheddar Cheese
  • Thin-cut bacon slices- Buy the regular bacon that you would see. I mention this to say not to get thick-cut bacon as it takes longer to cook and crisp up. 
  • Tajin Seasoning

Optional Ingredients

  • Garlic powder
  • Onion powder

Garnish

  • Fresh Cilantro
  • Green onions
  • Tajin- Sprinkle on top for extra flavor.

Equipment You'll Need

  • Air Fryer
  • Cutting board
  • Sharp Knife
  • Baking sheet
  • Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil
  • Mixing bowl
  • Spoon or small scoop: To mix the filling ingredients, scoop out the jalapeño halves. 
  • Toothpicks: to secure the bacon around the jalapenos for baking. 

For a complete list of items that I use and recommend, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Kitchen Use. 

How to Make this Dish

Step-by-step instructions​

  • Preheat the air fryer for 6 mins at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.
  • Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.
  • Rinse each jalapeno pepper half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it. 
  • Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again. 
  • Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon. 
  • Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.
  • Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.
  • I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking. 
  • Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
  • Cook the jalapeno poppers for 13 to 15 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit or until the bacon is golden brown and crispy. 

Garnish

Remove the poppers from the air fryer and sprinkle with additional Tajin seasoning. Garnish with fresh cilantro or green onions if desired.

Serving

Let the jalapeno poppers cool slightly before serving. Enjoy them warm as a delicious appetizer!

Tips for Sucess

  • Use Fresh Jalapenos: Choose firm, fresh jalapenos for the best flavor and texture. Avoid peppers that are soft or wrinkled.
  • Adjust Spice Level: If you prefer less heat, you can remove more of the seeds and membranes from the jalapenos. For extra heat, keep some seeds in the filling.
  • Soften Cream Cheese: Ensure the cream cheese is well-softened before mixing to achieve a smooth and creamy filling.
  • Season Generously: Don’t be shy with seasoning. The Tajin adds a great flavor, but you can also experiment with other spices or herbs.
  • Wrap Bacon Tightly: Wrap the bacon snugly around the jalapenos and secure it with toothpicks if necessary to prevent the bacon from unraveling during cooking.
  • Use Thin-Cut Bacon: Thin-cut bacon crisps up better and cooks more evenly, ensuring a great texture.
  • Preheat the Air Fryer Properly: Ensure your air fryer is fully preheated to achieve consistent cooking results.
  • Monitor Cooking Time: Keep an eye on the poppers to prevent overcooking or burning. The bacon should be crispy and the cheese should be melted and bubbly.

Substitutions

  • For a slightly milder pepper, you can use Poblano peppers. 
  • Mini sweet peppers or Banana peppers can also be used to lower the spice level. 
  • You can also substitute the cheddar cheese for feta cheese for a tangier taste. 
  • Goat cheese can be substituted for cream cheese. 

How to Store Leftover Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

Bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers can be stored in an airtight container. Place them in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

FAQ's

Do I need to preheat the air fryer?

Yes. Preheat the air fryer for 6 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

Can I use different types of cheese?

Yes, you can substitute different types of cheese like goat cheese for cream cheese, cheddar, or Monterey jack based on your preference.

Can I make these poppers ahead of time?

Yes, you can make them ahead of time. Store them in the refrigerator and cook them in the air fryer just before serving.

What can I serve with air fryer bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers?

They pair well with dipping sauces like ranch, blue cheese, or a simple aioli. They also make a great addition to a party platter with other appetizers.

Yield: 20 Poppers

Easy Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

This is a image showing the finished dish up close where you can see the crispy golden brown bacon and bubbly cheese on the bacon wrapped jalapeno popper air fryer recipe.

For a game day hit or party favorite, try these Easy Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers. Crispy bacon, spicy jalapeños, and a Tajin kick make them irresistible!

Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 13 minutes
Additional Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes

Ingredients

  • 10 Fresh Jalapenos, cut in halve lengthwise with seeds and membrane removed
  • 8 ounces of softened cream cheese
  • 10 slices of thin-cut bacon, sliced in half (20 half pieces)
  • 1 cup sharp cheddar cheese
  • 1 teaspoon of Tajin

Optional Ingredients

  • ½ Teaspoon of garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon of onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon of sea salt or Kosher salt (only use if not using Tajin)
  • ½ Teaspoon of ground black pepper

Garnish

  • Green onions
  • Cilantro

Instructions

    1. Preheat the air fryer for 6 mins at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    2. Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.
    3. Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.
    4. Rinse each jalapeno pepper half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it. 
    5. Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again. 
    6. Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon. 
    7. Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.
    8. Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.
    9. I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking. 
    10. Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
    11. Bake the jalapeno poppers for 13 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit or until the bacon is golden brown and crispy. 

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Air Fryer Recipes

    The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Get ready to impress at your next party with this Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe. This easy buffalo chicken dip is a crowd-pleaser, perfect for any occasion, whether it's a casual get-together, a baby shower, the Super Bowl, or a New Year's Eve bash. As the ideal party food, this dip will quickly become your go-to recipe, ensuring your event has the perfect party appetizer everyone will rave about.

    This is a image of Buffalo Chicken Dip Slow Cooker being dip out of a white bowl to eat it.

    Everyone has that go-to dish they're famous for bringing to parties, and for my wife, this is it. She loves making this recipe, and it's easy to see why—it's delicious. This tangy appetizer is perfect for football season or your Super Bowl party. We whip it up for finger food gatherings and more. It's incredibly quick to make and easy to make with just a few simple ingredients. The best part is it cooks in your slow cooker while you get ready for game day!

    History of Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe

    Buffalo chicken dip, has its roots in the iconic Buffalo wing, which originated in Buffalo, New York, in the 1960s. According to Farm Flavor, The very first plate of Buffalo wings was served at Anchor Bar in Buffalo, New York. According to the story, the secret recipe originated on a Friday night in 1964, when bartender Dominic Bellissimo asked his mother, Teressa, to whip something up for a few regulars who arrived at the bar around midnight.

    Buffalo chicken dip is a more recent innovation that captures the flavors of Buffalo wings in a creamy, spreadable form. It became popular in the early 2000s as a convenient and crowd-pleasing party dish, particularly during football season. The dip typically combines shredded chicken, cream cheese, hot sauce, ranch or blue cheese dressing, and shredded cheese, then it's baked or cooked in a slow cooker until hot and bubbly.

    This is a image of Crock Pot Buffalo Chicken Dip in a bowl with a bag of Corn Tortilla chips and a green plant in the back ground.

    Over time, it has become a staple at gatherings, especially those centered around sports events like the Super Bowl. Its versatility and ease of preparation have solidified its place as a beloved party food across the United States.

    If you appreciate the convenience of a slow cooker, you'll love this Sweet Baby Ray's Crockpot Chicken. It's perfect for busy parents looking for an easy weekend dinner. It's also great for party gatherings or finger food parties.

    Why You'll This Dip

    1. Incredible Flavor: The rich, creamy blend of spicy buffalo sauce, tender chicken, and tangy cheese creates a flavor combination that's both satisfying and addictive. It brings all the classic taste of Buffalo chicken wings into a convenient, shareable dip.
    2. Easy Recipe: With just a few simple ingredients and minimal prep, this dip is incredibly easy to throw together. The slow cooker does most of the work, making it a stress-free option for entertaining.
    3. Perfect for Any Occasion: Whether it's a game day, a potluck, or a casual get-together, this dip is versatile and universally loved. It's the kind of dish that fits in perfectly at any party or event.
    4. Crowd-Pleaser: This dip is always a hit, guaranteed to impress guests and leave them coming back for more. Its familiar flavors and comforting texture make it a go-to favorite for any crowd.

    Browse our Appetizer category to find all of our appetizer recipes.

    This is a close up of a corn tortilla chip with Franks Red-hot Buffalo Chicken Dip on the chip. In the background you can see a white bowl with more of the chicken dip in it.

    What Does This Dip Taste Like

    Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip delivers a bold, spicy kick from buffalo sauce balanced by the rich creaminess of cheese, cool ranch dressing, and savory shredded chicken. The result is a comforting, tangy dip that's irresistibly flavorful and perfect for any occasion.

    What You Need to Make This Recipe

    You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

    • Chicken- This recipe is all about convenience. For a quick option, we use canned chicken breast, but for a more flavorful dish, cook and shred raw chicken breast in a stock pot. You can also opt for cooked rotisserie chicken to add an extra layer of taste.
    • Buffalo Sauce- We like to use Frank's Red Hot Buffalo Sauce or Texas Pete Buffalo Sauce, but you can also make your own Buffalo wing sauce if you prefer.
    • Cream Cheese- Make sure the cream cheese is soft
    • Ranch Dressing- Ranch dressing gives the dip a cool, creamy texture, making it a deliciously creamy dip that balances out the heat of the buffalo sauce.  
    • Tortilla Chips
    • Celery Sticks

    Garnish

    • Sharp Shredded Cheese- Sharp cheddar cheese adds a robust, tangy flavor to the recipe, enhancing the dip's rich, savory taste. Shred block cheese for the best flavor and texture. Pre-shredded cheese has a coating that can give this dish a gritty texture.
    • Green Onions

    See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

    This is a image showing all the ingredients with labels to make buffalo chicken dip.

    Equipment You'll Need

    • Slow Cooker- 3 to 6-quart crock pot
    • Can opener- if using canned chicken
    • Stock Pot- if using raw chicken
    • Cheese grater
    • Measuring Cup
    • Mixing spoon
    • Serving Utensils- For serving the dip, such as a ladle or spoon.

    For a complete list of all the kitchen tools and the brands we recommend, check out this Kitchen Essentials List for everyday use!

    How To Make

    Step-by-step Instructions

    • Turn the slow cooker on to low heat.
    • Open and drain the cans of chicken.
    This is a image of a person showing how to drain a can of chicken before making buffalo chicken dip.
    • Use a mixing spoon or fork to break up the chicken. Add all the ingredients to the slow cooker. After the crock pot has heated up, mix everything until well incorporated.
    This is a image of showing how to break up canned chicken to make chicken dip.
    This is a image of adding buffalo hot sauce to make buffalo chicken dip.
    This is a image of adding ranch dressing to a slow cooker to make buffalo chicken dip.
    • Cook on low for 1-2 hours, stirring occasionally to ensure even cooking.
    • Garnish with shredded cheese and green onions.

    How to Serve

    The best way to enjoy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip is with a variety of dippable sides. Here are some popular options:

    1. Tortilla Chips: Perfect for scooping up the creamy dip and adding a crunchy texture.
    2. Celery Sticks: Offers a fresh, crisp contrast to the rich and spicy dip.
    3. Carrot Sticks: Another crunchy, slightly sweet option that complements the dip’s heat.
    4. Crackers: Provide a sturdy base for dipping and add a savory crunch.
    5. Bread: Sliced baguette or toasted bread can be used for a heartier dipper.
    6. Pretzel Chips: Adds a salty crunch that pairs well with the creamy and spicy flavors.

    These options allow you to enjoy the dip in various ways and find your favorite combination.

    This is a image of Cheesy Crockpot Buffalo Chicken Dip being scoop out of a white bowl with a corn tortilla chip.

    How To Store Leftovers and Reheat

    If you have leftovers, they can be stored in an airtight container. Place the container in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days. To reheat, use a microwave-safe dish or baking dish. You can reheat it in the microwave or the oven. 

    FAQ's

    Can I use fresh chicken instead of canned?

    Yes, you can use fresh chicken. Cook it in a stock pot until fully cooked, then shred it before adding it to the slow cooker.

    How long can I keep the dip in the slow cooker?

    You can keep the dip in the slow cooker on the "warm" setting for several hours without overcooking. However, it's best enjoyed within 2 hours of cooking.

    Can I make this dip ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare the dip a day in advance. Store it in the refrigerator, then reheat it in the slow cooker on low until warmed through.

    What can I use instead of ranch dressing?

    If you prefer, you can use blue cheese dressing for a more traditional Buffalo wing flavor, or opt for a homemade version of either dressing.

    Yield: 20 servings

    The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe (Crock Pot)

    This is a image of buffalo chicken dip in a white bowl with tortilla chips sitting beside it.

    This Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip is the ultimate crowd-pleaser, blending the spicy kick of buffalo sauce with the creamy richness of cheese and tender shredded chicken. Perfect for any occasion, from casual get-togethers to game-day parties, this easy dip is sure to impress your guests. With minimal prep and the convenience of a slow cooker, it's a go-to recipe that will have everyone coming back for more.

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 2 hours
    Total Time 20 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 2- 12.5 ounce cans of chicken (drained)
    • 2-8 ounce packages of softened cream cheese
    • 1 cup of Franks Red Hot Buffalo Sauce (or comparable brand)
    • 1 cup of Ranch Dressing

    Garnish

    • Sharp Cheddar Cheese
    • Chopped Green onion

    Instructions

    1. Turn the slow cooker on to low heat.
    2. Open and drain the cans of chicken.
    3. Add all the ingredients to the slow cooker (Crock Pot). Use a mixing spoon or fork to break up the chicken. After the crock pot has heated up, mix everything until well incorporated.
    4. Cook on low for 1-2 hours, stirring occasionally to ensure even cooking.
    5. Garnish with shredded cheese and green onions.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Appetizer Recipes

    Top 3 Best Iced Coffee Makers: Your Ultimate Guide (2025)

    by Leave a Comment

    When it comes to iced coffee, it's a bit of a controversial topic—you either love it or you hate it, with not much in between. If you’re among the fans who can’t get enough of that chilled, refreshing brew, you’re in the right place! In this guide, we’re exploring the top 3 iced coffee makers that stand out from the rest.

    Whether you're a casual sipper or a dedicated cold brew enthusiast, we’ve got the details on the best options to suit your needs. From ease of use to flavor perfection, we’ll cover everything you need to know to find your ideal iced coffee maker. Let’s get brewing!

    Coffee Will Stunt Your Growth

    I grew up drinking coffee at an early age. I can still remember one of my aunts, who was only 4 foot 9 inches tall, telling me that coffee would stunt my growth. Yeah, that is an old wives tale, but looking back now, I find this so funny because she was height-challenged herself. She was only joking, but I had already fallen in love with hot coffee by then and there was no turning back. 

    I say hot coffee because, at this time, I had never heard of Iced coffee. In our home when coffee was made, it was either made with a drip coffee maker or a percolator.

    There were no coffee shops nearby either. After all, I was in the rural South. You would only find coffee at the local diner or fast food chains. No one had fancy coffee machines such as espresso or iced coffee makers. No one had heard of cold-brew coffee. I will say this though, I am glad I discovered it though.

    By the way, If you love making Iced Coffee, you are going to love learning how to make Peach Iced Tea. It is so refreshing on a hot summer day.

    ​Iced Coffee Vs Cold Brew Coffee What's the difference?

    Before diving into the top 3 best-iced coffee makers, I felt it important to explain the difference between iced coffee and cold-brew coffee in case you are not aware. Some people get the two mixed up and I wanted to make sure you knew what we were talking about.

    Cold Brew Coffee

    The cold-brewed system is different and makes coffee that tastes different. The short answer is a cold brew maker is a filter and a container, like a glass carafe. Fresh ground coffee grounds are added to a filter, and then to the cold brewer container. Then, cold water poured inside.

    Buy Now

    The coffee is left at room temperature to steep overnight. The result is cold-brewed coffee.

    Cold coffee concentrate contains a higher amount of caffeine, it is bold but super smooth. Cold brew coffee lacks the strong coffee flavor that many people enjoy from coffee.  At this point, the coffee can be poured into a glass over ice, creamer added, sweetener, and flavorings of your choice. Many people also enjoy cold brew coffee black since it is so smooth.

    Iced Coffee

    Iced Coffee on the other hand uses an Iced Coffee Maker to brew hot coffee and as it drips out, it drips out over Ice cubes to cool it down as soon as it exits the coffee maker.

    Add in creamer, sweeter, and flavorings of your choice and the result is delicious iced coffee. Iced coffee can also be enjoyed straight black, but it is not smooth like cold brew coffee but has the same strong flavor that normal hot coffee has. I enjoy them both, but I prefer the strong coffee flavor that I get from Iced Coffee, but it is cold and I can drink it.

    Are you looking for a gift for your mom? I have an awesome guide on 11 Thoughtful Kitchen gift ideas for moms.

    Top 3 Iced Coffee Makers

    This article is arranged from my favorite to least favorite. I am coming out of the gate and giving you the best iced coffee maker from the start. 

    ​​#1 Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker

    ​A few years ago, Mr. Coffee launched this iced coffee maker. My wife, who usually doesn’t ask for much, really wanted this coffee maker. At the time, the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker was exclusively available at Target and quickly became a hot item.

    Much like Stanley’s successful comeback with their Starbucks collaboration, Mr. Coffee’s strategy was a smart marketing move. Although I couldn’t snag one for her for Christmas because it was sold out, I managed to get it in January when it became available again. I ended up loving this little unit. Here is what I like about it and what I do not. 

    Buy Now

    Pros:

    I love it because it is cheap and super simple to use. It only has one button, that is all. All you have to do is add water and coffee, hit the button and you are off to making the good iced coffee. 

    Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker Scoop Size

    The thing about Iced Coffee is you have to account for the ice that is going to melt, which will naturally dilute your coffee. Mr. Coffee has considered all that. The scoop size that is included is a 1.5 tablespoon scoop, more than you would traditionally have for one serving of coffee. This makes it perfect for brewing the right ratio of hot, concentrated coffee over ice.

    As a bonus, it has a built-in filter. This filter is removable so you can clean it. No need to waste extra money on buying pods, just use your favorite fresh ground coffee.

    According to their instruction manual, "This machine uses RapidChill brewing to quickly cool hot concentrated coffee over ice, leaving you with a flavorful iced coffee that's never watered down". I am not sure about the Rapid Chill but I do feel this is true about the concentrated coffee not being watered down tasting. 

    Environmentally Friendly

    This is also environmentally friendly as there is no single-use plastic involved as you have with the pods. The machine is made from plastic materials but has held up great so far. It has been a great Iced coffee machine. 

    Included Tumbler

    Mr. Coffee also includes an insulated coffee tumbler that has the measurements on the cup for the water to pour into the coffee maker and a fill line for the ice in the cup. Genius I tell ya! It doesn't get any simpler than this. We have had this machine for a few years and have had no issues with it. In my opinion, it is the best-iced coffee maker. 

    Cons:

    One downside of this iced coffee maker is that it feels a bit flimsy, though I haven't encountered any issues with it. Additionally, the brewing process takes a bit longer compared to other brands because it uses a drip coffee method rather than K-pods. Plus, it only offers one brew option, which might limit versatility for some users. However, sometimes simplicity is best. 

    Final Review

    All in all, this coffee maker is a great pick in my opinion for the perfect brew and a good value. It is right up top for the best at-home iced coffee maker.

    Check out this video of me using the Mr. Coffee iced Coffee maker.

    YouTube video

    ​#2 Ninja DualBrew Hot and Iced Coffee Maker

    The Ninja DualBrew Hot and Iced Coffee Maker is a standout machine with a sleek, modern design that resembles automotive styling. It boasts a range of features, including the ability to brew both hot and cold coffee. It accommodates both K-pods and coffee grounds. With all its advanced options and functionalities, it's perfect for anyone who loves gadgets and wants a coffee maker with all the bells and whistles.

    Buy Now

    ​Pros

    One of the biggest advantages I see with the Ninja DualBrew is.. the ability to do the dual brew. You can use K-pods or you can use coffee grounds to make traditional iced coffee with. I know you can do that with the Keurig with a filter, but let me be honest, it is a hassle. This unit lets you choose either one without buying a separate basket or any other part. 

    ​Another great option is the brew size. You can choose a single cup, or brew up to a full glass carafe of coffee. I like that it is so versatile. The Ninja DualBrew also has three strength settings: Classic, Rich, or over ice for grounds or pods for personal taste. The Coffee maker also has a very large water reservoir so you can brew multiple cups before needing to refill. 

    The final thing that I love about this coffee maker is how quickly it brews coffee when using the K-pod function. It is said to make a cup faster than a Keurig K-elite. 

    Cons

    One of the biggest cons that I can see is the complexity of the machine. When compared to the other two units, the Ninja DualBrew Iced coffee maker is the most complex of the three. 

    Complexity often brings a higher price tag, and that’s true for the Ninja. It is the most expensive of the three iced coffee makers we reviewed. Additionally, it is the largest of the group. It is not massive, but it doesn’t have the compact footprint of the other two. However, I don’t consider this a deal breaker.

    ​Final Thoughts

    I’m impressed with this unit. While it may not be as straightforward to use as the other two, it could effectively replace both of them. Currently, I use a Keurig for quick hot coffee on the go and a Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker when I crave iced coffee. Although I’m fond of the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker, this new one is a great addition and offers a lot of value!

    ​#3 Keurig K-Iced Coffee Maker

    After doing much research, the Keurig K-Iced Coffee Maker came in last on my list of top three Iced Coffee makers. Here is what I like about it and what I do not.

    Buy Now

    Pros: 

    To start with, I love the styling of it. It is sleek and modern-looking. It comes in two color options which will help it blend in with any home or office.

    Although it is not quite as simple as the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee maker, it is still pretty simple with only a few buttons to choose from. The options for the buttons are iced coffee, strong coffee, 12-ounce, 10-ounce, and 8-ounce. In addition to that, it has a light that comes on when the water is low and when it needs to be descaled. 

    One thing that sets it apart from my number one pick is the water reservoir. The Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee maker is a one-time use. You have to fill it with water each time you use it.

    Making Iced Coffee With a Keurig

    The Keurig K-Iced Coffee maker compensates for diluted coffee in three ways. First, when you select the ounce cup you would like, it gives you 4 ounces less than what you selected. This is because it compensates for the melting ice. Also, the brewing process starts and stops a couple of times. Then, the water comes out hot at first, then goes to room temperature as it gets near the end. All of these features are to prevent the dilution of the coffee. 

    This machine takes any standard K-cup options or you can remove the inner K-cup basket and buy a basket that you can fill with fresh coffee grounds. I also love the fact that it has a water reservoir so you do not have to fill it up each time you use it like you do the Mr. Coffee Iced coffee maker. The machine itself is also small in size and that is important in a lot of people's kitchens when counter space is a premium. 

    Cons: 

    There are a few cons to this machine that made me choose it for last place, first, the main option when using the machine is using the K-Pods. This creates more waste in our landfills.

    Next, the limit for K-pods is 2 tablespoons. With the Mr. Coffeee Iced Coffee maker and the Ninja DualBrew, you can essentially put as much coffee in the filter as you like to make a stronger brew.

    If you prefer strong coffee, I suggest using "brewed over-ice" K-pods when using the Keurig K-Iced machine. The reason is they are bolder and have the maximum amount of grounds in each pod.

    The other option is to use a separate filter basket to put your grounds in for stronger coffee but it is still limited to around 2 tablespoons. The filter will have to be purchased separately as well. 

    K-Cup Filter Basket for Ground Coffee

    Final Review:

    All in all, this is still a solid selection for an ice coffee maker. The price has dropped on this unit and it is pretty affordable. The size and water reservoir make it a solid selection as well. 

    Conclusion

    No matter how you look at it, you can't go wrong with any of these choices. The key question to ask yourself is whether you prefer simplicity or all the bells and whistles.

    If simplicity and great taste are your priorities, Mr. Coffee is the winner. For a balanced option, Keurig is the way to go. And if versatility and features are what you’re after, the Ninja takes the crown. All of these units make great coffee, and I’m confident you’ll be happy with whichever one you choose.

    Which Iced Coffee maker would you choose? Leave us a comment below to let us know.

    Easy Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe with Tajin

    by Leave a Comment

    If you're on the hunt for a crowd-pleasing appetizer that's sure to be the star of your next party, look no further than these Easy Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers with Tajin. This recipe combines simple ingredients to create a mouthwatering treat that's both spicy and savory.

    This is a image showing what the Jalapeno Poppers look like once they have been cooked.

    The jalapenos are stuffed with a tangy cream cheese mixture that perfectly balances the heat, then wrapped in crispy bacon and dusted with a zesty sprinkle of Tajin. These poppers are not only one of my favorite appetizers, but they're also incredibly easy to make, ensuring you can whip up a batch in no time. Trust me, your guests will be reaching for seconds!

    ​Originating from the Southwestern United States, these bite-sized snacks have become a staple at Super Bowl parties, Barbecues and cookouts, tailgate parties, holiday gatherings, housewarming parties, game nights, Cinco De Mayo celebrations, and just casual get-togethers. 

    According to Pitco, Many food historians surmise that what we call jalapeño poppers were also simply an alternate variation of chiles rellenos. Nobody is quite sure when or where the first modern jalapeño poppers were served, although popular opinion seems to agree that the dish originated in Texas sometime around 1972. Jalapeño Poppers have long been a favorite in the world of Party appetizers, and it's easy to see why because they are such an easy appetizer to make. 

    Explore more mouthwatering appetizer recipes to enhance your party menu by visiting Southern Food Junkie!

    Why You Will Love Easy Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

    • Flavor Explosion: The combination of spicy fresh jalapenos, tangy cream cheese Sharp Cheddar Cheese Mixture, and savory bacon creates a mouthwatering flavor profile that's hard to resist.
    • Crunchy and Creamy: The crispy bacon exterior perfectly complements the creamy filling, providing a satisfying contrast in textures.
    • Easy to Make: With simple ingredients and straightforward preparation, these poppers are a breeze to whip up for any occasion.
    • Crowd-Pleaser: They’re a hit at parties and gatherings, making them a popular appetizer that everyone loves to enjoy. Once football season gets here, they will be a favorite game-day appetizer as well. 
    This is a image of what bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers look like on a baking sheet after being baked in the oven.

    What Does This Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe Taste Like?

    In this version, we skip the breading and frying in favor of a simpler and arguably tastier approach. Fresh jalapenos are halved and filled with a tangy cream cheese mixture that’s been carefully crafted to balance the natural heat of the peppers. The addition of Tajin, a popular Mexican seasoning blend made from chili peppers, lime, and salt, adds a delightful zesty kick that enhances the overall flavor profile of the poppers.

    Image from Amazon

    Wrapping the stuffed jalapenos in bacon brings another layer of flavor and texture. As the bacon cooks, it becomes irresistibly crispy, creating a satisfying contrast to the creamy filling and the tender, yet slightly spicy, jalapeno. This combination of ingredients ensures that each bite is packed with a variety of tastes and sensations that will leave your guests craving more and creating the perfect party appetizer. 

    If you are looking for an easy dessert to take to your party as well, this Easy No-Bake Blueberry-Banana Cream Pie is sure to hit the spot!

    What You Need to Make this Recipe

    You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

    Ingredients for Easy Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers

    See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

    • Fresh jalapeño peppers
    • Cream Cheese
    • Sharp Cheddar Cheese
    • Thin-cut bacon slices- Buy the regular bacon that you would see. I mention this to say not to get thick-cut bacon as it takes longer to cook and crisp up. 
    • Tajin Seasoning

    Optional Ingredients

    • Garlic powder
    • Onion powder

    Garnish

    • Fresh Cilantro
    • Green onions
    • Tajin- Sprinkle on top for extra flavor.

    Equipment You'll Need

    • ​Cutting board
    • Sharp Knife
    • Baking sheet
    • Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil
    • Mixing bowl
    • Spoon or small scoop: To mix the filling ingredients, scoop out the jalapeño halves. 
    • Toothpicks: to secure the bacon around the jalapenos for baking. 

    For a complete list of items that I use and recommend, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Kitchen Use.

    How to Make Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

    ​Step-by-step instructions

    Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line the baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil. This will make cleanup a breeze and prevent sticking.  

    This image shows a person slicing jalapeño in half to make bacon wrapped jalapeño poppers.

    Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.

    This is a image showing what the Jalapenos look like once they are cut in half when making Jalapeno Poppers.

    Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.

    This is a image showing a person using a spoon to scrap out the center of the Jalapeno to remove the seeds and white stuff to make jalapeno poppers.

    Rinse each jalapeno half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it. 

    Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again. 

    This is a image of Sharp Cheddar cheese in a bowl with Softened cream cheese used to make a filling for Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno poppers.
    This is a image showing what the sharp cheddar cheese and cream cheesed mixed up looks like when making Bacon Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers.
    This image shows adding Tajin seasoning to the Sharp Cheddar cheese and cream cheese mixture.

    Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon. 

    Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.

    This is a image showing a person using a spoon to add the filling to the half of the jalapeno to make Jalapeno Poppers.

    Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.

    This is a closeup image showing how to wrap bacon on the Jalapeno Poppers once they have been stuffed.

    I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking. 

    This is a image showing using a toothpick to secure the bacon that has been wrapped around the Jalapeno Popper.

    Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer on a baking sheet.

    This is a image of bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers on a baking sheet before they are baked in the oven.

    Bake in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 20-25 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is bubbly. 

    This is a image of bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers baking in the oven.

    Note: For those who enjoy experimenting with different cooking methods, you might also want to check out our Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers recipe. Using an air fryer can give you a crispy texture with less oil, making it a great alternative if you’re looking for a healthier option or simply want to try something new.

    Garnish

    Remove the poppers from the oven and sprinkle with additional Tajin seasoning. Garnish with fresh cilantro or green onions if desired. 

    Serve

    Let the jalapeno poppers cool slightly before serving. Enjoy them warm as a delicious appetizer!

    ​TIPS FOR SUCCESS  

    • Use Fresh Jalapenos: Choose firm, fresh jalapenos for the best flavor and texture. Avoid peppers that are soft or wrinkled.
    • Adjust Spice Level: If you prefer less heat, you can remove more of the seeds and membranes from the jalapenos. For extra heat, keep some seeds in the filling.
    • Soften Cream Cheese: Ensure the cream cheese is well-softened before mixing to achieve a smooth and creamy filling.
    • Season Generously: Don’t be shy with seasoning. The Tajin adds a great flavor, but you can also experiment with other spices or herbs.
    • Wrap Bacon Tightly: Wrap the bacon snugly around the jalapenos and secure it with toothpicks if necessary to prevent the bacon from unraveling during cooking.
    • Use Thin-Cut Bacon: Thin-cut bacon crisps up better and cooks more evenly, ensuring a delightful texture.
    • Preheat Oven Properly: Ensure your oven is fully preheated to achieve consistent cooking results.
    • Monitor Cooking Time: Keep an eye on the poppers to prevent overcooking or burning. The bacon should be crispy and the cheese should be melted and bubbly.

    How to Store Leftover Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

    ​Bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers can be stored in an airtight container. Place them in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 

    Tips for Reheating

    • Preheat Oven: Preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C).
    • Arrange on Baking Sheet: Place the jalapeno poppers on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
    • Reheat: Bake for about 10-15 minutes, or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is heated through. You might want to flip them halfway through for even reheating.

    ​FAQ's

    Can I make Jalapeno Poppers ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare the poppers up to a day in advance. Store them in the refrigerator and bake them just before serving for best results.

    Can I freeze Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers?

    Absolutely! Arrange the poppers on a baking sheet and freeze them until solid, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Bake from frozen, adding a few extra minutes to the cooking time.

    Can I cook Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers in the air fryer?

    Yes! Preheat the Air Fryer to 375 degrees Fahrenheit (190 degrees Celsius). Place the Jalapeno Poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Avoid overcrowding. Cook for 5-8 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is melted and bubbly. Check on them halfway through to avoid overcooking. If cooking a lot, do them in batches.

    Can I grill these instead of baking?

    Yes, you can grill them over medium heat. Place them on a grill-safe pan or use indirect heat to prevent flare-ups from the bacon fat.

    How do I ensure the bacon gets crispy?

    Use thin-cut bacon for best results. If you want to get it extra crispy bake the poppers on a wire rack over a baking sheet to allow the fat to drain away.

    Can I use a different type of cheese?

    Yes, you can substitute the cheddar cheese with other cheeses like Monterey Jack, pepper jack, or even cream cheese alone for a different flavor profile.

    Yield: 20

    Easy Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe with Tajin

    This image is a closeup of bacon wrapped Jalapeno Poppers that have been baked in the oven.

    These Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers are the ultimate crowd-pleaser! Fresh jalapenos are stuffed with a creamy cheese mixture, wrapped in crispy bacon, and seasoned with Tajin for a perfect blend of spicy, savory, and tangy flavors. Ideal for any party or gathering!

    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Additional Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 10 Fresh Jalapenos, cut in halve lengthwise with seeds and membrane removed
    • 8 ounces of softened cream cheese
    • 10 slices of thin-cut bacon, sliced in half
    • 1 cup sharp cheddar cheese
    • 1 teaspoon of Tajin

    Optional Ingredients (if not using Tajin)

    • ½ Teaspoon of garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon of onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon of sea salt or Kosher salt (only use if not using Tajin)
    • ½ Teaspoon of ground black pepper

    Garnish

    • Green onions
    • Cilantro

    Instructions

    1. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line the baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil. This will make cleanup a breeze and prevent sticking.  
    2. Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise. Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane. Rinse each jalapeno half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it. 
    3. Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again. 
    4. Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon. 
    5. Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers. Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños. I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking. 
    6. Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer on a baking sheet. Bake in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 20-25 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is bubbly. 

    Notes

    Make sure to avoid touching your face while handling the jalapenos. If possible, wear latex gloves.

    Recommended Products

    As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Tex-Mex / Category: Appetizer Recipes

    Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie! This delicious dish combines a savory beef mixture seasoned with taco seasoning and creamy refried beans, all topped with melted cheddar cheese, nestled perfectly in a crispy pie crust. 

    This is a shot of the Mexican Taco Beef Pie with a plate with a slice of the pie and side dishes along with the pie in the background.

    Whether looking for a quick weeknight dinner or a crowd-pleasing dish for a gathering, this taco pie is sure to be a hit. It doesn't matter whether it is Taco Tuesday or not. This easy recipe is simple to make and bursting with flavor, it brings the best of Mexican-inspired cuisine to your table in a delightful and easy-to-serve pie. This one is going to be a family favorite that the entire family will love, so let's dive into this mouthwatering recipe!

    This Mexican pie is one of my favorite meals, and it was made by my mom growing up. This was in rotation along with Texas Hash, which I also love. Both are quick and easy dinners that the whole family will love. 

    This is a image of a Mexican Taco Pie Recipe with a slice taken out of the front of it.

    It seems we would always have this meal on Fridays for supper. I always looked forward to eating a slice of this and watching TGIF on ABC! (Thank Goodness It's Funny, which was a family-friendly Friday night TV show on ABC from the 80s to the 90s). 

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    Here are a few reasons why everyone will love this Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie recipe:

    1. Bursting with Flavor: The combination of seasoned beef, creamy refried beans, and melted cheddar cheese creates a rich and savory taste that's hard to resist.
    2. Easy to Make: With simple ingredients and straightforward steps, this recipe is perfect for busy weeknights or when you want a hassle-free meal.
    3. Crowd-Pleaser: This dish is versatile and appeals to a wide range of tastes, making it an ideal choice for family dinners or gatherings with friends.
    4. Customizable: You can easily tailor the recipe to suit your preferences by adding your favorite toppings like sour cream, salsa, guacamole, or fresh cilantro.
    5. Comfort Food: The warm, hearty filling and crispy pie shell provide a comforting and satisfying meal that everyone will enjoy.
    6. Great Leftovers: This pie reheats well, making it perfect for next-day lunches or quick dinners.
    7. Mexican-Inspired Delight: For those who love Mexican cuisine or Tex-Mex, this pie offers all the delicious flavors of a classic taco in a fun and convenient pie form.
    This is a image of Mexican Taco Beef Pie recipe front shot. You can see some green peppers in the back ground.

    What Does This Dish Taste Like?

    The Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie is a delightful explosion of flavors in every bite. The seasoned ground beef is savory and spiced just right, blending harmoniously with the creamy, smooth texture of refried beans and green chilies. The melted cheddar cheese adds a rich, tangy layer that perfectly complements the hearty filling. All of this is enveloped in a golden, flaky pie crust that provides a satisfying crunch. The combination of warm, comforting flavors and textures makes this dish an irresistible treat for your taste buds. 

    This is a image of Mexican taco Beef Pie recipe front shot that is plated with side dishes, tomatoes, and a lime wedge.

    What You Need To Make This Recipe

    Note: You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics

    Ingredients:

    For the Filling

    • Ground beef
    • Taco seasoning mix- or use Homemade taco seasoning.
    • Salsa
    • Green chilies-drained
    • Refried beans
    • Water (a portion will be used for flour slurry, the rest for the refried beans)
    • Sharp Cheddar cheese-(a portion of the cheese will be used for the beef mixture, the rest for topping on the pies) 
    • Two frozen Pastry pie shells
    • Sea Salt or Kosher Salt
    • Black Pepper

    Garnish

    • Shredded lettuce
    • Fresh diced tomatoes
    • Sour cream
    • Guacamole
    • Black olives
    • Green onions
    • Taco Sauce or Salsa
    • Lime wedge

    Note: See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

    ​Equipment You'll Need

    • Large Skillet
    • Medium stock pot
    • Mixing spoon and Spatula
    • Pie plate
    • can opener
    • Measuring Spoon
    • Cheese Grater
    • Cutting Board
    • Sharp knife
    • Serving Spatula

    For a full, detailed list of the brands of equipment I use and recommend, check out this article on Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist that I have prepared for you. 

    ​How To Make

    Step-by-step instructions

    Prepare the pie shells

    1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown.

    This is a image of two pie shells being baked in the oven to make Mexican Taco Beef Pie.
    If you have pie weights, you can use them
    This is a image of what the baked pie shells look like after they have been baked.
    After baking the pies, the crust usually lies back down

    Mexican Taco Beef Pie Filling

    ​1. Place the large skillet on the stovetop on medium-high heat. Cook the ground beef until the meat is brown.

    This is a image of Ground Hamburger being cooked in a skillet to make a recipe called Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie.

    2. Drain the grease off the meat. Add in the taco seasoning, then the flour slurry (cold water and flour mixture). Stir into the ground beef until it is well incorporated.

    This is a image of ground hamburger beef reading to be drained of grease.
    This is a image of a person adding in taco seasoning to make taco pie.
    Adding flour slurry

    After reducing the mixture, add the drained green chilies and salsa. Then add in 1 cup of the cheese and mix well.

    This is a image of a person adding in green chilies to the beef mixture for taco pie.
    Green chilies
    This is a image of a person adding in Salsa to the beef mixture for taco pie.
    Salsa
    This is a image of adding cheddar cheese to Mexican taco pie beef mixture.
    A portion of the cheese

    3. Place the medium stock pot on the stove on medium heat. Add the refried beans to the pot to reheat. Add in the water to thin the beans down some. You want them to be able to spread easily when we layer them at the bottom of the pie shell. A nice smooth texture is what we are looking for. 

    This is a image of a person stirring refried beans after adding in water to smooth the texture out.
    Refried beans need to be smooth and creamy

    Make the Pies

    1. Divide the refried beans between the two pie crusts and spread the mixture on the bottom of the shells.

    This is a image of a person spreading the smooth and creamy refried beans in the bottom of the baked pie shells for Mexican Taco Beef Pie.
    This is a image of what the refried beans look like have they have been spread in the bottom of pies shells when making Mexican Taco Beef Pies.

    Next, divide the ground beef mixture between the two shells and spread evenly. Top with the remaining sharp cheddar cheese.

    This is a image of adding the beef mixture to the pie shells to make Mexican Taco Beef Pie.
    This is a image of what the Mexican Taco Beef pies look like after adding the meat mixture and ready for cheese.
    This is a image of a person topping the taco pies with cheese.

    2. Bake for 15-20 minutes at 400 degrees Fahrenheit until the cheese is nice and bubbly and the edges of the pie crust are golden brown. 

    This is a image of the taco Pies going into the oven to bake.

    3. Allow the pies to cool for 10 to 15 minutes to allow the pie to set before serving. 

    This is a image of two baked Mexican Taco Beef Pies hot out the oven ready to be served.

    ​How To Serve

    Serve this dish on a plate with tortilla chips. Top the Mexican Taco Beef Pie with the garnishes listed above or your favorite taco toppings.

    Great Side Dishes to Serve this Recipe with:

    ​Substitutions

    You can substitute ground turkey or ground chicken for the ground beef.

    Storage Tips

    You can store Mexican Taco Beef Pie in an airtight container or cover it with aluminum foil. My favorite way to store any pie is by putting it in a Nordic Ware High Dome Covered Pie Pan. I love mine and use it quite often. Nordic Ware is made in the USA and makes awesome products. 

    Place the pie in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. 

    FAQ's

    Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

    Yes, you can make this recipe ahead of time. Store it covered in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator and bake as directed, adding a few extra minutes to the baking time if necessary.

    Can I freeze the Taco Beef Pie?

    Yes, you can freeze the assembled pie before baking. Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and then in aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn. It can be frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to bake, thaw it in the refrigerator overnight and bake as directed.

    Can I use a different type of cheese?

    Absolutely! While cheddar cheese adds a great flavor, you can use other cheeses such as Monterey Jack, Colby Jack, or a Mexican cheese blend.

    What can I use instead of refried beans?

    If you don't have refried beans, you can use black beans or pinto beans as an alternative. Simply mash them slightly to create a similar texture.

    Can I make this dish spicier?

    To add more heat, you can include diced jalapeños, a dash of hot sauce, or extra chili powder in the beef mixture. You can also top the pie with spicy salsa or serve it with a side of sliced jalapeños.

    What are some good toppings for this Mexican Pie?

    Great toppings include sour cream, guacamole, salsa, diced tomatoes, shredded lettuce, sliced olives, fresh cilantro, and chopped green onions.

    Can I use homemade taco seasoning?

    Yes, homemade taco seasoning works great. Combine chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, oregano, salt, and pepper to taste.

    Yield: 8

    Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie

    This image shows a Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie recipe in a overhead view. The image shows the pie in the upper left hand corner with jalapeños and Banana Peppers beside it. There is a slice of pie taken out that is on a white plate with sliced tomatoes, lime wedges, and Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

    Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie! This delicious dish combines a savory beef mixture seasoned with taco seasoning and creamy refried beans, all topped with melted cheddar cheese, nestled perfectly in a crispy pie crust. 

    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 1 lb of ground hamburger meat
    • Two frozen pastry pie shells
    • 12 ounces of sharp cheddar cheese (1 cup for meat mixture, the rest for topping pies)
    • 2 tablespoons of taco seasoning mix or use a Taco Seasoning packet
    • 1-16 ounce can of refried beans
    • 1-4 ounce can of green chilies
    • 8 ounces of Salsa (half of a 16 ounce jar)
    • 2 tablespoons of all purpose (AP) flour
    • 1 cup of water (¼ cup for flour slurry, the rest for refried beans)
    • ½ teaspoon of sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon of black pepper

    Toppings or Garnish

    • Lettuce
    • Diced tomatoes
    • Sour cream
    • Gucamole
    • Black olives
    • Green onions
    • Cilantro
    • Taco Sauce or Salsa
    • Lime Wedge

    Instructions

    Prepare pie shells

    1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Lay out pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown.

    Mexican Taco Beef Pie Filling

    1. Place the large skillet on the stovetop on medium-high heat. Cook beef until the meat is brown
    2. Make a flour slurry by mixing a ¼ cup of water into the 2 tablespoons of AP flour and whisk until smooth. This will be used to help thicken the beef mixture.
    3. Drain the grease off of the meat. Add in the taco seasoning. Add in the flour slurry. Stir into the ground beef until it is well incorporated. After reducing the mixture, add the drained green chilies and salsa. Then add in 1 cup of cheese and mix well. 
    4. Place the medium stock pot on the stove on medium heat. Add the refried beans to the pot to reheat. Add ¾ cup of the water to thin the refried beans. This will allow them to thin out and spread easily when we layer them in the bottom of the pie shell. A nice smooth texture is what we are looking for. 

    Make the Pies

    1. Divide the refried beans between the two pie crusts and spread the mixture on the bottom of the shells. Next, divide the ground beef mixture between the two shells and spread evenly. Top with the remaining Sharp Cheddar cheese and place in the oven to bake.
    2. Bake for 15-20 minutes at 400 degrees Fahrenheit until the cheese is nice and bubbly and the edges of the pie crust are golden brown.
    3. Allow Mexican pie to cool for 10 to 15 minutes to allow the pie to set before serving. 

    Recommended Products

    As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Tex-Mex / Category: Beef Recipes

    How to Cook Hamburgers in the Air Fryer (Simple Recipe)

    by Leave a Comment

    If you're asking, "How to cook hamburgers in the air fryer?" you're in the right place. Cooking hamburgers in an air fryer is super easy and quick. In this post, I'll guide you through the cooking times and some simple tips to ensure your burgers turn out juicy and delicious. Whether you're new to air frying or just looking for a quick answer, I've got all the info you need. Let's get started!

    This image shows a Cheeseburger on a plate with cheeseburger patties and buns on a plate in the background. The image is for a post about how to cook hamburgers in an air fryer.

    In this post, we'll cover all the essential details you need to cook the perfect hamburger in an air fryer. We'll discuss the ideal cooking times for different patty thicknesses to ensure your burgers are cooked just right. Then, we'll share some useful tips for seasoning your patties and getting that perfect sear.

    Finally, we'll offer serving suggestions, including tasty toppings and side dishes to complement your air-fried hamburgers. By the end, you'll have all the information you need to make a delicious meal with minimal effort.

    What Is an Air Fryer?

    The air fryer has been around for several years. According to the New York Times, Fred Van Der Weij invented the air fryer back in 2005. He was looking for a way to crisp up French Fries without deep-frying them.

    nuwave 6qt air fryer

    An air fryer is a small appliance, similar to a small deep fryer, such as a Fry Daddy, but doesn't use cooking oil. The air fryer has a basket that slides into the front of it, this is where the food is placed. It is a small convection oven with high-speed air circulation, allowing food to crisp up quickly.  

    If you want to know more about Air Fryers, check out this article called Cooking Revolutionized: A NuWave Air Fryer Review. I love using the air fryer to cook these crispy air fryer hashbrowns for breakfast!

    Why Use an Air Fryer for Hamburgers?

    Using an air fryer to cook a hamburger offers several advantages. The main reason to use an air fryer for hamburgers is the cook time. First, air fryers cook food quickly and efficiently, significantly reducing the time needed to prepare a meal compared to traditional methods like grilling or pan-frying. This speed is due to the rapid circulation of hot air, which ensures even cooking and a deliciously crispy exterior.

    crispy potatoes cooked in an air fryer

    Also, an air fryer cooks food using a healthier method. Since an air fryer uses little to no oil, it cuts out many of the calories of the traditional way of frying a hamburger patty.

    Air fryers also heat up very quickly and cook without much of the mess of frying hamburgers or the hassles of outdoor grilling. You can cook a healthier hamburger from the comfort of your home, versus going outside and cooking. 

    This is a image of the front image of a air fryer used for a post about how to cook hamburgers in the air fryer.

    The George Foreman also offers many advantages for cooking hamburgers, but sometimes it can leave your hamburger dry. When cooking air fryer burgers, they always result in a juicy burger.

    If you're also curious about cooking on the George Foreman, you might find our article "How Long Does It Take to Cook a Steak on the George Foreman" helpful. It provides detailed instructions and tips for perfect steaks.

    What do Air Fryer Hamburger Patties taste like

    Air fryer hamburger patties typically have a unique taste and texture that many people enjoy. Here’s what you can expect:

    1. Crispy Exterior: Air fryers cook food by circulating hot air around it, which creates a crispy outer layer on the hamburger patty. This texture is similar to what you might get from grilling or pan-frying, but with less oil.
    2. Juicy Interior: Despite the crispy exterior, air fryer hamburgers retain their juiciness inside. This is because the hot air cooks the meat evenly and quickly, sealing in the natural juices of the patty.
    3. Enhanced Flavors: The lack of excess oil allows the flavors of the meat and any seasonings you use to shine through. You’ll still get that classic beefy taste but with a cleaner, lighter profile.
    4. Consistency: Air fryers ensure even cooking, so you can expect consistent results with every batch of hamburgers you make. This consistency contributes to a reliable and enjoyable eating experience.

    Overall, air fryer hamburger patties taste crispy on the outside and juicy on the inside, and retain the flavors of the meat and seasonings you use, making them a popular choice for cooking hamburgers at home. Top them with your favorite toppings, and you have a real American meal on your hands. 

    This image shows air frying burgers.

    ​How Long To Cook

    This short guide will tell you how long to air-fry a burger

    What you need to make this Recipe

    You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

    ​Ingredients

    • Hamburger meat- For beef, an 80/20 blend has the right amount of fat for juiciness. You can substitute ground turkey or ground chicken if you like. 
    • Sea salt or kosher salt
    • Black pepper
    • Hamburger buns- Regular hamburger buns are fine, but for upscale burgers, try brioche buns. 
    This image shows brioche hamburger buns to used to make air fryer burger recipes.

    Optional Ingredients

    • Heath Riles Garlic Jalapeño rub- You talking about a flavor explosion. I wouldn't cook a burger without this seasoning. This has salt in it, so if you use this, I would reduce or not add additional salt.  
    • Worcestershire Sauce- This is a flavor enhancer that adds depth and complexity to the flavor. I highly recommend it. 
    • Garlic powder- If using the Heath Riles seasoning, omit garlic powder and onion powder. 
    • Onion Powder- if using the Heath Riles seasoning, omit onion powder and garlic powder

    Toppings and Condiments

    • Cheese slices- make air fryer cheeseburgers by adding a slice of cheese. Some of our favorites are American cheese, Cheddar cheese, Pepper Jack, or Colby Jack cheese.
    • Lettuce
    • Tomatoes
    • Red onion or White Onion
    • Pickles
    • Slaw
    • Homemade chili sauce
    • Mustard
    • Ketchup
    • Mayonnaise

    If you do not like any of these pairings, just use your favorite seasoning. 

    ​Note: See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

    Equipment You'll Need

    1. Air Fryer: The main appliance for cooking the burgers.
    2. Mixing Bowl: For combining the ground beef with seasonings and any additional ingredients.
    3. Measuring Spoons and Cups: To accurately measure seasonings and other ingredients.
    4. Wooden Spoon- To mix the ingredients.
    5. Plates, Sheet pan, or Cutting Board: To hold the formed burger patties before cooking.
    6. Tongs: For flipping the burger patties halfway through cooking and removing them from the air fryer.
    7. Instant-Read Meat Thermometer: To check the internal temperature of the burgers and ensure they are cooked to your desired level of doneness.

    To see a comprehensive list of all the brands I use and recommend, visit the Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist article.

    Step-by-Step Instructions

    1. Prepare your hamburger Patties

    In a mixing bowl or large bowl, add your hamburger meat and seasonings of choice. Use a wooden spoon or your hands to mix ingredients well until it is well incorporated.

    This image shows raw hamburger meat with seasoning on it to make air fryer burgers.
    Hamburger meat with seasonings
    This image shows hamburger meat in a large bowl with seasoning on it and getting ready to mix it by hand.
    Mixing by hand

    Divide the meat into 4 to 6-ounce-pound patties that are ½ inch thick. Make an indent into the center of each patty. This will allow the center to cook evenly with the rest of the pattie.

    This image shows a closeup of the seasoned hamburger patties and the indent in the middle of the Pattie.

    Arrange the patties on a pan or plate and set to the side. I like to do this about 30 minutes beforehand to allow the seasonings time to meld together. 

    2. Preheat the Air Fryer

    Preheat the air fryer to 370 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 minutes.

    3. Cooking the Air Fryer Hamburger Patties

    Spray the air fryer basket with cooking oil or cooking spray. I like to spray a little on the patties as well. This will help the burgers have a good sear with a crispy exterior.

    Arrange the patties in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

    This image shows using cooking spray to coat the air fryer basket before cooking.
    Spray inside of air fryer basket
    This is a closeup image showing the hamburger patties arranged in a single layer in the air fryer basket before cooking.
    Arrange patties in single layer
    This is a image of a man putting the air fryer basket back into the air fryer showing the hamburger patties in the basket ready to be cooked.
    Place the basket in the air fryer and cook

    Cook for 6 minutes then pull out the air fryer basket and use the tongs to flip the burgers over.

    This is a image of hamburgers in a air fryer basket that has been cooked half way through. This picture is used to show what they look like when you take the basket out and flip the burgers.

    Cook for an additional 4-6 minutes. To add cheese, stop the air fryer when there is 1-2 minutes left.

    ​4. Check For Doneness

    Use an Instant Read thermometer to check for doneness. For ½-inch patties, it should take between 10-12 minutes to cook. 

    This is a image showing a person using a instant read thermometer checking the temp of air fryer burgers.

    Here is the Temperature Guide for medium-well to well-done. 

    • Medium-Well: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of about 150-155°F (65-68°C). At this temperature, the meat will be mostly gray with a slight hint of pink in the center.
    • Well Done: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F (71°C) or higher. At this temperature, the meat will be fully cooked through with no pink color remaining.

    5. Rest and Serve

    Once cooked to your desired doneness, remove the patties from the air fryer and let them rest for a few minutes before serving.

    This allows the juices to redistribute, ensuring moist, flavorful, and juicy hamburgers.

    Additional Tips for Perfect Air Fryer Hamburgers

    After you have removed your hamburger patties, use the air fryer to toast your buns. Brush the inside of the buns with a little butter, then add them to the air fryer basket cut side up. Toast the buns for 2-3 minutes. 

    This is a image of a person brushing melted butter on the inside of hamburger buns before toasting in a air fryer.

    Build your Burger

    Build your burger by putting your condiments on your bun, then add your meat and your favorite toppings.

    What to Serve Air-Fried Burgers With

    ​Substitutions

    If you do not like beef patties, you can use ground chicken or ground turkey as a substitute. Just know that both of these are lean meats and may cause dry burgers. You may also have to adjust your cooking time. Also, the internal temperature for these meats should only be well done at 165 degrees Fahrenheit. 

    Storage Tips

    If you have any leftover burgers, you can store them in an airtight container or cover them with aluminum foil. Place them in your refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

    ​FAQ's

    Do I need to flip the hamburgers in the air fryer?

    Yes, you will need to flip the burgers close to have the way through the cooking process. This will allow for even browning and cooking time.

    How long to cook a frozen burger in the air fryer?

    For a frozen burger, you will want to cook it for 13-15 minutes at 370 degrees Fahrenheit. Flip the burger halfway through.

    How do I know when my hamburgers are done in the air fryer?

    The best and safest way to tell if the hamburgers are done is by using an Instant read thermometer to check the internal temperature.

    What are some tips for keeping air fryer hamburgers juicy?

    Use ground beef with a higher fat content for juicer burgers. I like to use 80/20 as the perfect blend. Avoid over-packing the patties and allow them to rest after cooking before serving.

    Yield: 4 hamburgers

    How to Cook Hamburgers in the Air Fryer (Simple Recipe)

    How to Cook Hamburgers in the Air Fryer (Simple Recipe)

    If you're asking, "How to cook hamburgers in the air fryer?" you're in the right place. Cooking hamburgers in an air fryer is super easy and quick. In this post, I'll guide you through the cooking times and some simple tips to ensure your burgers turn out juicy and delicious.

    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Additional Time 2 minutes
    Total Time 27 minutes

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for Air Fryer Burgers

    • 1 pound of fresh hamburger meat
    • ¾ of teaspoon of sea salt or kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon of black pepper
    • 4 hamburger buns

    Optional Ingredients

    • ¾ teaspoon of Health Riles Garlic Jalapeño rub-If using rub omit salt
    • 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce
    • ½ teaspoon Garlic powder-If using Heath Riles seasoning omit this
    • ½ teaspoon Onion powder-If using Heath Riles seasoning omit this.

    New Group

    • 4 cheese slices
    • lettuce
    • Sliced tomatoes
    • Red onion
    • Pickles
    • Slaw
    • Homemade chili
    • Mustard
    • Ketchup
    • Mayonnaise

    Instructions

    1. Prepare your hamburger Patties

    In a mixing bowl or large bowl, add your hamburger meat and seasonings of choice. Use a wooden spoon or your hands to mix ingredients well until it is well incorporated.

    Divide the meat into 4 to 6-ounce-pound patties that are about ½ inches thick. Make an indent into the center of each patty. This will allow the center to cook evenly with the rest of the pattie.

    Arrange the patties on a pan or plate and set to the side. I like to do this about 30 minutes beforehand to allow the seasonings time to meld together. 

    2. Preheat the Air Fryer

    Preheat the air fryer to 370 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 minutes.

    3. Cooking the Air Fryer Hamburger Patties

    Spray the Air fryer basket with cooking oil or cooking spray. I like to spray a little on the patties as well. This will help the burgers have a crispy exterior.

    Arrange the patties in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

    Cook for 6 minutes then pull out the air fryer basket and use the tongs to flip the burgers over. Cook for an additional 4-6 minutes. 

    4. Check For Doneness

    Use an Instant Read thermometer to check for doneness. For ½-inch patties, it should take between 10-12 minutes to cook. 

    Here is the Temperature Guide for medium-well to well-done. 

    • Medium-Well: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of about 150-155°F (65-68°C). At this temperature, the meat will be mostly gray with a slight hint of pink in the center.
    • Well Done: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F (71°C) or higher. At this temperature, the meat will be fully cooked through with no pink color remaining.

    To add cheese, pause cooking on the air fryer when you have 1-2 minutes remaining. Add the cheese then continue the cooking until time is done.

    5. Rest and Serve

    Once cooked to your desired doneness, remove the patties from the air fryer and let them rest for a few minutes before serving. This allows the juices to redistribute, ensuring moist, flavorful, and juicy hamburgers.

    Recommended Products

    As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Beef Recipes

    Simple Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

    by 2 Comments

    This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is a delightful fusion of vibrant flavors and textures, perfect for any occasion.  It takes the flavors of Mexican Street corn and combines them with pasta for an awesome cold pasta salad dish. Whether you're hosting a summer BBQ, attending a potluck, or simply craving a fresh and flavorful side dish, this easy-to-make recipe is sure to impress and satisfy.

    This image shows Mexican Street Corn Salad in the foreground with a red onion and cilantro on the right side.

    I have to admit, growing up, I was never a big fan of pasta salad (I know shocking right?). Many people don't care for cold pasta dishes, and I was one of them. Despite pasta salad being a staple at church potlucks and summertime cookouts, it just wasn't my favorite. That changed when my mom started making this irresistible spaghetti pasta salad—I fell in love with it instantly.

    Suddenly, I began to enjoy all kinds of pasta salads. I started trying different recipes and discovered I really liked them. With an upcoming cookout, I thought it would be fun to try a new variation of Pasta Salad inspired by Mexican-style street corn.

    What Is Mexican Street Corn

    Street corn, known as "elote" in Spanish, is a popular Mexican street food typically made with grilled or boiled corn on the cob. It's traditionally served with a variety of flavorful toppings, creating a delicious and savory treat.

    This image shows charred Corn on the cob on a grill cooking.

    Grilled Mexican street corn classic preparation involves coating the corn with a mixture of mayonnaise, crema (a Mexican sour cream), and lime juice, then sprinkling it with chili powder, cotija cheese, and cilantro. The combination of smoky, sweet, tangy, and spicy flavors makes street corn a beloved snack or side dish in Mexican cuisine.

    If you have not heard of Mexican Street corn, you may have been hiding under a rock. Gaining popularity in the early 2000s due to the rise of the popularity of food trucks, it has now gained a huge cultural following similar to Jalapeño poppers. 

    As food trucks and casual dining spots started to embrace more diverse and authentic Mexican dishes, elote became a trendy and beloved item on menus across the country. Its unique combination of flavors and the rise of social media food trends further contributed to its popularity, making it a staple at food festivals, street fairs, and even upscale restaurants.

    We have taken the best flavors of Mexican Street Corn and Pasta Salad and combined them into this awesome street corn pasta salad that is bursting with flavor and appeal. 

    Why You'll Love Mexican Street Corn Salad (Elote Pasta Salad)

    • Bursting with Flavor: This salad combines the smoky, savory taste of grilled corn with the zesty kick of lime and spices, creating a flavor explosion in every bite. The addition of creamy cotija cheese and fresh cilantro adds even more depth and richness.
    • Perfect for Any Occasion: Whether you're hosting a summer barbecue, attending a potluck, or looking for a quick and satisfying weeknight dinner, this pasta salad is versatile and always a crowd-pleaser. It's easy to make ahead and travels well, making it a great choice for any gathering.
    • Unique appeal: This dish is likely something your party guests have never experienced but didn't realize they were missing out on.
    • Easy to Make: With simple steps, this recipe is straightforward and beginner-friendly. You can whip it up in no time, and the dressing comes together effortlessly, ensuring you spend less time in the kitchen and more time enjoying your meal.
    This image is a vertical image of Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

    If you are looking for an awesome main dish to serve this Mexican Street Corn Pasta salad with, this Mexican Taco Beef Pie is one of my favorites that pairs well with this side dish.

    What Does This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Taste Like

    Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad, also known as Elote Pasta Salad combines sweet, smoky, and tangy flavors. It features a creamy dressing that perfectly coats al dente pasta, providing a satisfyingly chewy texture that holds onto every flavor. This dish is a unique addition to your menu with fresh corn, chopped Jalapeños, spices like chili powder and paprika, and fresh herbs enhancing its freshness. 

    It's guaranteed to be a hit at your summertime cookout, offering a delightful twist that will have your guests asking for more. It truly is the perfect side dish.

    What You Need to Make This Recipe

    You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

    Ingredients for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

    For The Salad:

    • Corn- Use fresh or canned corn. If you really want an authentic taste, use fresh grilled corn on the cob to get the flavors of traditional Mexican street corn.
    • Pasta- Any pasta will do. Bow Tie (farfalle), Rotini, or Cellentani Pasta are favorites. 
    • Red Onion-Finely diced
    • Jalapeño- It's not a Mexican dish without Jalapeños, right? Make sure to remove the seeds and the ribs, then finely diced them up. 
    • Fresh Cilantro- Cilantro adds a great flavor to this dish but some folks do not like it. Omit it if it is not your preference. Finely chopped. 
    • Black Beans- We like to add black beans because it gives the dish a great color contrast as well as extra flavor and some protein.
    • Olive Oil-to drizzle on the pasta to keep it from sticking.

    For the Dressing

    • Mayonnaise- I prefer Duke's Mayo but use whatever brand you like. 
    • Crema- Use Mexican Crema if you can find it but if not, you can use Sour cream or even plain Greek yogurt. 
    • Lime Juice
    • Cotija Cheese-Can substitute Feta cheese.
    • Chili Powder
    • Smoked Paprika
    • Garlic Powder
    • Cayenne Pepper- This dish already has Jalapeños but Cayenne really gives it that extra kick. 
    • Sea Salt
    • Black Pepper

    Garnish

    • Cotija Cheese-Sprinkle on top followed by the other ingredients. (can substitute Feta cheese)
    • Chili Powder
    • Lime Zest
    • Cilantro
    This image is a vertical image with all the ingredients to make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad with labels telling you what the ingredients are.

    ​Optional Ingredients

    • Cherry tomatoes- The bright red color will make this dish pop and add a burst of sweetness and acidic flavor.
    • Green Onions-Top with green onions. 
    • Grilled Chicken-Turn this side dish into a main meal with the addition of grilled chicken. 
    • Bell Peppers

    Equipment You'll Need

    • Large Pot
    • Colander
    • Small Bowl
    • Grill- If you choose to grill your corn instead of using canned corn.
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Cutting Board
    • Sharp Knife
    • Measuring Cups
    • Measuring spoon
    • Large Serving Bowls

    Note: Check out our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for items that I use and recommend for everyday use in the kitchen. 

    YouTube video

    How To Make Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

    ​Step-by-step instructions

    1. Prepare the corn: If grilling corn, grill it until it has a slight char. Then remove the corn kernels from the corn cob using a sharp knife or a corn peeler.

    Corn Peeler from Amazon
    This image shows corn on the cob on a grill.
    This image shows charred Corn on the cob on a grill cooking.
    This image shows a knife cutting grilled corn off the cob to make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

    If using canned corn, drain the corn and set aside. If using frozen corn, thaw it out completely. You can add the canned or frozen corn to a skillet with a little oil to get a slight char on it if you prefer.

    2. Cook the Pasta: Place a large pot of salted water on medium-high heat. Add the uncooked pasta to the water and cook al dente or almost done. Drain the pasta using the colander, then place in the bottom of a large bowl. Coat the pasta with the olive oil. You can save a little of the pasta water to use if the noodles stick further. 

    This image show a large pot of salted water sitting on a gas stove ready to be boiled.
    This image shows a large pot full of salted water to cook pasta for Mexican Street Corn Salad.
    This image shows pasta in a large bowl to make pasta salad.

    3. Make the Dressing: In a small bowl, mix mayo, crema, lime juice, smoked paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, Cayenne pepper, Sea salt, and black pepper. Add in the Cotija Cheese. Mix ingredients until well incorporated. 

    This image shows adding mayo to a bowl to make the dressing for Mexican Corn Pasta Salad.
    This image shows adding lime juice to a bowl to make Mexican Street Corn Salad.
    This image shows all the seasonings in a small bowl for the dressing for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.
    This image shows what the dressing for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad looks like up close on a spoon.
    This is what the dressing should look like after mixed up

    4. Assemble the Pasta salad: Drain the black beans and add to the large bowl with the pasta. Next add in the corn, finely chopped red onion, Jalapeño, and cilantro. Pour the dressing over the ingredients and mix until well incorporated. 

    This image shows all the ingredients in a large bowl for Mexican Street corn pasta salad.

    5. Garnish: For a final touch, you can garnish the salad with additional crumbled cotija cheese, chopped cilantro, lime zest, and a sprinkle of chili powder for extra flavor and visual appeal.

    This image shows Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad up close with a silver spoon in it and cilantro and cotija cheese in the middle.

    How To Serve

    Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is best served chilled or at room temperature, making it perfect for gatherings, picnics, or as a side dish at a barbecue. Here’s how to serve it:

    1. Chill if Necessary: If the salad has been refrigerated, allow it to sit at room temperature for a few minutes to take the chill off slightly before serving.
    2. Transfer to a Serving Bowl: Place the chilled or room temperature salad into a clean and presentable serving bowl.
    3. Serve: Place the bowl of Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad on your dining table or buffet spread. Provide serving utensils so guests can help themselves.
    4. Enjoy: Encourage guests to mix the salad slightly before serving themselves to ensure they get a bit of everything—creamy dressing, crunchy vegetables, and savory cheese—in each bite.

    This dish is versatile and pairs well with grilled meats, and seafood, or as a standalone vegetarian option. Its vibrant colors and flavors make it a delightful addition to any meal.

    Storage Tips

    You can store leftover Mexican Street Corn Pasta salad in an airtight container. Place in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

    ​​FAQ's

    Can I make this delicious pasta salad ahead of time?

    Yes! Prepare the salad up to a day in advance.

    Can I substitute the cheese?

    Absolutely! Feel free to customize it with your favorite cheese. Feta cheese is a nice substitute for Cojita.

    Is this dish spicy?

    This Cold pasta salad has a mild kick from the cayenne pepper and the Jalapeño peppers. If you would like it to be milder, feel free to omit those.

    Yield: 6-8

    Simple Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

    This image shows a low quartering away shot of Mexican street corn pasta salad.

    This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is a delightful fusion of vibrant flavors and textures, perfect for any occasion.  It takes the flavors of Mexican Street corn and combines them with pasta for an awesome cold pasta salad dish. Whether you're hosting a summer BBQ, attending a potluck, or simply craving a fresh and flavorful side dish, this easy-to-make recipe is sure to impress and satisfy. 

    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes

    Ingredients

    Salad

    • 6 Ears of Corn (3 cups canned or frozen)-Use fresh or canned corn. If you really want an authentic taste, use grilled corn on the cob to get the flavors of traditional Mexican street corn.
    • 16 ounces of uncooked Pasta- Any pasta will do. Bow Tie (farfalle), Rotini, or Cellentani Pasta are favorites.
    • ½ cup of Red Onion-Finely diced
    • 2 Jalapeños- Remove the seeds and the ribs, then finely diced them up.
    • ¼ cup of fresh Cilantro- Finely chopped.
    • 1 can of black beans-drained
    • 1 teaspoon of olive oil

    Dressing

    • ½ cup of Mayonnaise
    • ½ cup of crema (can substitute sour cream or Greek yogurt)
    • 3 tablespoons of lime juice
    • ½ cup of cotija cheese
    • 1 teaspoon of chili powder
    • ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    Garnish

    • 1 tablespoon of cotija cheese
    • ¼ teaspoon of chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
    • 1 tablespoon of cilantro

    Instructions

      1. Prepare the corn: If grilling corn, grill it until it has a slight char. Then remove the corn kernels from the corn cob. If using canned corn, drain the corn and set aside. If using frozen corn, thaw it out completely.  You can add the canned or frozen corn to a skillet with a little oil to get a slight char on it if you prefer.

      2. Cook the Pasta: Place a large pot of salted water on medium-high heat. Add the uncooked pasta to the water and cook al dente or almost done. Drain the pasta using the colander, then place in the bottom of a large bowl. Coat the pasta with the olive oil. You can save a little of the pasta water to use if the noodles stick further. 

      3. Make the Dressing: In a small bowl, mix mayo, crema, lime juice, smoked paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, sea salt, and black pepper. Add in the Cotija Cheese. Mix ingredients until well incorporated. 

      4. Assemble the Pasta salad: Drain the black beans and add to the large bowl with the pasta. Next add in the corn, finely chopped red onion, Jalapeño, and cilantro. Pour the dressing over the ingredients and mix until well incorporated. 

      5. Garnish: For a final touch, you can garnish the salad with additional crumbled cotija cheese, chopped cilantro, lime zest, and a sprinkle of chili powder for extra flavor and visual appeal.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Side Dishes

    What to Serve Sourdough Bread With: 6 Favorite Pairings

    by Leave a Comment

    Sourdough bread is an incredibly versatile bread that can be enjoyed in countless ways. With its chewy texture and crispy outer layer, you are sure to love it. If you're wondering what to serve sourdough bread with, look no further. Sit back and relax as I guide you through a variety of delectable options that are sure to delight your taste buds.

    From savory pairings to sweet treats, this list has something for everyone, whether you're planning a casual breakfast, a hearty lunch, or an elegant dinner. Get ready to elevate your sourdough experience with these mouthwatering suggestions.

    Growing up, my mom was always making bread. She made quick breads like Banana nut bread, she made homemade white bread, and she made Sourdough bread.  Her Sourdough bread recipe was not your typical traditional Homemade sourdough bread though.

    This image shows sourdough bread made from potato flake starter sitting on a cutting board with potato flake starter in the background.
    Sourdough made from potato flake starter

    It was Sourdough bread made from a Potato Flake starter, or what some people call Potato sourdough bread. It is lighter fluffier and less chewy than traditional Sourdough or what some call San Francisco Sourdough bread. Even though I was accustomed to Potato Sourdough bread, I still love traditional sourdough bread as well. 

    In this post, were are going to share with you what to serve delicious sourdough bread with.

    What is Sourdough Bread?

    Sourdough Bread is made from a natural leavening agent. The leavening agent is fermented which gives the bread its sour flavor.

    Traditional Sourdough Starter

    According to goodFood, sourdough is naturally leavened bread, which means it doesn’t use commercial yeast to rise. Instead, it uses a ‘starter’ – a fermented flour and water mixture that contains wild yeast and good bacteria – to rise. This also produces the tangy flavor and slightly chewy texture you’ll find in sourdough. 

    This is also the reason why sourdough bread is a healthier option because the fermented starter is full of probiotics, natural wild yeasts, and good bacteria.

    Traditional Sourdough starters use flour and water to ferment. Wild yeasts and bacteria grow on this and this is what causes the bread to rise.

    In this case, we are using an easy-to-make sourdough bread using a potato flake starter which starts with a commercial yeast called active dry yeast to get it started, but then wild yeast takes over after it has fermented.

    Unique Suggestions for What to Serve Sourdough Bread With

    Here we will give you a list of what we love to serve Sourdough Bread with.

    #1 Sourdough Bread Accompaniments: Soups, Stews, and Chili. 

    My favorite way to enjoy a slice of sourdough bread is by dipping it into a bowl of Slow Cooker Beef & Bean Chili. This chili is full of protein and super easy to adjust to your liking, making it a must-try recipe if you want to spice up your dinner routine.

    Slow cooker beef & Bean Chili

    The tangy taste of sourdough bread goes well with the bold, spicy flavors of the chili. It adds a nice contrast that makes each bite more delicious. Sourdough bread has a chewy crust and a soft, airy inside, which pairs perfectly with the hearty, chunky texture of the chili.

    It's especially tasty when the bread is fresh. Anytime I want to know what to serve sourdough bread with, Soups, stews, and chili are going to be at the top of the list.

    Sourdough bread is also great to be served with Potato soup, beef stew, chowder, Catfish Stew, and vegetable soup among many others.

    #2 Sourdough Bread Sandwich Ideas

    You can't talk about sourdough bread without mentioning sandwiches. Whether it's a classic turkey or ham sandwich, grilled cheese sandwiches, or a tuna melt on fresh sourdough bread, sourdough bread is an ideal choice.

    Its unique tangy flavor enhances the taste of fillings like savory meats and fresh vegetables.

    Top slices of sourdough bread with some melty cheese and melted butter for an open-face cheese sandwich. You could also top it with your favorite toppings as well. There is nothing better than cheesy sourdough bread!

    The chewy crust and soft interior hold up perfectly to both hearty and delicate ingredients. Plus, sourdough's natural fermentation process makes it easier to digest and adds beneficial probiotics, boosting its appeal as a delicious and nutritious sandwich base. 

    Its rustic texture also makes it a perfect canvas for peanut butter sandwiches—I love mixing peanut butter with a touch of honey and spreading it on sourdough slices for a delightful snack or meal. It also makes a great Peanut Butter and Jelly sandwich. Two of my favorite Jellys or Jams to use are this Homemade Muscadine Jelly and this Strawberry Jam. 

    Sandwiches are a great option when considering what to serve sourdough bread with.

    #3 What to Serve Sourdough Bread with at Breakfast

    Breakfast has to be my favorite meal. In the South, bread is just a natural thing to serve with breakfast. Whether you talking about Grits, eggs, bacon, and slices of toasted sourdough bread, or making sourdough French Toast or French Toast Casserole.

    French Toast with Sourdough Bread

    It pairs great with either one. 

    Another great option for what to serve sourdough bread with at breakfast is an avocado spread. You would use this to make the popular avocado toast that everyone is eating now.

    This is a image of sourdough bread topped with avocado spread and scrambled eggs.

    Of course, you could make plain sourdough toast and spread some butter on top or some fresh Jam or Jelly. 

    #4 What To Serve Sourdough Bread with: Salads

    Sourdough bread pairs wonderfully with salads, enhancing the overall dining experience with its unique texture and flavor. Its chewy texture and tangy taste provide a delicious contrast to the crisp freshness of salads, making each bite more interesting and satisfying.

    Sourdough can be served alongside salads as a hearty side dish, perfect for soaking up dressings and adding a rustic touch to the meal.

    For an even more delightful twist, you can use stale bread to make homemade sourdough croutons. These croutons add a crunchy texture and rich flavor, elevating the simplest garden salad to new heights.

    Whether you're enjoying a basic garden salad with fresh vegetables and a light vinaigrette or a more elaborate Caesar salad with creamy dressing and Parmesan, sourdough bread complements these flavors beautifully. Its robust texture stands up well to the creamy dressings of a Caesar salad, while its tanginess contrasts nicely with the salty anchovies and sharp cheese.

    In a Greek salad, sourdough bread's tangy notes harmonize with the briny olives, feta cheese, and juicy cherry tomatoes, adding depth and satisfaction to the dish. The bread's ability to absorb the flavors of the dressing and ingredients without becoming soggy makes it a perfect accompaniment.

    Additionally, sourdough bread can be transformed into a delicious panzanella, a traditional Italian bread salad. Combining chunks of sourdough with ripe tomatoes, cucumbers, red onions, and a balsamic vinaigrette creates a refreshing and hearty salad that showcases the bread’s versatility.

    When considering what to eat with sourdough bread, its unique characteristics make it an excellent partner for a wide variety of salads. Its chewy texture, tangy flavor, and versatility allow it to be transformed into crunchy croutons or integrated into bread salads, enhancing depth and satisfaction and making your meal more enjoyable and memorable.

    ​#5 What To Serve Sourdough Bread with: Spreads and Dips

    Sourdough is the perfect bread for spreads and dips because its tangy flavor and sturdy texture significantly enhance the taste experience and hold up well against thick or creamy toppings. The chewy crust and soft interior of sourdough provide a satisfying base that complements a wide range of spreads and dips without becoming too soggy.

    This makes it perfect for enjoying everything from savory hummus and creamy cheese spreads to tangy tapenades and rich guacamole.

    Garlic Butter Spread

    One delightful option is to make a spread from garlic butter. The richness of the butter combined with the aromatic garlic pairs beautifully with the tanginess of sourdough, creating a luxurious and flavorful bite. Spread this mixture generously over a slice of sourdough for a simple yet indulgent treat.

    Hummus

    Hummus is another excellent option for spreading on sourdough bread. Its creamy, smooth texture and savory flavor complement the bread's unique taste, making for a delicious and healthy snack or appetizer.

    this image shows a closeup of a bowl of hummus.

    Olive Oil For Dipping Bread

    For a more sophisticated dip, consider a combination of high-quality olive oil, fresh herbs like basil or parsley, a sprinkle of black pepper, a little sea salt, and a splash of balsamic vinegar. This mix makes a wonderful dip for sourdough bread, highlighting its flavors and providing a fresh, vibrant contrast.

    Cheese Spreads

    Creamy cheese spreads such as herb goat cheese or classic cream cheese are also fantastic with sourdough bread. The creamy, tangy cheese enhances the bread’s texture and flavor, creating a rich and satisfying combination.

    this image shows goat cheese spread on sourdough bread.

    Another great spread is an Olive tapenade made from olives, capers, and anchovies. This salty, umami-rich mixture pairs perfectly with sourdough’s chewy texture and tangy taste, creating a delightful and complex flavor profile.

    Guacamole

    Guacamole, with its creamy texture and fresh, zesty flavor, also pairs wonderfully with sourdough bread. The combination of ripe avocados, lime juice, and cilantro spread over a slice of sourdough makes for a refreshing and satisfying snack.

    Incorporating sourdough bread into your repertoire of spreads and dips allows for endless culinary creativity. Its unique flavor and texture can elevate even the simplest spreads, making every bite a delightful and memorable experience.

    #6 What to Serve Sourdough Bread With: Sweet Treats and Desserts

    While sourdough bread is not traditionally associated with desserts like cakes or pastries, it can add an interesting twist to sweet dishes, bringing complexity and a satisfying texture. If you have a sweet tooth, don't overlook sourdough bread as a dessert option.

    For instance, a loaf of sourdough can be transformed into a rich and flavorful bread pudding. The tangy notes of the bread complement the sweet, creamy custard, creating a dessert that is both comforting and sophisticated.

    This image shows a plate with a section of bread pudding on it.

    Additionally, sourdough bread makes an excellent base for sweet sandwiches. Spread Nutella between two slices for a decadent treat, or try a combination of peanut butter and honey for a classic yet delightful flavor pairing. The slight chewiness and robust flavor of sourdough enhance these fillings, making each bite more enjoyable.

    You can also experiment with French toast made from sourdough. The bread's hearty texture holds up well to the egg mixture, resulting in a dish that is crispy on the outside and tender on the inside. Top it with fresh fruit, whipped cream, or a drizzle of maple syrup for a breakfast that's as indulgent as it is delicious.

    Incorporating sourdough bread into desserts allows for creative and delicious possibilities. Knowing what to serve sourdough bread with can enhance its unique flavor profile and texture, elevating simple sweet dishes and offering a new and exciting way to enjoy this beloved bread.

    How To Make Sourdough Bread

    I typically make sourdough bread from a Potato Flake starter. Before you can make sourdough bread using a potato flake starter, you must first have the starter.

    The starter takes a few days to make but once it is put together, you just maintain it by feeding it every few days, then remove the starter you need to make your bread. Here is everything you need to know about making a Potato Flake Starter.

    Potato flake sourdough starter

    This starter is versatile in that you can make Sourdough bread but you can also make these wonderful Sourdough Cinnamon rolls or even Sourdough Pancakes from it. After this, you will have your sourdough starter to use anytime you wish. 

    Once you have your starter made, it is now time to make the bread. Making the bread is easy but it does take some time to prepare. Everything you need to learn about how to make you will be found in this post on Homemade Sourdough Bread from a Potato Flake Starter. 

    Whether you're enjoying it with savory dishes, using it creatively in desserts, or savoring it on its own, sourdough bread offers a unique culinary experience. Its tangy flavor, chewy texture, and versatility make it a favorite among bread lovers and chefs alike.

    From hearty meals to sweet treats, knowing what to serve sourdough bread with adds depth and character to every bite. So, whether you're baking it fresh at home or picking up a loaf from your favorite bakery, embrace the delicious possibilities that sourdough bread brings to your table. Enjoy every slice!

    ​

    Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Recipe (Easy)

    by 4 Comments

    Old-fashioned Southern blackberry cobbler is a beloved dessert that captures the heart of Southern tradition. Made with ripe, juicy blackberries and a buttery, soft, and fluffy crust, this classic treat combines the tartness of the berries with a sweet, golden topping. Often served warm with vanilla ice cream or whipped cream, it evokes the comfort of home-cooked meals and family gatherings.

    This is a image of homemade blackberry cobbler that has been scooped out of the casserole dish and it sitting on a plate in the foreground. The casserole dish is seen sitting in the background.

    I still remember it like it was yesterday, walking around the edge of our cow pasture collecting ripe blackberries. Mom, my brother, and I would pick them, eating every other one, and gathering the rest in a small 1-gallon bucket.

    It felt like it would take forever to fill it up, especially since I was eating so many as I was picking them. Once we got back to the house, Mom would wash and dry them. We knew what was coming for Sunday dinner and could hardly wait.

    this is a image of wild blackberries.

    Mom would take those blackberries and make the most delicious old-fashioned Southern blackberry cobbler you've ever tasted. While some people prefer cobbler with a flaky crust, we loved ours with a sweet, buttery, and fluffy crust that had a chewy and slightly crispy exterior. It was absolutely yummy.

    Why You Will Love This Homemade Blackberry Cobbler Recipe​

    • Delicious Flavor: The perfect balance of tart, juicy blackberries, and a sweet, buttery crust.
    • Nostalgic Appeal: Evokes the comfort and warmth of home-cooked meals and family gatherings.
    • Simple Ingredients: Made with common pantry staples and fresh blackberries.
    • Easy to Make: This straightforward recipe that even beginners can follow.
    • Versatile: Perfect for any occasion, from casual family dinners to festive gatherings.
    • Textural Delight: Combines a fluffy, buttery crust with a chewy, slightly crispy exterior.
    • Crowd-Pleaser: Loved by kids and adults alike, it’s sure to be a hit.
    • Customizable: Can be served with ice cream, whipped cream, or enjoyed on its own.
    • Seasonal Freshness: Ideal for using fresh summer blackberries.
    • Authentic Southern Charm: A classic dessert that brings a taste of the South to your table.
    This image is a closeup of a spoon full of cobbler and homemade vanilla ice cream.

    What Does Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Taste Like?

    As I mentioned earlier, this old-fashioned blackberry cobbler features a unique topping that you might not be familiar with. It's like a sweet biscuit, with a buttery golden brown, fluffy interior and a slightly chewy, crispy exterior.

    This image shows a closeup of the corner of a baked blackberry cobbler and what the golden buttery crust looks like.

    The fresh blackberries provide a slightly acidic kick, balanced by their natural sweetness and a touch of added sugar. This well-rounded dessert is highly prized in the South, especially during the summertime.

    The combination of the warm, sweet-tart blackberries and the crisp, golden topping creates a comforting and nostalgic dessert that is both simple and profoundly delicious. Whether served on its own or with a side of vanilla ice cream on top, Homemade Blackberry Cobbler is a perfect harmony of sweet, tangy, and buttery flavors.

    This image shows blackberry cobbler topped with homemade vanilla ice cream on a plate. There is a canister of ice cream in the background and some spoons.

    If you love this Old-fashioned Blackberry cobbler recipe, you are going to love this Old-Fashioned Persimmon Pudding Recipe! You have got to try it this fall.

    Where to find Blackberries for your Cobbler

    Berry picking is a fantastic family activity that teaches children where their food comes from and how it's grown. The experience of gathering berries and then baking a dessert with the fruits of your labor is both enjoyable and rewarding.

    This is a image of a young boy picking blackberries from a row of thornless blackberries.
    My son picking blackberries from our Thornless Blackberry patch

    Having fresh blackberries will result in the best-tasting cobbler so I am going to give you a few places to look for them. If you cannot find them fresh though, you can use frozen store-bought blackberries.

    Wild Blackberries

    In the South, wild blackberry bushes grow wild everywhere. They are in people's backyards, along roadsides, and everywhere in between. The downside is the wild blackberries are smaller, and the canes have thorns or brambles on them.

    This is image of wild blackberries closeup.

    The wild variety is also not quite as sweet as improved or cultivated varites.

    Cultivated Blackberries

    Another option is to grow your own blackberries. This is what I do to have a ton of fresh berries. As they are coming off the bushes in the summertime, I freeze them to be able to enjoy them year-round.

    This is a closeup of a lady picking thornless cultivated blackberries.
    This picture is my wife picking a ripe blackberry from our bushes

    They are easy to grow and many of the improved varieties offer no thorns, bigger berries, and sweeter berries (although some still have thorns). A few of my favorite varieties are Ouachita, Ponca, and Navaho. 

    ​Blackberries from a U-Pick Farm

    Another place to find fresh berries is from a U-pick farm. This may not be an option where you live but in my area, there are a few farms that grow cultivated blackberries for you to come pick for yourself.

    This is a image of a man picking blackberries at a u-pick farm.

    You pick the berries, then pay for them per pound that you have picked. The berries are similar to the cultivated varieties I have mentioned above. 

    Roadside Produce Stands

    Also, some roadside farm stands may sell fresh berries during the summer months and some grocery stores will carry them as well.

    Frozen Blackberries

    Ultimately though, if you cannot find fresh ones, you can use the frozen ones from the freezer section at your grocery store. Just make sure to leave them frozen and not to thaw them out before baking.

    ​What You'll Need to Make This Recipe

    You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe below, but let's start with the basics:

    ​Basic Ingredients for Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler

    ​Blackberry Mixture

    • Fresh or frozen Blackberries (If using Frozen leave them frozen and don't let them thaw before baking).
    • Sugar
    • Cornstarch
    • Melted butter
    • Lemon Juice
    This image is shows all the ingredients needed to make the blackberry mixture for the fruit cobbler.

    Cobbler Batter

    • Flour
    • Sugar
    • Baking powder
    • Sea salt or kosher salt
    • Milk
    • Melted butter
    • Pure vanilla extract- I prefer to use Sweet Southern Farms (a small batch, locally made extract). Use code "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE for a 10% discount.
    This image shows all of the ingredients to make the cobbler batter for the fruit cobbler.

    Note: See the Recipe Card at the Bottom for amounts

    ​Equipment You'll Need

    • Mixing bowl (Large bowl)
    • Small bowl
    • 9 x 13 baking dish
    • Spoon
    • Measuring cup
    • Measuring spoons
    • Serving Spoon
    • Cooling Rack

    Note: For a complete list of all the tools that I recommend, check out this article on Best Kitchen Essentials.

    How To Make Homemade Blackberry Cobbler

    ​Step-by-step instructions

    To Start: Preheat the oven to 375 Degrees Fahrenheit 

    Preparing the Blackberry Mixture: Rinse the blackberries thoroughly under cold water and pat them dry with a paper towel. 

    Place them in a mixing bowl. Pour melted butter over the top and mix well. Sprinkle blackberries with sugar, cornstarch, and lemon juice. This helps to sweeten the berries and create a thickened blackberry filling as they bake. Toss blackberries until they are evenly coated. 

    This is a image showing pouring melted butter over the blackberries to make the blackberry mixture.
    Pour butter over berries
    This image shows adding the sugar to the blackberries to make the blackberry mixture for the cobbler.
    Add sugar
    Then add cornstarch and lemon juice

    Make The Cobbler Topping: In a separate bowl, combine flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Whisk together. Then, stir in milk melted butter, and vanilla extract until combined.

    This image shows using a whisk to mix all of the dry ingredients together before adding in the wet ingredients to make a blackberry cobbler.
    Mix the dry ingredients
    This image shows adding the melted butter to the cobbler batter.
    Then add butter and vanilla extract
    This image shows adding milk to the dry ingredients to make the cobbler batter.
    Next, add in the milk
    This image shows whisking the batter together before pouring it over the blackberry mixture to make easy homemade blackberry cobbler.
    Mix ingredients

    Pro Tip: It is ok if the batter is slightly lumpy. Do not over-stir it.

    Assemble the cobbler: Pour the prepared blackberries into a greased baking dish, spreading them evenly. Pour the batter over top of the berries until it is evenly distributed. 

    This image shows what the blackberry mixture looks like after it has been mixed up and poured into a greased backing dish before adding the batter on top.
    This image shows pouring the batter over top of the blackberry mixture for blackberry cobbler.
    This image shows what it looks like once you pour the batter over top of the blackberry mixture in the baking dish before it goes into the oven.

    Bake the Cobbler: Place the fruit cobbler in the preheated oven and bake for about 45-50 minutes, or until the topping is golden brown and the filling is bubbly.

    This image shows putting the Old-fashioned Southern Blackberry cobbler into the oven to bake.

    Cool and Serve: Remove the cobbler from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack for about 10-15 minutes before serving. This allows the filling to set slightly.

    This image shows taking the golden brown blackberry cobbler out of the oven to let it cool before eating it.

    How To Serve

    Serve warm with a scoop of Homemade vanilla ice cream or whipped cream. You can also top with a little lemon zest for an added flavor pop!

    This is a image of old fashioned blackberry cobbler topped with homemade vanilla ice cream.

    ​Substitutions

    You can substitute other berries for the blackberries in any combination. Blueberries work great for this recipe. Also, you could use half raspberries and half blackberries for a delicious blend of sweet and tart flavors, enhancing the dish's texture and color. This would work great for the 4th of July time of the year for a red, white, and blue theme summertime cookout. 

    How To Store Blackberry Cobbler

    Cover the uneaten blackberry cobbler tightly with plastic wrap, or aluminum foil, or put it in an air-tight container. Place it in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. 

    ​FAQ's

    Can I use frozen blackberries instead of fresh ones?

    Yes. You can use frozen but make sure to leave them frozen before baking.

    What if I prefer a less sweet cobbler?

    You can reduce the amount of sugar in both the blackberry filling and the cobbler topping to suit your taste.

    How can I prevent the cobbler topping from becoming too soggy?

    If the cobbler topping becomes too soggy, next time you make it add an extra tablespoon of cornstarch to the berry mixture.

    Can I freeze blackberry cobbler?

    Yes, you can freeze baked blackberry cobbler. Make sure to cool it completely to room temperature, then wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and aluminum foil before freezing. You can also put it in a freezer-safe container. It will last 2 to 3 months in the freezer. To reheat, place it in the oven in the casserole dish it was in or in an oven-safe pan.

    Yield: 10

    Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Recipe (Easy)

    This is a image of Old Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler on a old white plate. You can see a silver spoon in the left side background.

    Old-fashioned Southern blackberry cobbler is a beloved dessert that captures the heart of Southern tradition. Made with ripe, juicy blackberries and a buttery, soft, and fluffy crust, this classic treat combines the tartness of the berries with a sweet, golden topping.

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes
    Additional Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes

    Ingredients

    Blackberry Mixture

    • 4 cups of Blackberries
    • ½ cup of white granulated sugar
    • 1 teaspoon of cornstarch
    • 1 teaspoon of lemon juice
    • 4 tablespoons melted butter

    Cobbler Batter

    • 2 ½ cups of All Purpose Flour
    • 1 ½ cup of White Granulated Sugar
    • 1 teaspoon of sea salt or kosher salt
    • 1 tablespoon baking powder
    • 2 cups of whole milk
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 4 tablespoons of melted butter

    Instructions

      1. To Start: Preheat the oven to 375 Degrees Fahrenheit 
      2. Preparing the Blackberry Mixture: Rinse the blackberries thoroughly under cold water and pat them dry with a paper towel. Place them in a mixing bowl. Pour melted butter over the top and mix well. Sprinkle blackberries with sugar, cornstarch, and lemon juice. This helps to sweeten the berries and create a thickened blackberry filling as they bake. Toss blackberries until they are evenly coated. 
      3. Make The Cobbler Topping: In a separate bowl, combine flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Whisk together then stir in milk, melted butter, and vanilla extract until combined. It is ok if it is slightly lumpy. Do not over-stir it
      4. Assemble the cobbler: Pour the prepared blackberries into a greased baking dish, spreading them evenly. Pour the batter over top of the berries until it is evenly distributed. 
      5. Bake the Cobbler: Place the baking dish in the preheated oven and bake for about 45-50 minutes, or until the topping is golden brown and the filling is bubbly.
      6. Cool and Serve: Remove the cobbler from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack for about 10-15 minutes before serving. This allows the filling to set slightly.

    Notes

    • Cook times can vary depending on oven type and baking dish. Adjust accordingly. If the center is not set, you will need to add more baking time.
    • It is possible to substitute other berries such as Blueberries or Raspberries. You can also do any combination of the three.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Southern / Category: Dessert Recipes

    I hope you enjoy this awesome simple Blackberry Cobbler recipe. It is one of my favorite summer dessert recipes and I am sure it will also become a favorite of yours. 

    Creamy Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream with No Eggs

    by Leave a Comment

    Are you craving the creamiest, smoothest homemade vanilla ice cream ever? You’re in luck! This recipe brings back memories of summer cookouts and freshly churned ice cream. Enjoy it right after churning for a creamier ice cream that reminds you of a Wendy's Vanilla Frosty. Let it ripen in the freezer for a few hours for the ultimate homemade treat. Get ready to experience the best vanilla ice cream you've ever had!

    This image shows a up close looking into the ice cream churn after the ice cream machine has stop churning. The paddle is still in place and you can see the soft creamy texture of this epic Homemade Vanilla ice cream when it is done.

    Many years ago, I was on vacation in Pigeon Forge Tennesee. My father-in-law and I went around the countryside on a Saturday stopping by local yard sales.

    While at one particular yard sale, I saw an older Rival Ice Cream Churn for sale. I've been wanting to buy one and this was my opportunity to get one on a deal.

    The Rival Ice Cream Maker I bought in Pigeon Forge

    The best part was it was only $10 bucks. ( You know I had to talk them down so really I got it for $5) I swooped it up and brought it home. 

    I studied several recipes, tried a few, and ultimately settled on one in the book of the Rival Ice Cream churn. It was so good and creamy.

    This image shows soft and creamy homemade old fashioned vanilla ice cream in a brown bowl. In the upper left hand corner there is a plate with black berry cobbler on it. To the left there are two silver spoons and in the upper right hand corner you can see the ice cream canister.

    It only required a few simple ingredients and was very versatile in that you could add other ingredients to change the flavor from Vanilla to Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream just by adding in your favorite fruit or candy such as Chocolate chips or Reese's Butter Cup. 

    So far it has been my favorite of all the ice cream recipes I have tried and it is so much better than store-bought ice cream. If this is your first time making ice cream, don't fret.  I believe this recipe will become your favorite Homemade vanilla ice cream recipe and it is so easy to make.  

    This image shows homemade vanilla ice cream with a bit of homemade blackberry cobbler on a spoon in a bite shot.

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    1. Ultra-Smooth and Rich: Achieves a creamy texture without egg yolks.
    2. Easy and Quick: No tempering eggs means less time and effort.
    3. Allergy-Friendly: Perfect for those with egg allergies.
    4. Lower Cholesterol: Great for a healthier indulgence.
    5. Versatile Enjoyment: Enjoy this classic flavor plain or use a topping such as chocolate syrup, crumbled Oreo cookies, or Strawberry Jam. 
    6. Crowd-Pleaser: Brings back nostalgic flavors everyone will love.
    7. It is great on top of the Blackberry Cobbler!
    This image shows a close up of soft and creamy homemade vanilla ice cream on top of blackberry cobbler.
    Homemade Vanilla ice cream on top of Homemade Blackberry Cobbler

    Make sure to check out our list of 100 Interesting facts about Ice Cream!

    What You Need To Make This Recipe

    This is a list of all the ingredients needed to make this Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream No Eggs

    Vanilla Ice Cream ​Ingredients

    See the recipe card for quantities.

    • Whole Milk
    • Half and Half Creamer
    • Heavy Whipping Cream (Heavy Cream)
    • White Granulated Sugar (Cane sugar)
    • Sea Salt
    • Ice Cream Salt (Rock salt)
    • Pure Vanilla Extract- I prefer to use Sweet Southern Farms (a small batch locally made extract) Use ode "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE for a 10% discount.
    • Ice
    This image shows vanilla ice cream ingredients.

    Equipment You'll Need

    For a list of brands that I use and recommend for everyday Kitchen Basics, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials page. 

    Step-by-step Instructions

    Making the Ice Cream Base

    1. Add your milk products to the stock pot and turn on medium heat to medium-low heat.

    This image shows a person pouring whole milk to a pot to make home made ice cream.
    whole milk
    This image shows a person pouring half and half creamer to make homemade ice cream mixture.
    Half & Half
    This image shows a person pouring heavy whipping cream in a large stock pot to make a ice cream mixture for homemade ice cream.
    Heavy Whipping Cream

    2. Scald the milk (bring the milk base up to a temperature of 180 degrees Fahrenheit until you see bubbles forming around the sides). Use your instant-read thermometer to keep an eye on this.

    This image shows using a instant read thermometer made by thermoworks to check the temperature of the ice cream mixture that is in a large stock pot on the stove top. The thermometer reads 65 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Make sure to keep stirring the mixture as well. Once it reaches the temperature or is close to it, remove it. If the mixture gets too hot, it will erupt into a boiling mess and it will be ruined.

    This image shows a person using a wooden spoon to stir the ice cream mixture that is in a large stock pot on the stove top heating up.

    3. Next, remove the milk mixture from the heat then add in your sugar, salt, and Vanilla flavoring. Stir well to incorporate and dissolve the sugar.

    This image shows sugar and salt to be used in the ice cream mixture.
    Sugar and Salt
    This image shows adding sugar to the ice cream mixture.
    Adding Sugar and Salt to the Milk Base
    This image shows adding the pure vanilla extract from Sweet Southern Farms to the ice cream mixture.
    Pure Vanilla Extract
    This is a picture of a bottle of pure vanilla extract from Sweet Southern Farms.
    Pure Vanilla Extract from Sweet Southern Farms, a local company near me

    If you want your ice cream to turn out the best, use quality ingredients. For Vanilla ice cream, a high-quality Vanilla extract is important. I use a brand from a locally sourced company called Sweet Southern Farms that makes it in small batches. If you would like to purchase, they have offered you a 10% discount. Use code "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE" to get the discount.

    4. Pour your ice cream mixture into your ice cream canister. Add your mixer paddle and lid then place in the refrigerator or freezer. The mixture will need to chill before churning. Do not let it freeze. We are just looking for it to get cold.

    This image shows pouring the ice cream mixture into the ice cream churn canister.
    This image show putting the lid on the ice cream churn canister.

    5. Once your ice cream mixture is chilled you can remove it from the refrigerator or freezer and you are ready to churn it. 

    Optional: If you want to make a different ice cream flavor, you can add in your fruit base, candy base, or flavoring at this point. 

    Churning the Ice Cream Base

    1. Place your canister into the churn bucket of the electric ice cream maker.

    2. Add a layer of ice around the canister then a layer of salt. Keep alternating the ice and salt till it reaches just below the hole in the ice cream bucket.

    3. Install the motor of the ice cream maker on the ice cream bucket per the manufacturer's instructions.

    This image shows the Rival Ice Cream Maker up close. You can see the layers of ice and rock salt that is formed around the canister as the canister is being turned by the motor of the ice cream machine.

    4. Before I start I like to add a towel under the bucket and wrap the bucket in a towel. This will help catch the sweat and help insulate the bucket. Just be sure not to cover the motor up or the top of it where the fan is.

    5. If water builds up while churning, pour the water off through the hole in the side of the bucket. Keep adding more ice and salt layers till the motor has stopped churning.

    Note: The finished churning process can vary for other brands of ice cream makers. Follow the instructions from your manufacturer on how your brand works. This series is typical of most older electric churn ice cream machines.

    This image shows removing the top of the churn canister to reveal the homemade vanilla ice cream.

    The churn typically takes anywhere from 30 minutes to 1 hour. It varies by how cold your ice cream mixture is when you start churning and how well you layer the ice/salt layers in the ice cream machine.

    When the ice cream is ready, the motor will just stop. You will hear it lagging or straining as it gets closer and closer to being finished. Once it stops, you are ready to either eat it like this or move to the hardening section if you want hard ice cream.

    This image shows a person removing the paddle from the vanilla ice cream after it has finished churning.

    Note: You can eat the ice cream once it stops churning. This will give you a smooth and creamy vanilla ice cream texture that is similar to soft-serve ice cream. If you want more of a hardened texture similar to classic vanilla ice cream from an ice cream parlor, continue reading. 

    Hardening or Ripening the ice Cream

    1. Once the motor stops, you will take the canister out of the ice cream bucket. Take it to the sink so that you can remove the mixer paddle inside.

    This image shows a person scraping the remaining ice cream from the paddle of the ice cream churn. They are using a silver spoon.
    Use a spoon to scrap off the paddle

    2. Put the lid back on and stick the canister in the freezer for at least one hour to harden or ripen the ice cream.

    ​How To Serve Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

    • As a topping on Blackberry Cobbler, Peach Cobbler, or Apple Cobbler.
    • Make a Vanilla Ice Cream Cone.
    • Add ice cream to a bowl and top with fresh fruit or strawberry Jam.
    • Top with Maple Syrup and Peanut Butter
    • Top with chocolate syrup
    • Crumble some Oreo cookies on top for a crunchy texture. 
    • Make Vanilla Ice Cream Bars or a Vanilla Ice Cream Sandwich!

    ​Storage Tips

    ​Store leftover ice cream in a freezer-safe airtight container. It should be good for up to two months if stored properly.

    ​FAQ's

    Yield: 1 gallon

    Creamy Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream with No Eggs

    This image shows a close up of soft and creamy homemade vanilla ice cream on top of blackberry cobbler.

    Are you craving the creamiest, smoothest homemade vanilla ice cream ever? You’re in luck! This recipe brings back memories of summer cookouts and freshly churned ice cream. Enjoy it right after churning for a creamier ice cream that reminds you of a Wendy's Vanilla Frosty. Let it ripen in the freezer for a few hours for the ultimate homemade treat. Get ready to experience the best vanilla ice cream you've ever had!

    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Additional Time 45 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups Whole Milk
    • 2 cups Half and Half
    • 4 cups Whipping Cream
    • 1 ¾ cups Sugar
    • ½ teaspoon Sea Salt
    • 2 tablespoon Vanilla Extract
    • 16 lbs ice, this can vary depending on climate. Just make sure to have enough on hand.
    • 1 box ice cream salt, You can use Rock Salt for this as well.

    Instructions

      Ice Cream Mixture

    1. Start with a heavy-bottom saucepan. You will need at least a 6 or 8-quart pot.
    2. Add in your milk products and cut the burner on medium-low.
    3. At this point, we need to scald the milk. Milk is scalded when it reaches 180 degrees F. I like to use a quick-read thermometer to keep an eye on the temperature. Look for small bubbles to form around the edge and steam. Make sure to keep stirring the mixture as well. Once it reaches the temperature or is close to it, remove it. If the mixture gets too hot, it will erupt into a boiling mess and it will be ruined.
    4. Next, add in your sugar, salt, and Vanilla flavoring. Stir well to incorporate and dissolve the sugar.
    5. Pour your mixture into your ice cream canister. Add your mixer paddle and lid then place in the refrigerator or freezer. The mixture will need to chill before churning. Do not let it freeze. We are just looking for it to get cold.
    6. Once your mixture is chilled you can remove it from the refrigerator or freezer

    Churning the Ice Cream

    1. Place your canister into the churn bucket.
    2. Add a layer of ice around the canister then a layer of salt. You will keep alternating the ice and salt till it reaches just below the hole in the ice cream bucket.
    3. Install the motor on the ice cream bucket.
    4. Before I start I like to add a towel under the bucket and wrap the bucket in a towel. This will help catch the sweat and help insulate the bucket. Just be sure not to cover the motor up or the top of it where the fan is.
    5. Church your ice cream until the motor stops. This time can vary. You will also need to keep a check on the ice and salt mixture as it will melt. You can pour the water off through the hole in the side of the bucket and keep adding more ice and salt till it is finished.

    Hardening or ripening the ice cream

    1. Once the motor stops, you will take the canister out of the ice cream bucket. Take it to the sick so that you can remove the mixer paddle inside.
    2. Put the lid back on and stick the canister in the freezer for at least one hour to harden or ripen the ice cream.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Dessert Recipes

    Super Easy Grilled Backstrap Venison (Deer Meat)

    by Leave a Comment

    ​Today, we’re sharing a super easy recipe for grilled backstrap venison. This dish highlights Venison's natural, tender taste (deer meat) with a simple preparation perfect for any family dinner. Whether you're an experienced hunter or enjoy trying new recipes, this grilled venison backstrap will surely be a hit. Let's get started and enjoy some good Southern cooking!

    This is a closeup of venison backstrap steaks that have been cooked with some rosemary laying on top for a color pop.

    You may be looking at this and thinking, I am not eating deer meat. I can almost bet you would love the taste of venison backstrap that has been grilled. It tastes so similar to beef, you may not know the difference.

    One of my favorite things to do growing up is to deer hunt. Spending time with my dad, brothers, uncles, and cousins was time well spent. Not only that but the time spent in the stand is such a peaceful and relaxing time in nature.

    Watching the world come alive as the Sun comes up is such a refreshing way to unplug from all of the hustle and bustle of society, especially with how things are going in the current times. But this is not the only reason why I love to hunt, I love to eat Venison.

    Why I Love Venison

    Harvesting deer is the second reason I love going hunting. I love to eat Venison because I love the taste of it, but it is also super healthy for you. It is loaded with good protein and low in fats. When you talk about organic and healthy food, nothing is hardly better for you than venison. 

    This image shows what super easy grilled backstrap venison looks like close up as it has been cut open to reveal the color. The steak looks juicy and tender.

    According to Penn State University, Venison is high in essential amino acids and in addition, a rich source of thiamine, riboflavin, niacin, iron, and zinc. Venison meat is a perfect choice of protein because it is so low in cholesterol and saturated fat. 

    What Is Backstrap Venison

    Backstrap Venison is simply a certain cut of meat from a Whitetail deer. You may have heard of beef tenderloin, beef strip loin, or top loin right? Well, Backstrap Venison comes from the same area, but from a Whitetail deer. The tenderloin is the section of meat that runs along the spine inside the rib cage (think filet mignon) whereas the backstrap is the section of meat that runs along the outer edge of the spine. 

    Picture via Outside Bozeman

    This diagram from Outside Bozeman shows the Top loin, which is what we are calling Venison Backstrap.

    So essentially Backstrap venison comes from the area of the back of a deer that runs from the shoulder to the rump. The Tenerderloin and Backstrap are often considered the most tender cut of meat you can obtain from a whitetail deer and are considered a prized cut of meat.  

    This is a closeup image of a beautiful backstrap venison steak that has been rinsed and dried off ready for the marinade.
    Cut of Steak from the Backstrap

    The lack of connective tissue in this section of meat is what makes it so tender, that is if you know how to cook it. Because Venison has very little fat, it can dry out very quickly if you do not know how to cook it properly. I am going to show you an easy way to do this. 

    Just for informational purposes, this cut of venison can go by a few different names such as deer back straps, Venison backstraps, Venison Steak, venison tenderloin, Venison loin, Top Loin, and venison butterfly steak.

    What Does Deer Back Straps Taste Like

    In my opinion, backstrap does not have much of a gamey taste and reminds me of Beef steak. The backstrap is very mild compared to other areas or cuts of meat from a whitetail deer. The texture is very tender, similar to high-quality beef tenderloin or pork tenderloin. The diet of the deer can affect much of the flavor but it can have a slightly sweet taste as well. 

    The venison loin is very lean and versatile being that it can be used in a variety of ways and served with just about any side dish. The mild flavor of venison backstrap makes it a versatile cut that can absorb a variety of marinades, spices, and cooking techniques without losing its natural taste. 

    This is a image of Venison Steaks on the grill.

    In this recipe, we are keeping it very basic with our cooking method, we are using just three simple ingredients and using an outdoor grill. This will allow the natural taste of the venison tenderloin to shine through. I do include an optional marinade though in case you want to elevate the flavors a bit. 

    If you like venison and want to make jerky, check out this awesome jerky marinade recipe.

    What You Need to Make This Recipe

    This recipe only requires three simple ingredients

    ​Ingredients for Grilled Backstrap Venison

    • Olive Oil
    • Black Pepper
    • Sea Salt or Kosher Salt
    • Venison Backstrap (I cut mine into Steaks about ½ thick)
    This image shows the ingredients used to make a marinade for Venison Backstrap Steaks.

    Optional Ingredients:

    • Worcestershire Sauce
    • Minced garlic
    • chopped rosemary
    • Balsamic vinegar

    Note: See the recipe card for amounts

    Equipment You'll Need

    How To Cook Venison Backstrap on the Grill

    Venison is a very lean cut of meat and if not cooked properly is prone to drying out. I like to marinade with Olive oil to add a little fat, but also this is a binding agent for the salt and Black Pepper to stick to. 

    ​Step-by-step Instructions

    ​Simple Marinade

    1. Start by washing the Venison and then patting it dry with paper towels.

    This is a image of deer meat being rinsed off before being marinated to cook.

    Use a cutting board and sharp knife to trim off any fat or silver skin. If you have a whole backstrap, I recommend cutting them into ½-inch to 1-inch steaks.

    This is a image that shows the close up of venison backstrap in order to show what silver skin looks like. There is words written on the page that is says silver skin with an arrow pointing to the actual silver skin.

    2. Mix Olive Oil, Sea Salt, and Black Pepper in a small mixing bowl. 

    3. Add meat to the bowl and mix around until all the meat is completely covered. Place in the refrigerator for 30 minutes. 

    This is a closeup of the venison steaks in the marinade before cooking.

    Optional Marinade:

     If you want to add extra flavor, marinate the steaks for at least 1-2 hours, or overnight. A simple marinade could include olive oil, Worcestershire sauce, minced garlic, chopped rosemary, and balsamic vinegar.

    Cooking Venison Backstrap

    1. Lay the small bowl out on the counter and allow the venison to come up to room temperature for about 30 minutes before cooking. 

    2. Preheat the Grill to medium-high heat, roughly 400-450 degrees Fahrenheit. We are going to cook this hot and fast. 

    This is a image of my grill that is preheating.

    3. Venison is best enjoyed medium-rare (120-125 degrees Fahrenheit) to medium (140-145 degrees Fahrenheit). If you cook it until you reach a well-done temperature, it will be very dry. 

    4. Place the Venison on the hot grill grates over direct heat. Sear the steaks on the hot grill. Sear for 2 minutes on each side to get a good crust.  

    This is a image of Venison Steaks on the grill.

    Note: You may have to adjust this time depending on how thick or thin your steaks are. The best guide when grilling is to let your meat thermometer be your guide so you do not overcook your meat. 

    5. Flip and rotate the meat 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute, then flip again and rotate 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute. 

    Using a meat thermometer, probe the meat to check the temperature each time you flip to make sure you are still in your desired range. 

    Cook to Desired Doneness: Use a meat thermometer to ensure accuracy:

    • Rare: 120-125°F (49-52°C)
    • Medium-Rare: 130-135°F (54-57°C)
    • Medium: 140-145°F (60-63°C)

    Note: The best way to serve Venison is medium-rare to medium. Overcooking can make it tough.

    6. Pull the meat off the grill before it reaches 5 degrees before your target temperature. The meat will continue to rise in temperature for a few minutes after removing from the heat source so this is the reason you remove 5 degrees before your target temperature. 

    This is a image of venison backstrap steaks coming off the grill after they have been cooked. I am placing them on a plate.

    Serve

    Slice the steaks against the grain and serve hot. Enjoy them as is, or with your favorite sides and sauces.

    Tips For Success

    • Monitor Temperature: Venison cooks quickly due to its low-fat content, so keep a close eye on the temperature to avoid overcooking.
    • Flavor Pairings: Venison pairs well with robust flavors like garlic, rosemary, thyme, juniper berries, and red wine reductions.

    What To Serve With Grilled Backstrap Venison

    Want to cook this recipe indoors? Check out this post for how to cook a steak on the George Foreman.

    Happy Cooking!

    Let me know how cooking deer backstrap turns out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you!

    Let's Get Food Junked!

    Yield: 4 steaks

    Super Easy Grilled Backstrap Venison (Deer Meat)

    This is a image of backstrap venison laying on a white plate. They have been cut to show off the medium cook rate color that is pink and warm on the inside. The plate is sitting on a cast iron grill with a chefs knife beside it and tongs on the bottom of the picture. There is rosemary in the background for a pop of green color.

    This super simple and easy guide will elevate your Venison Backstraps to new levels. Using simple ingredients will allow the flavor and tenderness of the venison to shine through.

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes
    Total Time 18 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons of Olive Oil
    • 1 teaspoon of Sea Salt or Kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon of black pepper

    Instructions

    ​Simple Marinade

    1. Start by washing the Venison and then patting it dry with paper towels. Use a cutting board and sharp knife to trim off any fat or silver skin. If you have a whole backstrap, I recommend cutting it into ½ inch to 1 inch steaks.

    2. Mix Olive Oil, Sea Salt, and Black Pepper in a small mixing bowl. 

    3. Add meat to the bowl and mix around until all the meat is completely covered. Place in the refrigerator for 30 minutes. 

    Optional Marinade:

    If you want to add extra flavor, marinate the steaks for at least 1-2 hours, or overnight. A simple marinade could include olive oil, Worcestershire sauce, minced garlic, chopped rosemary, and balsamic vinegar.

    Cooking Venison Backstrap

    1. Lay the small bowl out on the counter and allow the venison to come up to room temperature for about 30 minutes before cooking. 

    2. Preheat the Grill to medium-high heat, roughly 400-450 degrees Fahrenheit. We are going to cook this hot and fast. 

    3. Venison is best enjoyed medium-rare (120-125 degrees Fahrenheit) to medium (140-145 degrees Fahrenheit). If you cook it until you reach a well-done temperature, it will be very dry. 

    4. Place the Venison on the hot grill grates over direct heat. Sear the steaks on the hot grill. Sear for 2 minutes on each side to get a good crust.  

    5. Flip and rotate the meat 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute, then flip again and rotate 90 degrees and cook for an additional 1 minute. 

    Using a meat thermometer, probe the meat to check the temperature each time you flip to make sure you are still in your desired range. 

    Cook to Desired Doneness: Use a meat thermometer to ensure accuracy:

    • Rare: 120-125°F (49-52°C)
    • Medium-Rare: 130-135°F (54-57°C)
    • Medium: 140-145°F (60-63°C)

    6. Pull the meat off the grill before it reaches 5 degrees before your target temperature. The meat will continue to rise in temperature for a few minutes after removing from the heat source so this is the reason you remove 5 degrees before your target temperature. 

    Notes

    • You may have to adjust this time depending on how thick or thin your steaks are. The best guide when grilling is to let your meat thermometer be your guide so you do not overcook your meat. 
    • The best way to serve Venison is medium-rare to medium. Overcooking can make it tough.

    YouTube video

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: wild Game

    Easy Homemade Strawberry Jam Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Strawberry season is here, and I can't wait to make this easy homemade strawberry jam. With just a few simple ingredients, this recipe brings out the natural flavor of the strawberries. Join me as I share this simple recipe and show you different ways to use your jam.

    This image shows a English muffin in the foreground that has been toasted and is covered in fresh homemade Strawberry Jam. The jar of jam is in the background and a silver spoon is in the foreground.

    Once April and May get here in the early summer of South Carolina, our family loves going to pick Fresh Strawberries. It is a fun family outing, and the kids just love it. I grow a lot of fruit on my property,y but at the moment, Strawberries are not a fruit that I currently grow, but I plan to grow them in the future. So we like to visit a small local Strawberry farm and pick ripe berries to make this small batch of strawberry jam.  

    This image is a closeup of fresh strawberries in a bucket.

    Growing up in the South, my mom made lots of jams, jellies, and preserves. There is nothing better or more fulfilling than making your own.  I can still remember Mom standing over that old Ball Granite Ware water bath canner, dipping jars of her jelly or Jams in it.

    Hearing the lids pop had to be the most exciting and rewarding sound while I was sitting in the living room. I knew it wouldn't be long before I could spread some on my PB&J sandwich.

    Why You'll Love This Homemade Jam Recipe

    1. Simple Ingredients: Creating something delicious with just a few basic ingredients is always satisfying. Strawberries, sugar, fruit pectin, and lemon juice are simple yet effective components that combine to make something wonderful.
    2. Freshness: Using fresh strawberries gives the jam a vibrant flavor and color that you just can't get from store-bought varieties. There's something special about knowing exactly where your ingredients come from and tasting the freshness in the final product.
    3. Pride in Making: There's a sense of pride and accomplishment that comes from making something from scratch. Whether you're an experienced cook or new to the kitchen, successfully creating your jam can be a rewarding experience.
    4. Versatility: This homemade jam recipe isn't just for spreading on toast! It can be used in various recipes, from filling cakes and pastries to topping yogurt or ice cream. Having a jar of homemade jam on hand opens up a world of culinary possibilities.
    This image shows a closeup of Strawberry Jam on a spoon.

    What Does this Recipe Taste Like?

    The strawberry jam tastes sweet and fruity, with a strong, natural strawberry flavor. It has a balance of sweetness and a slight tartness, reminiscent of fresh strawberries. The texture is smooth with small bits of strawberry, making it a bit chunky but still spreadable. Overall, it's like eating a sweetened, concentrated version of ripe strawberries. 

    This image shows two English muffins sitting on a white place. The top muffin has been toasted and is covered in Strawberry Jam. There is an open jar of Jam in the foreground and a spoon that is covered in jam sitting on the table.

    If you love making homemade jams and Jellies, you have got to try this Southern Muscadine Jelly Recipe!

    Where to Find Strawberries for this recipe

    Finding the strawberries is probably the most important step in this recipe. Once late spring or early summer is here in South Carolina, there are many U-Pick farms to visit to get ripe strawberries. If you do not have this option where you live, you can buy the strawberries from the grocery store or even frozen strawberries. I would let store-bought frozen strawberries be your last resort, though.

    ​I plan to buy roughly one gallon of strawberries from a local U-pick farm. I will use 2 ½ pounds for this strawberry Jam recipe, and then this fall,l when the figs are ripe in my orchard, I will make a strawberry fig jam with the remaining strawberries.

    This is a closeup of strawberries in a bucket that have just been picked.

    The extra berries that I buy now, I will dehull, then quarter them. After that, I will place them in an airtight container or zip-lock freezer bag and then freeze them until I need them. Buying Strawberries fresh from a farm and then freezing them will result in a better-tasting recipe than buying frozen strawberries from the grocery store. 

    This is a tip that you can use in case you want to make additional strawberry jam later in the year or if you want to make this awesome Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream Recipe!

    What You Need To Make This Recipe

    This easy strawberry jam recipe only requires a few simple ingredients. We are going to cover the ingredients here, but the amounts will be listed below in the recipe card. 

    Ingredients for Homemade Strawberry Jam

    • Strawberries (Organic strawberries if you can find them)
    • Bottled Lemon Juice
    • Butter
    • Sure Jell (yellow box) or Ball Real Fruit Natural Pectin
    • Granulated white sugar (Cane Sugar)

    See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities

    This image shows I am using the yellow Sure Jell box to make Strawberry Jam.
    Sure Jell in the Yellow Box

    Note: It is important to use this ratio of sugar to the right balance of fruit for the Jam to jell. I know it seems like a lot of sugar, but it is needed to make this recipe work so don't skimp on it. 

    Equipment Needed

    • Heavy-bottomed Saucepan or stock pot
    • A small saucepan for sterilizing canning lids
    • Wooden spoon or metal spoon
    • Instant Read thermometer or candy thermometer
    • 8 half-pint glass canning jars (Mason Jars or Ball Jars)
    • 8 canning lids and 8 rings (get the name-brand lids)
    • Water bath canner
    • Potato Masher, Mix and chop, food processor, or something to mash or break up the strawberries
    • Canning Utensil kit (funnel, jar lifter, bubble remover, headspace tool, magnetic lid lifter).
    This image shows all the equipment needed to make Strawberry Jam.

    For items that I recommend buying, see my Canning and Preserving Essentials guide and Best Kitchen Essentials guide.

    How to Make Delicious Strawberry Jam

    Step-by-step instructions

    ​Preparing the Water bath canner, Jars, and lids for canning

    Step 1

    Wash the jars, lids, and rings with soapy water, then dry them off.  Prepare the water bath canner by placing 8 half-pint jars on the rack of the canner, then proceed to fill the water bath canner with water until it reaches 1 inch over the top of the jars.

    Turn the stove on to high heat to bring water up to a boil. Once the water has come to a boil, boil jars for 10 minutes. (Add 1 minute to this time for every 1000 feet above sea level you are.) Once it reaches a boil, start your timer. After the time is up, turn the burner down to low to keep the water warm until you are ready for the jars to pour your jam into.

    Note: I prefer to place my jars in the canner and then fill them up with water. This is a great way to be sure you do not overfill your canner. One note, though, this method makes the canner heavy. If this is an issue, just fill the canner about half full of water, then place the jars in it while it is on the stove. You can use a pitcher of water to adjust the water level at that point. 

    This image shows a granite ware water bath canning being filled up with water while half pint jars are inside the canner.
    Filling the water bath canner with jars in place

    Step 2

    Fill up the small saucepan about halfway with water and set it on a back burner. Turn the burner on medium-low. Add in the canning lids. This will sterilize them and keep them warm for when you are ready. I leave the lids in this saucepan the whole time I am making the jam or jelly until I am ready to use them. 

    This image shows lids in a small saucepan heating up to sterilize them.

    Making the Strawberry Jam

    Step 1

    Dehull (remove the green stem on top) and then wash all of your strawberries.

    This is a image of me washing strawberries in my sink. There is also a colander in the sink where I can place the strawberries in to allow them to drain.
    This image shows me dehulling the fresh strawberries with a paring knife while holding the strawberry in my hands.

    Crush the berries using a mix-and-chop, or potato masher, or you could even use a food processor. You want them to have a rough texture.

    This image shows me adding in fresh strawberries to my food processor in order to puree them to make Jam.
    This image shows how I used a food processor to crush or puree fresh strawberries to make Jam with.

    Place the crushed-up strawberries in a Large Saucepan or stock pot over medium-high heat.

    This image shows adding in the fresh crushed strawberries to a large stock pot.

    ​Step 2

    Next, add in the Sure Jell or Ball Real Fruit pectin, butter, and lemon juice and boil for 1 minute. 

    This image shows adding in Sure Jell Fruit Pectin to the Jam Mixture.
    This image shows adding in butter to the Strawberry Jam Mixture.
    This image shows adding in lemon juice to the fruit mixture to make Strawberry jam.

    Note: Using butter will help reduce the foam that will be produced when boiling the mixture. 

    Step 3

    Add the granulated sugar to the pot and stir quickly until it has dissolved. Bring the mixture back up to a full boil. Skim off any foam that may appear. 

    This image shows adding in the sugar to the Jam mixture to make Strawberry Jam.

    Step 4

    Boil for 1 minute or until the mixture reaches a temperature of 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius). 

    This image shows using a Thermapen Instant Read Thermometer to check the temp of the Jam mixture.
    Using a Thermapen to test temperature

    Plate Test: Test the jam mixture by using the plate test. Place a small plate in the freezer for 15 minutes. Place a spoonful of jam on the plate. Use your finger to push through the jam and it should look wrinkled and not fill the gap where you pushed through it. If this doesn't happen, boil for an extra minute or two. 

    Canning the Homemade Strawberry Jam

    Step 1

    Remove the hot jars from the water bath canner and set the glass jars on a tea towel. 

    This image shows 8 half pint jars sitting on a tea towel ready to be filled with hot Jam.

    Step 2

    Fill the jars up using a ladle until there is ¼ inch headspace. Use the headspace measuring tool to measure this.

    This image shows using a Thermoworks Silicone Ladle to fill up jars of Jam.
    This image shows using a funnel to fill up jars to make Strawberry Jam.
    This image shows using the head space tool to measure the correct headspace when making Jam.

    Using the other end of the tool, stick it into the jars of jam and remove excess air bubbles. Wipe off the rim of the glass jars with a clean tea towel.

    This image shows using a wet dish cloth to wipe down the rims of the jars after they have been filled with hot jam.

    Using the lid lifter, grab a lid from the small saucepan on the stove and place the lid on the tops of the jars. Apply the screw-on band to the fingertip tight.

    This image shows using the lid lifter to remove a lid from the hot water.
    This image shows using the lid lifter to put the lid on top of jars of Strawberry Jam.
    This image shows putting the screw band on jars of Jam.

    Step 3

    Place each jar on the elevated canning rack and make the jars even.

    This image shows all of the jars of jam sitting on the elevated wire canning rack. The purpose of this image is to show what the canning rack looks like with the jars of jam sitting on it with the rack elevated.

    Lower the canning rack into the hot water in the canner and make sure the water covers the jars by at least an inch. Turn the heat back up on the stove to high heat, put the lid on the canner, and bring the water to a full boil again. 

    This image shows raising the wire canning rack after jars of jam have been processed.

    ​Step 4

    Process the jars of jam for 10 minutes. Make sure to adjust for higher elevation levels. 

    Step 5

    Remove the jars from the water bath canner using a jar lifter. Place the hot glass jars back on the tea towel and let them cool to room temperature.

    This image shows using a Jar lifter to put Hot Jars of Jam on a tea towel to cool to room temperature after being processed in a water bath canner.
    This image shows hot jars of Strawberry Jam after they just came out of the Water bath canner.

    In the next 30 minutes, as the Jars cool, you should start to hear the lids popping. Let cool for 12 to 24 hours. Check the lids to see if they have been sealed by pressing them in the center of the lid. If the center of the lid flexes, the lid did not seal. Use these jars of jam first by placing them in the refrigerator. 

    Unique Ways To Serve Homemade Strawberry Jam

    • Serve it on top of Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream or this Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream
    • Homemade Strawberry Jam is great on our Homemade Biscuits
    • Strawberry Jam goes great on top of Old Fashioned Pancakes, French Toast, or Waffles.
    • One of the most traditional ways to serve it is on the good old-fashioned Peanut Butter and Jam sandwich.
    • Use it as a topping on Yogurt or Oatmeal
    • It can be used as a Pastry Filling, such as homemade pop-tarts.
    • Strawberry Jam is great on top of Plain Cheesecake.
    • You can use Strawberry Jam as a cake filling as well.
    • Blend Strawberry Jam into a delicious smoothie.
    • Spread this homemade jam on toast.
    • Top a bagel with cream cheese and this Homemade Strawberry Jam.

    FAQ's

    How long will Homemade Strawberry Jam Last?

    If properly canned, Strawberry Jam can last up to 1 year if stored in a cool, dark place.

    Does Homemade Strawberry Jam Thicken as it cools?

    Yes, Homemade Strawberry Jam will thicken as it cools if you follow the recipe right.

    Can you make homemade Strawberry Jam without lemon juice?

    Yes, if you use Sure Jell (Yellow Box) pectin, you do not have to use the lemon juice. The reason is that Sure Jell contains citric acid. I like to add in the extra lemon juice for good measure. I use Sure Jell, and it is said to help the fruit keep its color.

    Yield: 8 half-pint jars of jma

    Easy Homemade Strawberry Jam Recipe

    This image shows a closeup of a toasted English muffin with fresh homemade Strawberry Jam on it.

    Capture the sweet taste of summer with this simple homemade strawberry jam. With just fresh strawberries, sugar, fruit pectin, and lemon juice, and pectin, this easy recipe creates a delicious spread perfect for toast, pastries, or desserts.

    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 5 cups of fresh strawberries (approximately 2 ½ pounds of fresh strawberries)
    • 1 teaspoon of butter
    • 1 box of Sure Jell (Yellow Box) or 6 Tablespoons of Ball Real Fruit Pectin.
    • 2 tablespoons of Bottled Lemon Juice
    • 7 cups of granulated white sugar (cane sugar)

    Instructions

    Prepare Glass Jars and Water Bath Canner:

    1. Wash the jars, lids, and rings with soapy water then dry them off.  Prepare the water bath canner by placing 8 half-pint jars on the rack of the canner then proceed to fill the water bath canner with water until it reaches 1 inch over top of the jars. Turn the stove on to high heat to bring water up to a boil. Once the water has come up to a boil, boil jars for 10 minutes. (Add 1 minute to this time for every 1000 feet above sea level you are). Once it reaches a boil, start your timer. After the time is up turn the burner down to low to keep the water warm until you are ready for the jars to pour your jam into them.
    2. Fill up the small saucepan about halfway with water and set it on a back burner. Turn the burner on medium-low. Add in the canning lids. This will sterilize them and keep them warm for when you are ready. I leave the lids in this saucepan the whole time I am making the jam or jelly until I am ready to use them. 

    Making the Strawberry Jam

    1. Dehull (remove the green stem on top) and then wash all of your strawberries. Crush the berries using a mix-and-chop, or potato masher, or you could even use a food processor. You want them to have a rough texture. Place the crushed-up strawberries in a Large Saucepan or stock pot over medium-high heat.
    2. Next add in the Sure Jell or Ball Real Fruit pectin, butter, and lemon juice. 
    3. Add the granulated sugar to the pot and stir quickly until it has dissolved. Bring the mixture back up to a full boil. Skim off any foam that may appear. 
    4. Boil for 1 minute or until the mixture reaches a temperature of 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius) then remove from heat.

    Canning the Homemade Strawberry Jam

    1. Remove the hot jars from the water bath canner and set the glass jars on a tea towel. 
    2. Fill the jars up using a ladle until there is ¼ inch head space. Use the headspace measuring tool to measure this. Using the other end of the tool, stick into the jars of jam and remove excess air bubbles. Wipe off the rim of the glass jars with a clean tea towel. Using the lid lifter, grab a lid from the small saucepan on the stove and place the lid on the tops of the jars. Apply the screw-on band to fingertip tight.
    3. Place each jar on the elevated canning rack and arrange jars so that they are even. Lower the canning rack into the hot water in the canner and make sure the water covers the jars by at least an inch. Turn the heat back up on the stove to high heat and bring the water to a full boil again. 
    4. Process the jars of jam for 10 minutes. Make sure to adjust for higher elevation levels. 
    5. Remove the jars from the water bath canner using a jar lifter. Place the hot glass jars back on the tea towel and let cool to room temperature. In the next 30 minutes as the Jars cool, you should start to hear the lids popping. Let cool for 12 to 24 hours. Check the lids to see if they have sealed by pressing in the center of the lid. If the center of the lid flexes, the lid did not seal. Use these jars of jam first by placing them in the refrigerator. 

    Notes

    • For this recipe, it is formulated to use bottled Lemon Juice as it has a consistent Acdicity level.
    • The butter helps reduce foaming when boiling.
    • Don't over boil it. Longer does not equal better in this case. If you boil too long you will cause the Jam not to set.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Jelly, Jam, and Preserve Recipes

    Super Easy Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake Recipe

    by Leave a Comment


    Picture this: a luscious blend of sweet pineapple, tart cherry, and buttery cake, all baked together into a gooey, golden masterpiece. But here's the kicker - you don't even need to mix anything! Yep, it's called a dump cake, and it's the ultimate dessert hack for busy bees who still want to indulge in something utterly delicious. So, if you're ready to impress with minimal effort and maximum flavor, get ready to dive into the magic of our pineapple cherry dump cake recipe    .

    If you have hung around the South much, you may have seen this recipe show up. It is a summertime favorite at cookouts, socials at church, and potlucks. It is the perfect dessert for holiday feasts as well as casual dinner parties. I believe its mass appeal is how easy it is to make, just dump and bake, no mixing. It also only requires just a handful of ingredients (only four).

    I've had this recipe so many times, that I cannot even tell you who all I know has made it. I just remember it showing up! This recipe can be served hot or at room temperature and is best topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream. Talk about yummy. It will soon be a favorite recipe. 

    Dump Cake Recipes

    Dump cakes get their name from how they are prepared. The ingredients are "dumped together" to make an easy dessert. The history of where it originated is a bit unclear, but according to an article published on Yahoo Finance, It showed up in a church cookbook called Carolina Cookery: From Quaker Kitchens.

    To make a dump cake, all you need is a dry cake mix, crushed pineapple, pie filling, and butter. The fashion or order in which you dump all the ingredients in a casserole dish matters but other than that, it is one of the easiest desserts to make. After that, all that is left is to bake it, and then you are done. 

    ​If this is your first time making this easy dessert, don't fret. This will be the easiest dessert you have ever made. 

    If you enjoy this dessert, you'll love these Maple Pancake Cupcakes. I've written an entire post on how to make them.

    Why You'll Love This Easy Dump Cake Recipe

    This pineapple Cherry Dump Cake Recipe is going to be a hit at your next gathering.

    1. Easy Prep: Just dump and bake – no fuss!
    2. Delicious Combo: Sweet pineapple meets tart cherry and a buttery crust for flavor perfection.
    3. Versatile Treat: Perfect for any occasion, from potlucks to cozy nights in.
    4. Minimal Ingredients: Simple pantry staples yield a gourmet dessert.
    5. Warm and Cozy: A scoop straight from the oven is pure comfort food bliss.

    What Does this Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake Taste Like?

    If you have ever tasted Cherry Cobbler, this dump cake recipe is similar, but in its own way. The pineapple cherry dump cake offers a delightful blend of flavors. The sweet pineapple provides a tropical tanginess, while the tart cherry filling adds a sharp contrast. Combined with the buttery richness of the cake mix, each bite offers a harmonious balance of sweet and tart notes. Overall, it tastes like a comforting, indulgent treat that's both satisfying and delicious. Top the warm dessert with the cool sensation and creaminess of vanilla ice cream and it is a gooey flavor explosion. 

    This is a image of pineapple cherry dump cake in a white bowl. Behind it is the casserole dish full of pineapple cherry dump cake and a spoon sitting in it. The casserole dish is sitting on a wooden cutting board.

    What You Need To Make This Recipe 

    See the recipe card at the bottom of the post for full instructions

    • Crushed pineapple
    • Cherry pie filling
    • Yellow cake mix
    • Butter (melted) 

    Optional ingredients

    • Chopped pecans

    ​Equipment You'll Need

    • 9 x 13 Casserole Dish or cake pan
    • Mixing Bowl
    • Wooden spoon
    • Can Opener​

    Note: For information on the product brands that I recommend and use, see our Best Kitchen Essentials Page. [Best Kitchen Essentials]

    How To Make Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

    Follow these easy steps to make this dump cake.

    Step-by-step instructions

    Step 1

    Preheat oven to 350 degrees

    Step 2

    Lightly grease a 9x13 casserole dish.

    Step 3

    Drain the juice from the can of crushed pineapple.

    Step 4

    Spread an even layer of pineapple over the bottom of the casserole dish then top with the cherry pie filling. Spread the can of pie filling evenly over the crushed pineapple.

    This is a image of a Pyrex casserole dish that has a even layer of crushed pineapple in the bottom.
    This is a image of a clear Pyrex dish that has a layer of crushed pineapple on the bottom with Cherry Pie Filling on top of the Pineapple.

    Step 5

    With the box of cake mix, sprinkle over the surface of the fruit filling as evenly as possible. (it doesn't have to be perfect).

    This is a image of cake batter being spread over evenly to make Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake.

    Step 6

    Pour the melted butter over the top of the cake mix. 

    Step 7

    Bake in the oven for 50 to 60 minutes until bubbly and golden brown. 

    Substitutions

    While this recipe calls for dry yellow cake mix, you can substitute White Cake mix if that is all you have. Just note, that this will have a little different taste. 

    If you do not like pineapple, omit the crushed pineapple and add 1 extra can of cherry pie filling.

    Variations

    If you do not have time to make this in the oven, a simple variation for an easy recipe is to cook it in the slow cooker or crock pot. 

    Instructions

    Add the ingredients in the same manner as listed in the Step-by-step instructions. Cook on high for 2 hours or low for 4 hours. 

    How To Serve Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

    Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake is best served warm or at room temperature. Top it with a scoop of ice cream or a dab of whipped cream. My favorite is Vanilla bean ice cream.

    ​

    This image shows Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake that has been spooned out into a white bowl. The bowl is sitting in front of the baking dish with the rest of the recipe in it.
    YouTube video

    FAQ's

    What can I do with the leftover Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake?

    You can store leftovers in an airtight container or use plastic wrap on the top of the casserole dish. Place the leftover dump cake in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days. 

    Do I need to stir the ingredients?

    No. Layer the ingredients just as the recipe suggests. There is no need to stir them.

    ​

    Let me know how these Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake turns out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you! In my opinion, it is one of the simplest desserts to make and I think you will love it. 

    ​

    ​

    ​

    Yield: 12

    Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

    This image is a closeup of Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake in a white bowl.

    Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake: A mouthwatering fusion of sweet pineapple, tangy cherry, and buttery cake mix, baked to golden perfection. Effortlessly prepared by layering ingredients in a baking dish, this comforting dessert is a crowd-pleaser at any gathering. Serve warm for a delightful treat that's as easy to make as it is delicious

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes
    Additional Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 1 20-ounce can of crushed pineapple
    • 1-21 ounce can of cherry pie filling
    • 1 box of yellow cake mix
    • 1 stick of butter (melted)

    Instructions

    1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    2. Lightly grease a 9x13 casserole dish.
    3. Drain the juice from the can of pineapple tidbits.
    4. Spread an even layer of crushed pineapple don't the bottom of the casserole dish then top with the cherry pie filling. Spread the can of fruit filling evenly over the crushed pineapple.
    5. Sprinkle the box of cake mix over the fruit as evenly as possible. (It doesn't have to be perfect).
    6. Pour the melted butter over the top of the dry cake mix.
    7. Bake in the oven for 50 to 60 minutes until bubble and golden brown.

    Notes

    Optional ingredients:

    ½ cups of chopped pecans

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Category: Dessert Recipes

    What Meat Goes with Cold Pasta Salad

    by Leave a Comment

    Pasta salad, with its medley of flavors and textures, has long been a staple on tables in the South. While fresh vegetables and dressings often take center stage, the addition of meat can transform this classic dish into a hearty and satisfying meal. But when it comes to pasta salad, why settle for the ordinary? Let's venture beyond the expected and explore what meat goes with pasta salad. 

    This is a overhead shot of the completed Spaghetti Pasta Salad Recipe

    What is Pasta Salad?

    Pasta salad is a versatile and refreshing dish made primarily from cooked pasta, chilled and mixed with various ingredients such as vegetables, herbs, cheeses, and dressings. It is typically served cold or at room temperature, making it a popular choice for picnics, potlucks, barbecues, and other casual gatherings.

    This image is a close up of a classic pasta salad that has spiral noodles of different colors, black olives, cheese, tomatoes, and ham.

    There are many recipes for Pasta salad from the classic pasta salad to a creamy pasta salad. There is a macaroni salad and a Greek Pasta salad. Some include olive oil, black olives, and red wine vinegar. There are loads of fresh veggies that you can include and the options are endless. You can opt for red bell pepper for a pop of color and a subtle sweetness or go with the traditional green. 

    My go-to pasta salad has to be this spaghetti pasta salad. It is a very easy pasta salad recipe and It utilizes lots of fresh veggies, red onions, black olives, summer squash, Parmesan cheese, and a zesty dressing. I love to cook the noodles al dente, which have just a little bite. Before you attend your next backyard BBQ this summer, check out this recipe. It is such an easy side dish to make. 

    Spaghetti Pasta Salad Recipe
    Spaghetti Pasta Salad

    What Meat Goes With Pasta Salad: My Go-To List

    ​There are so many great options to choose from when it comes to what meat goes with pasta salad, but these are my favorite dishes to serve. 

    1. Steak

    Imagine thinly sliced strips of juicy, medium-rare steak mingling with tender pasta and crisp vegetables. Steak brings a rich, savory flavor and satisfying texture to pasta salad, making it a luxurious option for meat lovers.

    How Long does it take to cook a steak on the George Foreman Grill.

    Marinate the steak in your favorite herbs and spices before grilling, then slice it thinly and toss it with pasta, arugula, cherry tomatoes, and a balsamic vinaigrette for a sophisticated twist on traditional pasta salad, or serve the steak as the main dish and the pasta salad as a side dish. 

    If you are looking for a quick way to cook a steak, check out this article I wrote on cooking a steak on a George Foreman grill.

    2. Fried Chicken

    Crispy, golden-brown fried chicken adds a comforting crunch and indulgent flavor to pasta salad. Whether you opt for boneless chicken tenders or crispy fried thighs, the contrast of textures between the crunchy chicken and tender pasta creates a delightful eating experience.

    This is a image with southern fried chicken on the left and a brown background on the right with words written over it. The words say Southern Fried Chicken. Then Pairs well with Pasta salad.

    Fried chicken is one of my favorite meats that goes with pasta salad in my opinion. 

    3. Grilled Pork Chops

    Grilled pork chops bring a smoky sweetness and hearty protein to pasta salad, elevating it to new heights of flavor. Marinate the pork chops in a tangy barbecue sauce before grilling to infuse them with irresistible flavor, then slice them thinly and toss them with pasta, grilled corn, black beans, red onion, and cilantro for a Southwestern-inspired twist on pasta salad that's perfect for summer gatherings.

    This is a image of a grilled pork chop that is sitting on a dark plate. just above the pork chop is grilled asparagus.

    If you do not want an all-in-one dish, serve the grilled pork chops with the pasta salad as a side dish.

    4. BBQ

    In the South, when we mention a Barbecue, we are talking about BBQ pork. Anytime you attend backyard BBQs, there are two dishes you will see as sides, Potato salad, and Pasta salad. These two dishes just go hand in hand.

    This is a close up image of southern style barbecue. This image is here because it is one one of the meats that I recommend to serve with Pasta Salad.

    BBQ pulled pork adds a bold and smoky flavor that pairs well with pasta salad. If you love a vinegar-based sauce, the addition of Pasta salad works well with the acidity of the vinegar. 

    5. Baked Chicken

    Tender, juicy baked chicken breasts or thighs make a delicious addition to pasta salad. The salad's light and fresh taste pairs wonderfully with the hearty flavor of baked chicken. If you're wondering what meat goes with pasta salad, baked chicken is an excellent choice.

    Whole chicken breast recipe (Juicy Cajun Style) Featured Image

    It's tender, and juicy, and adds a satisfying element to the meal. Whether you're hosting a family dinner or a casual get-together, this combination is sure to be a hit.

    6. Meatloaf

    Meatloaf may not be the first thing that comes to mind when thinking about pasta salad, but its savory flavor and hearty texture make it a surprisingly delicious addition. Pasta salad makes the perfect side dish for this meat.

    This is a closeup image of meatloaf. Half of the meatloaf is sliced where you can see the texture and the ingredients in it.

    Next time you are wondering what meat to serve with pasta salad, think about meatloaf!

    7. Hamburgers

    ​Grilled hamburgers are an excellent choice to serve with Pasta salad. Hamburgers and pasta salad make a great pair because they offer a satisfying balance of flavors and textures. The juicy, savory taste of hamburgers complements the light and refreshing qualities of pasta salad.

    Plus, the versatility of both dishes allows for endless customization, making them a crowd-pleasing duo for any occasion. Whether you're enjoying a backyard cookout or a casual dinner, hamburgers and pasta salad are sure to satisfy everyone's cravings.

    8. Hot dogs

    Pasta salad and hot dogs are a match made in culinary heaven, each complementing the other in a symphony of flavors and textures that elevate any backyard BBQ or casual gathering. Hot dogs are a beloved cookout staple known for their savory flavor and satisfying simplicity.

    this is a image of a man holding a plate. The plate has grilled hot dogs on it. Some are plain and some are in a bun. The man is wearing a blue shirt with a white apron on.

    However, they can be quite rich and heavy on their own. Pairing them with pasta salad adds a refreshing element to the meal, balancing out the richness of the hot dogs with the lightness and freshness of the salad. 

    If you love a good hot dog and like to top it with chili, you should try this Southern Food Junkie Hot Dog Chili sauce recipe.

    southern food junkie hot dog chili sauce.
    Southern Food Junkie Hot Dog Chili Sauce

    9. Grilled Chicken

    Pasta salad and grilled chicken go great together! The pasta salad is light and refreshing, while the grilled chicken is savory and delicious. They balance each other out perfectly. So, if you're wondering what meat goes with pasta salad, grilled chicken is a top pick.

    This is a image of two pieces of grilled chicken sitting on brown paper. Behind it is some dipping sauce that looks like ranch dressing. There is some green lettuce and some cherry red tomatoes in the background.

    It's tender and juicy, and it adds a lot of flavor to the meal. Whether you're having a cookout or a casual dinner, this combo is sure to please everyone.

    ​

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, when it comes to pasta salad, the possibilities are endless. From steak to fried chicken, grilled pork chops to barbecue, baked chicken to meatloaf, and hamburgers to hotdogs, there's no shortage of creative and delicious meat options to explore.

    So, the next time you're craving pasta salad, don't be afraid to think outside the box and experiment with unexpected meat pairings. Who knows? You may just discover a new favorite dish that's sure to delight your taste buds and impress your guests.

    Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche Recipe

    by 2 Comments

    Hey there! So, imagine this: a mouthwatering Spinach Quiche Recipe that's not only delicious but also keto-friendly, and guess what? No crust needed! I'm talking about a flavorful, cheesy creation packed with nutritious spinach and all sorts of tasty keto-approved ingredients. It's perfect for breakfast, brunch, or even a quick dinner when you're on your keto journey. Trust me, once you try this Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche Recipe, you'll be hooked! 

    This image shows a slice of Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche on a white plate in the foreground. In the background you can see a baking dish full of this quiche with a slice taken out. There is a black and silver spatula sticking out of the baking dish.

    It's easy to make, requires a few simple ingredients, absolutely delicious, and fits perfectly into your keto lifestyle. So, what are you waiting for? Let's dive into this keto-friendly recipe together and savor every satisfying bite! Oh, and did I mention it's crustless?

    This Easy Spinach Crustless Quiche is:

    • Easy low carb
    • Great for meal prep
    • Great for a Brunch recipe
    • Cheesy and Savory
    • Packed with Protein
    • Great for Breakfast, Lunch, or Dinner

    After completely cooling, the quiche sets. You can cut out a section for yourself and dive in!

    ​What is a Crustless Quiche

    A crustless quiche is basically like a regular quiche but without the pastry crust. So, instead of having that flaky, buttery crust on the bottom and around the edges, you just have the yummy filling baked in a dish.

    This is a image that shows a closeup shot of Spinach Crustless Quiche slice on a white plate. The slice is in the foreground. The slice is vibrant with colors of green from the Spinach and Yellowish orange from the Cheddar cheese. In the background you can see a baking dish that is out of focus on the back left hand side.

    It's a great option if you're looking to cut back on carbs on a keto diet or if you just don't feel like dealing with making a crust. Plus, this low-carb quiche is super versatile—you can fill it with all kinds of tasty ingredients like veggies, cheese, meat, or whatever you like!

    My mom has always made Quiches, whether it was broccoli and cheese or Spinach and cheese. I grew up eating it and I love it. The beauty of this Crustless Quiche recipe is you can add many other ingredients to suit your taste and nutritional needs. I am going to share the basic foundation which only requires, Cheddar cheese, Eggs, Spinach, Milk, Salt, Black Pepper

    Crustless Quiche vs. Frittata

    I am not 100% sure if there is such a term as a Crustless Quiche. There are a few recipes out there but usually when a Quiche doesn't have a crust, it is considered a Frittata, well sort of. There are some similarities and differences. Let me explain.

    The main difference between a crustless quiche and a frittata is that a quiche typically has a creamy custard-like filling, while a frittata has a denser texture more akin to an omelet.

    This image is a overhead shot of a slice of Crustless Spinach and Cheese Quiche sitting on a white plate. In the background you can see the rest of this dish in a clear baking casserole dish.

    With a crustless quiche, you're still getting that creamy, almost pudding-like texture because it's typically made with eggs, heavy whipping cream (or whole milk), and other fillings baked together. It's like a savory pie without the crust. 

    On the other hand, a frittata is more like a thick, fluffy pancake loaded with all kinds of ingredients mixed right into the eggs. It's cooked on the stove and often finished under the broiler, making it quick and easy to whip up.

    So, while they're both delicious ways to enjoy eggs and various fillings, the texture and cooking method are what set them apart.

    What Does Crustless Spinach Quiche Taste Like

    A crustless spinach quiche tastes like a savory, creamy delight. You've got the earthy flavor of spinach mixing in with the richness of eggs and cheese.

    Depending on what else you throw in there, like onions, garlic, or maybe some herbs, you might get a little extra sweetness or zing. But overall, it's just a smooth, creamy texture that's super satisfying. And since there's no crust, all those yummy flavors stand out.

    It's a light and wholesome meal that's perfect anytime!

    This image is a closeup of a slice of Baked Crustless Spinach Quiche. The slice of Quiche is sitting on a a white plate that is out of focus. The only thing in focus is the front edge of the quiche which is a beautiful vibrant color of green spinach and cheddar cheese mixture.

    Crustless Quiche Ingredients

    Here's What You'll Need to make this Crustless Quiche recipe

    • Spinach-For this recipe, I am using frozen chopped spinach. If you prefer fresh spinach, you can use raw baby spinach but make sure to chop it up first before using it.
    • Eggs and Whole milk- this creates the base for the custard for any quiche. 
    • Sharp Cheddar Cheese- Use block cheddar cheese and not pre-shredded. The pre-shredded is coated and will not taste as good as cheese that you shred yourself.
    • Olive Oil- for sautéing the spinach
    • Salt
    • Black Pepper

    See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities

    ​Equipment You'll Need

    • Baking Dish- I use this particular 10 x 8 Pyrex baking dish (Casserole dish) or you can use a Pie Plate (Pie dish).
    • Cast Iron Skillet or Frying pan- I love cooking in a cast iron skillet. The one I have is very old that I found at a yard sale. This brand isn't even in business anymore. I have several other Lodge Cast Iron pans just like this one here.
    • Large Bowl- My favorite brand to use is the OXO Large Mixing Bowls. They are a high-quality product at reasonable prices. I use a lot of their items from their brand as I find it is high quality. 
    • Cheese Grater- I recommend this viral cheese grater that everyone online is talking about. I have one similar to it but I prefer this one as it is smaller and comes in many colors.  

    Check out this post here is a list of Kitchen Essentials tools that I recommend.

    How to Make A Crustless Spinach Quiche

    Step-by-step instructions

    Step 1

    Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and lightly grease a baking dish or pie pan.

    This is a image of a person using avocado spray to coat a baking dish.

    Step 2

    Lay out and thaw the frozen spinach. Once it is thawed, place it in a colander to drain it. If you are using fresh spinach, wash it, then chop it up. 

    Step 3

    Place the spinach in a cast iron skillet and sauté over medium heat. This will help evaporate some of the excess moisture in the Spinach. Allow the spinach to cool.

    Step 4

    To get 2 cups of shredded cheese, shred the block of Cheddar cheese and set aside.

    Step 5

    ​In a mixing bowl, add the large eggs, whole milk, salt, and black pepper. Whisk together until the yolks are broken up. Add in the Spinach and Cheddar cheese and mix until well-blended.

    This is a image showing a light blue colored bowl full of beaten eggs that will be used to make a quiche.
    This image shows a light blue colored bowl that has a mixture of beaten eggs, spices, and milk that is being poured into a red mixing bowl that has Spinach in it. There is a whisk sticking on the edge of the bowl.
    This image shows a black paper plate that is full of shredded cheddar cheese. The cheese is being poured into a red bowl that has a egg mixture and Spinach in it. There is a whisk sticking in the bowl ready to mix this mixture together to make a Crustless Spinach Quiche.

    Step 6

    Next, pour the egg mixture into the prepped baking dish or pie pan.

    This image shows a red bowl that is full of a Spinach quiche mixture. The mixture is being poured into a glass baking dish such as a Pyrex dish.

    Step 7

    Bake in the oven for in the preheated oven for about 40 to 50 minutes until mixture has set. 

    Step 8

    Remove from the oven and let the dish cool down before serving. 

    This is a image of a silver and black spatula cutting a slice of Spinach quiche out of a clear backing dish.

    Variations

    My mom has always made Quiches, whether it was broccoli and cheese or Spinach and cheese. I grew up eating it and I love it. The beauty of this Crustless Quiche recipe is you can add many other ingredients to suit your taste and nutritional needs. 

    ​Other Variations include but are not limited to:

    • Cheese-You can mix and match cheese. I like sharp Cheddar but feel free to add in cream cheese for a creamier base, gruyere cheese for its richness, or Swiss cheese for its nutty and sweeter flavor profile. 
    • Vegetables-The beauty of this dish is you start with the base of eggs, milk, and cheese. Then you add what you like. Throw in some green onions. Feel free to add other variations of vegetables if you do not like Spinach. 
    • Protein-There are many different protein options from leftover Ham, to bacon, to Sausage. All make great choices.
    • Spices- add in cayenne for some heat or garlic to up the savory profile, or rosemary. 

    Here is a list of optional recipe combinations:

    • Crustless Zucchini Quiche
    • Crustless Ham and Cheese Quiche
    • Crustless Mushroom Spinach Quiche
    • Spinach Feta Crustless Quiche
    • Broccoli Cheese Crustless Quiche
    • Salmon Crustless Quiche
    • Crustless Sausage Quiche
    • Bacon and Cheese Crustless Quiche
    • Crustless Cottage Cheese Quiche

    Which one is your favorite? Keep an eye out for these future recipes. 

    Keto Friendly Sides to serve Crustless Spinach Quiche with

    Non-Keto Sides

    ​Storage Tips

    ​This crustless quiche can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days. To eat, simply remove a slice and reheat. 

    For longer-term storage, Crustless Quiche can be frozen. Make sure to place it in a freezer-safe container before freezing. 

    FAQ's

    Can you make crustless quiche ahead of time?

    Yes, you can prepare a crustless quiche ahead of time. It's a great option for meal prep or entertaining. Simply bake the quiche as directed, let it cool completely, then refrigerate it in an airtight container. When ready to serve, you can reheat individual slices in the microwave or oven.

    Can I freeze a crustless spinach quiche?

    Absolutely! Crustless quiche freezes well. Once it's cooled completely, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap or aluminum foil, or place it in an airtight container. Frozen quiche can be reheated directly from frozen in the oven or microwave. Just be sure to adjust the cooking time accordingly.

    What can I use instead of milk to make this Spinach Crustless Quiche recipe?

    You can substitute with heavy cream, half-and-half, yogurt, or sour cream. If are looking for a non-dairy option, you can substitute almond milk or coconut milk in its place.

    What if I want a crust but still need this recipe to be keto-friendly?

    If you want to make a crust, a good option is to make one out of almond flour or coconut flour.

    How do I prevent a crustless spinach quiche from becoming watery?

    The secret to preventing the quiche from becoming watery is to sautee the vegetables before mixing the ingredients. Also, make sure to drain any excess moisture from any ingredients.

    Can I use fresh spinach instead of frozen?

    Yes, you can use fresh spinach instead of frozen. Just chop the spinach up and saute it before using.

    Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche

    This image is a up-close shot of Keto Crustless Quiche that is sitting on a white plate. The front of the quiche is in focus while the back of the plate is out of focus. You can see the texture of the dish and the vibrant colors of the green spinach and Yellowish-orange Cheddar cheese.

    Try our Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche! Packed with spinach and cheesy goodness, this dish is simple to make and perfect for meal prep. Just mix eggs, spinach, milk, cheese, and a few seasonings, then bake until it's golden and bubbly. It's satisfying, flavorful, and keto-friendly! Enjoy it hot or cold for a delicious start to your day.

    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 6 large eggs
    • 10 oz. package for frozen chopped spinach (You can substitute fresh Spinach, see notes for details)
    • 1.5 cups of whole milk
    • 2 cups of Sharp cheddar cheese. (see notes)
    • ½ teaspoon of salt
    • ½ teaspoon of black pepper

    Instructions

      1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and lightly grease a baking dish or pie pan.

      2. Thaw the frozen spinach. Once it is thawed, place it in a colander to drain it. If you are using fresh spinach, wash it, then chop it up. 

      3. Place the spinach in a cast iron skillet and sauté over medium heat. This will help evaporate some of the excess moisture in the Spinach. Allow the spinach to cool.

      4. Shred the block of Cheddar cheese and set aside.

      5. ​In a mixing bowl, add the large eggs, whole milk, salt, and black pepper. Whisk together until the yolks are broken up. Add in the Spinach and Cheddar cheese and mix until well-blended.

      6. Next, pour the egg mixture into the prepped baking dish or pie pan.

      7. Bake in the oven for in the preheated oven for about 40 to 50 minutes until mixture has set. 

      8. Remove from the oven and let the dish cool down before serving. 

    Notes

    • For this recipe, I am using frozen chopped spinach. If you prefer fresh spinach, you can use raw baby spinach but make sure to chop it up first before using it.
    • For the cheese, it is best to use block cheese and then shred it yourself. It tastes much better. If you do not have it, you can use shredded cheese in the bag.

    Nutrition Information:

    Yield:

    6

    Serving Size:

    1
    Amount Per Serving: Calories: 263Total Fat: 19gSaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 227mgSodium: 541mgCarbohydrates: 5gFiber: 1gSugar: 3gProtein: 18g

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American / Category: Keto

    25 Refreshing Iced Tea Recipes

    by Leave a Comment

    Quench your thirst and elevate your summer sipping experience with our curated collection of 25 refreshing iced tea recipes. From classic blends to innovative twists, these tantalizing concoctions are sure to keep you cool and refreshed during the hottest days of the year.

    Whether you prefer fruity infusions, herbal delights, or zesty citrus blends, there's a perfect pitcher of iced tea waiting to be brewed for every palate. Join us as we explore an array of delightful flavors and creative combinations in this ultimate guide to summer refreshment.

    25 Refreshing Iced Tea Recipes

    I extensively searched the internet and collaborated with fellow bloggers to curate an exceptional collection of 25 Invigorating Iced Tea Recipes!

    1

    How To Make The Perfect Southern Sweet Tea (Recipe)

    Photo Credit: southernfoodjunkie.com

    Being a native of South Carolina, I have drank Southern Sweet Tea all my life. I cannot remember a time when there was not a pitcher of sweet tea in the refrigerator. It is one of my favorite all-time drinks and that is why I am sharing how to make the perfect southern sweet tea recipe. 

    2

    Lemonade Iced Tea (Arnold Palmer)

    Photo Credit: www.sweetteaandthyme.com

    This iced tea lemonade is a simple recipe and is loved by the whole family, no matter the variation. To really amp up and elevate this classic drink, we make a delicious lemon simple syrup to boost the lemonade and sweet tea, which can be traded for unsweetened iced tea.

    3

    How to Make Easy Peach Iced Tea

    In this simple guide, we will walk you through the steps to craft a pitcher of Peach Iced Tea that captures the essence of the South. With the distinct aroma and taste of ripe peaches infused into each sip, this beverage is a perfect companion for lazy afternoons, backyard gatherings, or any moment you crave a cool and flavorful respite.

    4

    Watermelon Tea Recipe

    Photo Credit: www.thecountrychiccottage.net

    Are y’all ready for some great watermelon tea? Come dive into this unique summer recipe. I am using green tea for my version but you can pick and choose your favorite tea to add to this recipe. The great summer flavor comes from the watermelon! You will also want to follow along below as some of my friends have great summer recipes for you as well. Come on down for some summer fun inspiration.

    5

    Southern Strawberry Iced Tea Recipe

    Photo Credit: www.sweetteaandthyme.com

    My summers have always stayed simple. I'm old school at heart, there's nothing better to me than sitting on my deck with a batch of strawberry iced tea, a mini charcuterie board for one, a fan, and a good book right before we get to those blistering hot summer days. It's bliss, y'all. There's nothing like home-brewed sweet tea in the summer months.

    6

    Miami Ice

    Photo Credit: foodmeanderings.com

    Recently we were at Milestones restaurant and my son ordered a Miami Ice drink (not to be confused with a Miami Vice). It's a refreshing non-alcoholic drink that's a combination of iced tea, pureed mango, and fresh mint. He loved it and I wasn't surprised because he's crazy about mango!

    7

    Raspberry Iced Tea Recipe

    Photo Credit: momfoodie.com

    Raspberry Iced Tea is a classic summer beverage. This refreshing iced tea recipe is easy to make as a family drink.  Raspberry flavored ice tea is also a great non-alcoholic party drink.

    8

    Hibiscus Lemonade Recipe

    Photo Credit: 24bite.com

    Hibiscus is called “Jamaica” in Spanish. The tea is served across Mexico as “Agua de Jamaica”. I’ve added a new level by making the hibiscus tea into a lemonade blend.

    9

    Low FODMAP Iced White Tea With Mango

    Photo Credit: www.fodmapeveryday.com

    Our Low FODMAP Iced White Tea With Mango is simply chilled low FODMAP white tea, optionally sweetened, served with low FODMAP amounts of fresh, juicy mango. Like our recipe for Low FODMAP Iced Green Tea With Passionfruit, this one almost doesn’t need formal direction, but we want to make sure you get portions right for the white tea and mango

    10

    Mint Green Sun Tea (AIP Diet Green Tea)

    Photo Credit: thehonestspoonful.com

    This Mint Green Sun Tea is an AIP Diet green tea that’s a very refreshing and easy way to upgrade regular green tea.

    11

    Iced Strawberry Matcha Latte

    Photo Credit: thehonestspoonful.com

    This Iced Strawberry Matcha Latte is a delicious twist on your favorite drink to start your day. This recipe is essentially a matcha latte with pureed strawberries which add a hint of natural sweetness.

    12

    Soothing Chamomile Iced Tea with Mint

    Photo Credit: www.atastefortravel.ca

    If you’re looking for a drink that’s not only refreshing but is filled with healthy benefits, look no further than this Chamomile Iced Tea. Also known as te de manzanilla, this aromatic herbal tea, made with mint and lemon, is a cooling, calming drink that’s perfect for summer. You can enjoy a glass of caffeine-free Chamomile Iced Tea on its own, or with a meal, at any time of the day. 

    13

    Iced Peach Green Tea Lemonade {Starbucks Copycat}

    Photo Credit: wearenotmartha.com

    Are you obsessed with the Iced Peach Green Tea Lemonade from Starbucks? It's so easy to make at home! You only need 3 ingredients with this copycat recipe and your drink will taste just like the real thing!

    14

    Thai Iced Tea (Thai Tea)

    Photo Credit: theforkedspoon.com

    Thai Iced Tea is a creamy and refreshing mildly spiced sweet tea made from Thai tea mix (or black tea), milk, and sugar. Popular in Southeast Asia and served in many Thai restaurants, learn how to make Thai tea at home with this easy-to-follow guide and recipe.

    15

    Strawberry Honey Hibiscus Iced Tea

    Photo Credit: theforkedspoon.com

    STRAWBERRY HONEY HIBISCUS ICED TEA is beautiful, sweet and energizing. Wildly popular thanks to unique health benefits and its appearance in Starbucks shops all over the world, this gorgeous iced tea is made with Strawberries, dried hibiscus flowers, and sweet honey, guaranteeing that you’ll be drinking this Strawberry Honey Hibiscus Iced Tea all summer long.

    16

    Iced Pineapple Matcha Drink (Starbucks Copycat) -

    Photo Credit: www.goglutenfreely.com

    Confession time. I have a matcha addiction. It’s my daily source of caffeine. Matcha powder is on auto-delivery at my house and is a perfect addition to smoothies, pancakes, crepes, cookies, and more. Needless to say, the first time I heard about the Starbucks Iced Pineapple Matcha Drink my first thought was… I need to try that!

    17

    Mango Iced Tea

    Photo Credit: www.dinneratthezoo.com

    This mango iced tea is a blend of black tea, mango nectar and honey with fresh fruit for garnish. A quick and easy drink that’s perfect for a hot day!

    18

    Berry Hibiscus Iced Tea Recipe (Caffeine-Free)

    Photo Credit: mittengirl.com

    Warm summer days call for a refreshing drink. The natural flavors of sweet berries, fresh citrus, and bright hibiscus come together in a delicious Berry Hibiscus Iced Tea that's the perfect afternoon refresher.

    19

    Green Tea Lemonade

    Photo Credit: www.pipercooks.com

    Green Tea Lemonade | Try this Starbucks copycat recipe for Iced Green Tea Lemonade. Make homemade lemonade with my easy lemonade recipe and then mix it with some brewed green tea. Add ice and serve it in a pretty cup with some mint leaves for a refreshing summer drink.

    20

    Caffeine Free Lemon Iced Tea Recipe

    Photo Credit: recipesfromapantry.com

    Cool down with a glass of this revitalizing Lemon Iced Tea infused with honey and citrus notes for a refreshing drink that’s perfect for a hot summer day.

    21

    Ginger and Lemongrass Iced Tea Recipe | Recipes From A Pantry

    Photo Credit: recipesfromapantry.com

    This iced tea has a mild flavor, which means you need to use mild tea as well. I use the caffeine-free rooibos but feel free to use other tea although you might need to start with fewer teabags. You can also add more or less lemongrass, ginger, and honey according to your preferences.

    22

    Peach Hibiscus Tea Recipe

    Photo Credit: kitchenontheavenue.com

    This Peach Hibiscus Tea is a delightful, naturally flavorful, and visually stunning drink that offers a delightful fusion of floral and fruity notes, making it a perfect choice for those seeking a refreshing and enjoyable drink to indulge in during warm weather or anytime a thirst-quenching treat is desired.

    23

    Prickly Pear Hibiscus Agua Fresca

    Photo Credit: cookeatlivelove.com

    Looking for a refreshing drink that’s the perfect combination of lightly sweet, tart, and fruity? Look no further than this prickly pear hibiscus fresca recipe — it delivers all this and more!

    24

    Earl Grey Iced Tea

    Photo Credit: www.sweetandsavorybyshinee.com

    Bright, refreshing and citrusy, this earl grey iced tea is easy to customize and such a thirst-quencher for a crowd!

    25

    Refreshing Mint and Lemon Infused Linden Tea on Ice

    Photo Credit: sustainmycookinghabit.com

    Try a refreshing herbal twist to your summer iced tea. This cold Linden tea, infused with mint and lemon and served on ice is a delicious and pretty beverage for the summer.

    Conclusion

    As we wrap up our journey through these 25 tantalizing iced tea recipes, we hope you've found inspiration to elevate your summer sipping. Whether you're lounging by the pool, hosting a backyard barbecue, or simply seeking a moment of refreshment, these delightful concoctions offer a flavorful escape from the heat. Cheers to endless summer days and the endless possibilities of iced tea

    Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe with Cinnamon

    by Leave a Comment

    I thoroughly enjoy cooking Southern Fried Apples. There's an undeniable satisfaction in their combination of cinnamon, the sweetness of brown sugar, and the savory touch of butter. The process is incredibly simple, requiring minimal preparation. Come along as I reveal some helpful tips and tricks to make preparing this fried apples recipe both effortless and enjoyable.

    This image is a overhead shot of fried apples in a cast iron skillet with a serving spoon and a bowl of fried apples sitting beside it.

    The Joy of Crafting Simple Southern Fried Apples

    ​Although Southern Fried Apples is a Southern dish, this is one dish I do not remember growing up eating as a kid. It wasn't until I was married that I remember eating this dish. I can remember this dish being on menus at a few of my favorite Southern restaurants as a side dish. Similar to Cracker Barrel Fried Apples that they serve.

    I've always had a desire to replicate it, especially when we find ourselves with an excess of apples nearing their expiration. During such times, I desired to come up with a recipe that allows me to make the most of these apples before they spoil.

    This image is a very close shot of what fried apples looks like.

    This is how the foundation for this recipe began to take shape, with me experimenting and fine-tuning the process of making Southern Fried Apples. 

    Since then I have made this recipe quite often through the years and have fine-tuned it. It is such an easy recipe to make and a great way to use up an abundance of apples, especially during apple season. 

    Why I Love Making this Cinnamon Fried Apple Dish

    The delightful blend of warm cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter creates a perfect harmony for my taste buds. Crafting these sweet Southern Fried Apples is a breeze, making it a quick and easy side dish.

    This versatile recipe can play a dual role, serving as either a side dish or a dessert, suitable for dinner, snack, or breakfast. For instance, pair it with pork chops as a savory side or elevate your breakfast by topping pancakes, hot buttermilk biscuits, or French toast with this delicious dish. Serve it on top of a big scoop of vanilla ice cream for dessert. 

    This is a image of southern fried apples on top of old fashioned pancakes.

    Fried Apples Vs. Baked Cinnamon Apples

    ​You may be wondering, what is the difference between baked cinnamon apples and fried apples? The simple answer is how they are cooked.

    Both the Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples and Southern Fried Apples are exceptionally simple and uncomplicated recipes. While Southern Fried Apples are cooked in a skillet on a stovetop, baked apples are cooked in a baking dish in the oven. Both approaches are refreshingly straightforward to execute. 

    If you want to know how to make our version of baked cinnamon apples, click the link above for our yummy recipe. 

    Delicious Side Dish or Dessert?

    You might find yourself wondering, is this recipe intended as a side dish or dessert? Well, brace yourself for more confusion. In the South, it's common for many dishes to be categorized as sides or (vegetables), which might not align with this classification in other parts of the United States. 

    For instance, this Old Fashioned Southern Sweet potato Casserole is sometimes served as a side dish. 

    When dining at a diner or a Southern-style restaurant specializing in country cooking, particularly those following the "meat and three" tradition, you'll notice side dishes often labeled as vegetables, even when they aren't conventionally vegetables. Examples include Southern Mac and Cheese or corn pudding.

    A notable illustration is Cracker Barrel, where fried apples are served as a side dish rather than a dessert.

    This is a image of fried apples in a bowl.

    Easy Fried Apple Recipe: Family Fun in Every Bite

    Heading to an apple orchard near where they grow the best apples can be a super fun outing for the whole family. Whether it's just a day trip or you make a weekend of it, picking apples is not just about enjoying the great outdoors – it's also a cool way to teach the kids where their food comes from.

    WHAT YOU NEED TO MAKE THIS RECIPE

    Let's cover the simple ingredients needed to make this recipe

    ​Ingredients for Fried Apples Recipe

    • Apples: The best apples for baking are those that maintain their texture, flavor, and sweetness when cooked. We go into a bit more detail about the apple variety down below.
    • Ground Cinnamon: Cinnamon is a key ingredient and adds warmth to this dish as well as an aromatic fragrance.
    • Sugar: Brown sugar is a type of sugar characterized by its brown color and unique flavor. This is distinct from the simple sweetness of white sugar. This product is made from white granulated sugar combined with varying amounts of molasses. Maple syrup, honey, or agave nectar may be substituted for a more natural approach.
    • Butter: Butter adds a rich, creamy, and slightly nutty flavor to the baked apples. This complements the natural sweetness of the fruit. This buttery flavor enhances the overall taste of the dish, making it more delicious and satisfying.
    • Lemon Juice: Lemon juice adds a bright, tangy, and slightly citrusy flavor to the baked apples. This acidity provides a pleasing contrast to the natural sweetness of the apples. It also keeps them from oxidizing (turning brown). 
    • Vanilla Extract: Vanilla extract contributes a warm, sweet, and floral flavor to the baked apples.
    • Sea Salt: Salt enhances the overall flavor of a dish by amplifying and balancing other tastes. A pinch of salt can help bring out the natural sweetness of the fruit. This makes the dish taste even sweeter without being cloying. It also complements the warmth of spices like cinnamon and the richness of ingredients like butter.
    • Cornstarch: Cornstarch will help tighten up (thicken the dish.) The apples will release moisture and this will create a thick sauce.
    See the recipe card at the bottom for the amounts

    ​Apple Variety

    One of the most important decisions when making this recipe is the apple variety you will use. Many people like to use tart apples such as Granny Smith apples or Pink Lady. 

    This is a image of various varieties of apples on a white background.

    Here are some of the best apples for baking:

    1. Granny Smith: These green apples are known for their tartness and firm texture, which holds up well in baking. They add a nice contrast to sweet desserts.
    2. Fuji: Fuji apples are sweet and crisp, making them a great choice for baking. They add a pleasant sweetness to desserts without becoming overly mushy.
    3. Cortland: Cortland apples have a sweet-tart flavor and are slow to brown when sliced, making them ideal for apple slices in pies and other baked treats.
    4. Pink Lady: Pink Lady apples are sweet and slightly tart with a firm texture. They hold their shape well in baking and add a nice flavor to pies and crisps.
    5. Gala: While Gala apples are primarily known as eating apples, they can also be used in baking when you want a sweeter flavor profile. They work well in apple cakes and muffins. 
    6. Honey crisp: Honeycrisp apples are sweet and juicy, making them a popular choice for baking. They maintain their shape and add a pleasant sweetness to baked goods.
    7. Jonagold: Jonagold apples are a hybrid of Jonathan and Golden Delicious apples. They have a sweet-tart flavor and hold their shape when baked, making them excellent for pies and crisps.
    8. Braeburn: Braeburn apples have a balanced sweet-tart flavor and a firm texture, making them suitable for various baked goods like pies, tarts, and crisps.

    Note: Remember that the best apples for baking can vary depending on personal preference and the specific dish you're making. Mixing different apple varieties can also create a unique flavor and texture in your baked goods. Experimentation is encouraged to find the perfect apple for your favorite recipes.

    Equipment You'll Need

    Having covered the different types of apples, let's now discuss the necessary equipment.

    • Mixing Bowl
    • Cutting Board
    • Wooden Spoon or Mixing Spoon
    • Measuring Spoon
    • Large Skillet- I prefer to use a large cast iron skillet when making this dish. The reason is that cast iron has evening heating which creates uniform cooking. It also has excellent heat retention. I believe cast iron enhances the flavor of the dishes you cook due to the cast iron itself and the seasoning of the pan. Cast iron is also very versatile meaning you could cook this dish over the campfire in a cast iron pan if you prefer, you could cook it in the oven, or on any type of burner or stovetop. 

    Note: Check out our Kitchen Essentials Page for recommended brands of equipment you will need. 

    Now let me say that if you do not have a Large Cast Iron skillet, do not fret, any large durable skillet or frying pan will do. If you have a stainless steel or a non-stick skillet, they will work fine. 
    • Apple Peeler-For years I have used this apple peeler to peel my apples and other hard fruit. At some point, the company has changed names but this is the exact one that I have. It works wonderfully and it does a quick job of peeling when you have a lot of fruit. When our kids were younger, I bought this peeler to peel fruit to make baby food for them and then I canned it.  
    This is a image showing a Victorio Apple Peeler in the process of peeling an apple.

    I have used it for many years now and it has held up to the test of time. It is used almost weekly in our house.

    If you do not have one of these, a hand peeler or simply a pairing knife will work, it just takes a little more time to do it. 

    How To Make Southern Fried Apples Recipe

    ​Step-by-step instructions

    • Wash and peel the apples (Optional) with a sharp knife, vegetable peeler, or apple peeler. 
    This is a image showing a Victorio Apple Peeler in the process of peeling an apple.
    • Core the apples and cut the apples in slices.  
    This image shows step one of coring an apple.
    Core the apples
    This image shows slicing apples that have just been peeled.
    Then slice them
    This is step two of corning apples.
    This coring tool comes in handy
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, ground cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt.
    This image shows adding brown sugar to a bowl to make fried apples.
    Brown sugar
    This image shows adding Cinnamon, Cornstarch, and salt to Brown Sugar in a bowl.
    Cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt
    This image shows mixing all the ingredients together to make Southern Fried Apples.
    Mix until well incorporated
    • In a small microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two. 
    This image shows adding vanilla extract to melted butter.
    • Toss apples with a little bit of lemon juice then place the apples in the skillet.
    • Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apples to coat them.
    This is a image of adding peeled and sliced apples to a skillet.
    This is a image of pouring melted butter and vanilla extract over top of apples in a cast iron skillet.
    • Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
    • Cut the burner onto medium heat to medium-low heat.
    • Use the wooden spoon to continuously stir the apples until you have tender apples. 
    This image shows how to stir the apples in a cast iron skillet to keep them from burning.

    ​Watch Our Video on how to Make Southern Fried Apples

    YouTube video

    Variations

    ​This recipe can be baked in the oven in a cast iron skillet or a baking dish. 

    What to Serve Fried Apples With

    1. Pork Chops or Roast Pork: The sweet and savory flavors of Southern Fried Apples pair exceptionally well with pork dishes.
    2. Biscuits or Cornbread: Serve the fried apples alongside biscuits or cornbread for a comforting and delicious combination.
    3. Pancakes or Waffles: Elevate your breakfast by topping pancakes or waffles with a generous serving of Southern Fried Apples.
    4. Vanilla Ice Cream: Turn the fried apples into a delightful dessert by serving them warm over a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
    5. French Toast: Enhance the flavor of your French toast by adding a layer of Southern Fried Apples on top.
    6. Grilled or Baked Chicken: The sweetness of the apples can balance the savory notes of grilled chicken, creating a tasty contrast.
    7. Yogurt Parfait: Layer the fried apples with yogurt and granola for a delicious and wholesome parfait.
    8. Cheese Plate: Use the fried apples as a sweet component on a cheese platter, offering a contrast to the savory cheeses.

    FAQ's

    Can you freeze fried apples?

    Technically you can freeze them. In my opinion, I would not. The texture will be very mushy and not appealing once they are thawed and reheated.

    How do you store this recipe?

    Store the cooked apples in an airtight container. Place in the refrigerator for 3-5 days. When ready to eat, dip out a small portion in a microwave-safe bowl and reheat.

    How long does it take to make Southern Fried Apples?

    Southern Fried Apples are very quick and easy to make, usually taking about 15-20 minutes from start to finish to make.

    Is this recipe suitable for vegetarians?

    Yes. This recipe is vegetarian-friendly as it is primarily apples, cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter.

    Can I make this recipe in advance?

    While these can be made in advance, they are best made and eaten the same day that you make them.

    Can I adjust the sweetness of the dish?

    Yes, feel free to adjust the sugar amount to suit your preferences.

    What type of pan is best for making this recipe?

    I prefer to use a cast iron skillet with high sides. The high sides work great because you will be starting this dish a lot and there will be a lot of apples in it. The high sides will keep the juiciest contained and the apples from falling out.

    ​​Let's Get Food Junked!

    This is one of my favorite apple recipes and I love to know how these Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe turn out for you. Leave me a comment below! I'd love to hear from you!

    Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe with Cinnamon

    This is a image of fried apples in a cast iron pan with a slotted serving spoon.

    Make these super easy Southern Fried Apples by tossing apples with cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter. Quick and delicious, they work as a side or dessert

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 6-7 Large Apples
    • 1 ½ teaspoons of ground cinnamon
    • ½ cup brown sugar
    • 4 tablespoons of melted butter
    • 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon of sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon of cornstarch

    Instructions

    1. Wash and peel the apples (optional) with a sharp knife, vegetable peeler, or apple peeler.
    2. Core the apples and cut the apples in slices. The Apple Peeler works great for this step. 
    3. In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, ground cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt. 
    4. In a small microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two. 
    5. Toss apples with a little bit of lemon juice then place the apples in the skillet.
    6. Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apples to coat them.
    7. Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
    8. Cut the burner onto medium heat to medium-low heat.
    9. Use the wooden spoon to continuously stir the apples until you have tender apples or the texture that you desire.

    Notes

    If you want to leave the peelings on the apples you can. Some folks leave them for texture, some do not like them on their own. It is up to you.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Southern / Category: Side Dishes

    Easy Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

    by 2 Comments

    Wait until you try this super simple-to-make Southern Tuna salad recipe with egg. It combines the perfect blend of flavors and ingredients. A delightful combination of Southern charm and culinary excellence awaits as we guide you through crafting this easy and delicious dish.

    This image shows a completed tuna salad sandwich with chips.

    What is Southern Tuna Salad?

    Southern Tuna Salad is a salad that consists of tuna mixed with mayonnaise. The tuna can be bought fresh and then cooked or you can use a can of tuna, which most people do nowadays.

    A variety of other ingredients are often added to this salad such as sweet relish or dill relish, red onion, Yellow or Dijon mustard, lemon juice, fresh celery, and hard-boiled eggs. We will cover what we love to add to this simple tuna salad recipe down below. 

    Like many dishes that came out of the 19th century, time were hard and people used everything they had to get by. This southern-style tuna salad recipe is no different. Just like egg salad, ham salad, or chicken salad, these dishes were cheap to make, filling, lots of protein, and used up leftover scraps. 

    Versatility

    This classic Southern Tuna Salad recipe can be eaten in a variety of ways such as on a bed of lettuce, with crackers, or you can put it between two slices of bread with a side of fries or potato chips. When added to bread, it makes the best-tasting tuna salad sandwiches you have ever eaten!

    Another great way to serve this classic recipe is a tuna melt sandwich on sourdough bread. Talk about mouth-watering. 

    This Recipe is Inspired by Eating Tuna Sandwiches as a Kid

    Fond memories of my childhood involve my mom crafting tuna salad with eggs as a frequent, economical, and speedy meal option. She often paired it with her renowned Southern Egg Salad sandwiches.

    Today, I've elevated her cherished family recipe by adding a touch of flair with a secret ingredient. There is nothing quite as fond as childhood memories of eating a good tuna sandwich as a kid.  

    Why you'll love this Traditional Tuna Salad Recipe

    • Family-Friendly: Loved by all ages, this Southern-inspired dish is a family-friendly recipe that brings everyone to the table.
    • Easy Preparation: With straightforward steps, this recipe is accessible for all skill levels, making it a hassle-free option for any meal.
    • Versatility: Whether for lunch, dinner, or a delightful snack, this Southern Tuna Salad with Egg is a versatile choice that suits various occasions.
    • Protein-Packed: Packed with protein from tuna and eggs, this dish is a nutritious option that keeps you energized and satisfied.
    • Quick Meal Solution: Perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and delicious meal without compromising on taste or nutrition.

    Recipe Highlights 

    Tuna salad has a distinct taste characterized by a combination of flavors from its key ingredients. It is savory, creamy, fresh, crunchy, with a mild tang. The specific taste may vary based on individual preferences and variations in the recipe, but tuna salad is generally known for its versatility and ability to be customized to suit different palates.

    By incorporating the distinctive tanginess of Dukes Mayo, chopped dill pickles, and the delightful texture of chopped eggs, I've infused a true Southern flair into this recipe. It's this unique combination that led me to affectionately dub it 'Southern Tuna Salad,' capturing the essence of both tradition and innovation in every flavorful bite.

    WHAT YOU NEED TO MAKE THIS RECIPE 

    To craft this perfect recipe, gather a handful of uncomplicated ingredients and basic kitchen tools. Here's a quick rundown for your convenience. 

    Ingredients

    • Canned Tuna Fish - Albacore tuna or Chuck Light both work great. Get water-packed instead of oil-packed though.  
    • Hard-boiled egg- Similar to potato salad, the addition of chopped eggs imparts a Southern touch to this dish, enhancing both its texture and flavor.
    • Dill pickles or dill pickle relish
    • Mayonnaise- I prefer Dukes but if you do not or can not find it, you can use your preface.
    • Yellow mustard
    • Chopped celery- gives a crunchy texture
    • Black pepper
    • Old Bay Seasoning- for extra flavor

    See the recipe card at the bottom for the full recipe and quantities.

    ​Equipment you'll need  

    • Large mixing bowl
    • Can opener
    • Sharp Knife
    • Mixing spoon or spatula
    • Cutting board

    Note: See our Kitchen Essentials Page for products that I recommend buying for the equipment you'll.

    HOW TO MAKE Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

    YouTube video

    Step-by-step Instructions 

    Preparation

    • Place the egg in a small stock pot and cover them with water. 
    • Bring to a boil, then reduce the heat and simmer for 10 to 12 minutes. 
    • Remove the egg then let cool. Peel and then chop the egg into small pieces.
    • Open and drain the tuna using a strainer or colander. 
    • Chop celery up into small pieces.   
    • Chop pickles up into small pieces

    Make Dressing

    • Add mayonnaise, mustard, black pepper, old bay, and dill pickles in a medium or large mixing bowl. 
    • Mix until the seasonings are well combined.

    Mixing

    • Add tuna, chopped eggs, and celery to the bowl and mix until the creamy dressing has coated all the ingredients and everything is well combined.

    Make-ahead options  

    To save time, boil your eggs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you are ready to make the tuna salad.  

    ​Substitutions 

    • Sweet Pickle relish if you prefer sweet over dill. 
    • Red onion, green onions, or sweet onion- personal preference on which one to use. The red adds more bite and color. Green adds color and a mild flavor. The sweet adds a milder flavor and slight sweetness.
    • Dijon mustard
    • Salt- Exercise caution with the salt, considering the inherent sodium content in canned tuna, Old Bay seasoning, dill pickles, and yellow mustard.
    • Greek Yogurt-You can substitute Greek yogurt for the mayo. 
    • Lemon Juice

    Best Served With

    Storage Tips 

    This classic tuna salad can be stored in an airtight container for 3-5 days in the refrigerator. 

    FAQ's

    Can you freeze tuna salad?

    Yes! Place the tuna salad in a freezer-safe container or a freezer-safe zip-lock bag. It will be good for up to 3 months. Just note that the texture may change. I love these Souper Cubes to freeze dishes such as tuna salad.

    What makes a tuna salad "Southern"?

    The Southern tuna salad recipe often incorporates regional flavors and ingredients, such as Dukes Mayo, which adds a distinct creaminess. Eggs and pickles are another ingredient that disguises tuna salad. It may also include traditional Southern seasonings, creating a delightful fusion of Southern charm in a classic dish.

    Are there alternatives to Duke Mayo in the recipe?

    Yes, you can substitute Dukes Mayo with any mayonnaise of your choice. Greek yogurt or sour cream can also be used for a tangy twist.

    What sides pair well with Southern Tuna Salad?

    Southern Tuna Salad complements a variety of sides, such as crackers, sliced baguettes, or as a filling for sandwiches. It also pairs well with a side salad or fresh vegetable sticks for a complete and satisfying meal.

    Can I make this recipe without eggs for a vegetarian option?

    Certainly! Simply omit the eggs to create a vegetarian version of the Southern Tuna Salad. You can enhance the texture with additional vegetables or plant-based ingredients.

    ​Let's get food junked!

    Let me know how this Easy Southern Tuna Salad with Egg turns out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you!

    Yield: 4

    Easy Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

    This image is a completed recipe showing southern tuna salad with egg made into a sandwich with chips on the plate.

    Explore a delightful fusion of flavors in our Easy Southern Tuna Salad with Egg recipe. A quick and satisfying dish, blending tuna, eggs, and Southern charm for a tasty twist on a classic favorite.

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 2- (5 ounce) cans or packets of tuna in water. Drained.
    • 1- hard boiled Egg
    • ¼- cup of Mayonnaise
    • 1- teaspoon of Yellow Mustard
    • 1- stalk of celery chopped fine
    • 1- tablespoon of chopped dill pickle (or dill pickler relish)
    • ¼- teaspoon Old Bay Seasoning
    • ¼- teaspoon of black pepper

    Instructions

    Preparation

    1. Place the egg in a small stock pot and cover it with water.
    2. Bring water to a boil, then reduce the heat to a simmer for 10 to 12 minutes.
    3. Remove the egg, and let cool. Peel and then chop the eggs.
    4. Open and drain the tuna.
    5. Chop Celery stalk up into small pieces.
    6. Chop pickles up into small pieces.

    Make Dressing

    1. Add mayonnaise, mustard, Old Bay, black pepper, and dill pickles in a medium or large mixing bowl.
    2. Mix ingredients until well combined.

    Mixing all ingredients

    1. Add tuna, chopped eggs, and celery to the large bowl and mix until the creamy dressing has coated all the ingredients and everything is well combined.

    Notes

    Optional: Salt (I would taste before adding salt as Old Bay has salt, the dill pickles have salt, and the celery does as well)

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Southern / Category: Salad

    Traditional South Carolina Food: 15 Foods SC is known For

    by Leave a Comment

    South Carolina is a state steeped in rich history and diverse cultural influences. It boasts a culinary landscape that reflects its unique heritage. From the Lowcountry to the Upstate. South Carolina is celebrated for its traditional foods that have stood the test of time in the American South. 

    This journey through the Palmetto State unveils a tapestry of flavors, where Southern comfort meets coastal sophistication. From iconic dishes rooted in Gullah traditions to barbecue that sparks friendly rivalries. South Carolina's culinary offerings showcase the state's commitment to preserving its culinary heritage while embracing the modern twists that make its food scene truly one-of-a-kind.

    Join us as we explore the 15 traditional South Carolina foods that define the culinary identity of South Carolina.

    ​Importance of Traditional South Carolina Food

    Traditional foods play a vital role in shaping the cultural identity of South Carolina. This is a testament to the state's rich history and diverse influences. These culinary traditions are deeply rooted in the cultural tapestry, reflecting the agricultural practices, historical connections, and local ingredients. The fusion of various ethnicities that have contributed to South Carolina's unique food landscape. 

    Beyond mere sustenance, Southern food dishes like Shrimp and Grits, She-crab Soup, and Hoppin' John embody the soul of the state. This connects generations through shared flavors and familial rituals.

    As South Carolinians gather around tables laden with the aromas of Lowcountry cuisine, they not only indulge in delicious bites but also engage in a social gathering of heritage. This preserving and passing down the recipes is what defines the essence of South Carolina culture.

    1. Chicken Bog

    Growing up in South Carolina, you learn about a lot of rice dishes. This particular one is a local favorite for most South Carolinians and a family favorite of ours.

    What Is Chicken Bog

    Chicken Bog is a really simple dish but has lots of flavors. It combines chicken, smoked sausage, and white rice. That is pretty much the base for it. From there you can change it up however you see fit.

    Southern Chicken Bog Recipe (A Traditional South Carolina Dish)

    Chicken bog gets its name from the boggy texture of the dish. This dish is a chicken and rice dish with smoked sausage added in, but the rice is starchy in the way it is cooked.

    As with any regional dish, Chicken bog has variations and different names. Some parts of the state call this dish Chicken Perlo or chicken pilau. Some cook it in different ways with different ingredients.

    The history of this dish has its roots in the South Carolina Low Country, where most of the rice dishes of the state originated. Some even say that the name comes from the bogs of the low country. That is up for debate though as no one knows the history behind the name. Either way, this is one of my favorite South Carolina Traditional foods.

    2. Shrimp & Grits

    Shrimp and grits is a traditional South Carolina Food. This delightful combination of tender shrimp and creamy, cheesy, and buttery grits has gained popularity far beyond its regional roots. It is now a beloved favorite across the United States.

    shrimp and grits.

    The dish typically consists of shrimp served over a bed of creamy, stone-ground grits. The grits are often seasoned and cooked with butter or cheese. This provides a rich and savory base for the succulent shrimp.

    The shrimp are typically sautéed with a variety of seasonings, which may include garlic, onions, and spices. This creates a flavorful and aromatic topping for the grits. Additional ingredients such as bacon, sausage, or ham are sometimes included to add depth to the dish.

    Shrimp and Grits is celebrated for its harmonious blend of textures and flavors, combining the creamy and comforting grits with the savory and slightly sweet taste of the shrimp. It is often served in both casual and upscale dining establishments.

    3. Low Country Boil

    A low Country boil (also known as Frogmore Stew in South Carolina) is a traditional dish that has been enjoyed by South Carolinians for ages. It combines fresh shrimp, sweet corn, red potatoes, and smoked sausage. Low Country Boil is a perfect all-in-one dish that is sure to be a hit at your next party. This dish is a Traditional South Carolina food that is a classic Southern recipe that you are sure to enjoy!

    How to make a Traditional South Carolina Dish Called Low Country Boil.

    Old Bay Seasoning is used to season the dish. Some folks also add blue crab to their dish. You can add or take away what you like and still have an awesome meal. 

    Low Country Boil goes by a few other names such as Shrimp Boil, Beaufort Boil, Beaufort Stew, Charleston Stew, Seafood Boil, and even Frogmore Stew.

    History of Low Country Boil

    A low Country boil is said to have originated in Frogmore, South Carolina. Frogmore is a small town that is located on the South Carolina coast in a tiny town called St. Helena Island in Beaufort County. Equally important, this area is home to the Gullah Culture which was part of the first slaves sent here to the US from West Africa.

    This sad part of US history is where many of the Southern dishes that we know and love today came from.

    Closeup of the low country boil coming out of the pot.

    A Lowcountry Boil is meant to be enjoyed as a gathering meal. Parties, family reunions, weddings, family gatherings, and other such events serve a Low Country Boil. This is because it feeds a large crowd and is an epic one-pot meal.

    Once cooked, the stew is drained and then poured out on a long table. Sometimes the table is covered in brown paper, aluminum foil, and even newspaper.

    4. Hoppin' John

    Hoppin' John, born in the vibrant Gullah community of South Carolina's Lowcountry, harmoniously blends black-eyed peas, rice, and a pork element, with seasoning options tailored to personal preferences. This rendition features a delightful medley of onions, bell peppers, garlic, bacon, salt, and pepper. 

    For an extra burst of flavor and color, some aficionados opt to incorporate a hint of tomato paste. If you fancy, consider enhancing the aromatic profile with thyme and a bay leaf. Give my take on Hoppin' John a whirl, and I trust you'll relish this hearty, Southern classic.

    YouTube video

    5. Boiled Peanuts

    Boiled peanuts are a super popular snack that is enjoyed by many Southerners. You can usually find them at roadside stands, many convenience stores or gas stations, or even the local grocery store. As with many of the traditions and foods that are popular in the South, peanuts were first brought here with the slave trades from Africa to the United States.

    Quick and Easy Instant Pot Boiled Peanuts recipe.

    Boiled Peanuts are thought to have originated to be an original South Carolina food, where is it listed as the South Carolina State snack food. They also were called Goober peas as a nickname.

    The first ever recipe for boiled peanuts was published in 1899 and was by a South Carolina lady by the name of Almeda Lambert (National Peanut Board, 2022).

    ​A Fall time snack

    Boiled peanuts are enjoyed year-round, but their popularity increases as summer fades into fall. As the South turns its eyes to football season, this snack raises its salty head on each game day. They are a true Southern delicacy.

    ​They can be enjoyed with just plain salt or you can add seasonings to them as well. One popular way to season them is with Cajun seasoning or creole seasoning. Some people will add in a little vinegar as well.

    One of my favorite ways I have ever had them was boiled with ham hocks and vinegar. That was superb! Feel free to add in your favorite seasonings.

    6. Catfish Stew

    Considered by many as a South Carolina Traditional dish, Catfish stew combines tomatoes, bacon, potatoes, and Catfish filets to make a hearty and filling stew. Catfish stew was a staple along the banks of many fish camps back in the early days.

    Catfish stew may go by a few different names such as South Carolina Catfish Stew, Charleston Catfish Stew, Lowcountry Catfish Stew, and Carolina Catfish Stew. So if you are looking the name up, just know it goes by different names sometimes.

    Catfish Stew cooking in a Cast Iron Dutch Oven.

    Once cooked, the catfish breaks apart during the cooking process. You don’t see much of it once it has cooked down to the consistency that I prefer. This is what makes a great southern catfish stew that is sure to please your taste buds!

    In the southern lakes, the plentiful catfish, a true delicacy in the region, take center stage. While many may associate catfish with the classic Southern style of being fried to golden brown perfection, there's more than one way to savor these delectable creatures. Enter Catfish Stew, an alternative that, once experienced, is bound to win your taste buds over.

    7. Hush Puppies

    The history of the hush puppy is deeply rooted in Southern culinary traditions, with its origins traced back to the United States, particularly South Carolina. The exact origin story is a bit elusive, but a few popular theories exist.

    One of the many theories places the invention of the Hush Puppy on the banks of the Edisto River right here in South Carolina. According to Robertfmoss.com, Hush Puppies were originally called Red Horse bread.

    Close up of hush puppies also known as Red Horse Bread as a South Carolina Food.

    It was common for camps to be set up in the South on the banks of the river. Here men would fish, then cook the fish. Their families would come to eat at the camp. This is where the term "Fish camps" came from as you will see on many fried fish eateries throughout the South. 

    The name of the hush puppy which was originally called Red Horse bread was called this because it was served alongside a popular species of fish at the time called a Red Horse.

    Romeo Govan was an African American man who was known for his fish fries and this was a side that he served along with the fish. Red Horse Bread was the name he gave it. He simply called it Red horse bread because he served it with red horse fish.

    8. Barbecue

    Few foods in the United States spark as much debate as BBQ. Across the South, each state boasts its distinct BBQ style and sauce, creating a flavorful tapestry of regional traditions.

    Some states such as South Carolina and North Carolina are even divided on chopped barbecue versus pulled barbecue and sauce style as well. Every proclaiming the finest BBQ highlights the subjectivity of food. Like beauty in the eye of the beholder, what's delicious depends on the taste buds of the one savoring it.

    What Does South Carolina Mean by Barbecue

    There is research that shows that South Carolina was the first state to barbecue. This makes SC the birthplace of Barbecue. According to Destination-bbq, what makes BBQ is the method by which it is cooked, low and slow, and the marinade of smoke. If you have no smoke, you have no BBQ. 

    I should interject here that what Southerns and Northerns call BBQ is different. One uses it as a noun, and the other as a verb.

    Here is what I mean. In the North, BBQ refers to an event or social gathering. Here In the South, especially South Carolina, when we say BBQ we are specifically speaking about smoking Pork low and slow. 

    In short, pigs were brought to the coastal regions of South Carolina by Spanish invaders. Native Americans were already cooking food low, slow, and over a bed of coals. Again, According to Destinations-bbq, "With many of the other origin myths dispelled and a clear case drawn for the marriage of the Native American cooking technique and the Spanish introduction of the pig, it is fairly certain that the first real barbeque took place here in South Carolina."

    9. Benne Wafer

    Benne wafers have a history deeply rooted in the Lowcountry of South Carolina. With origins tracing back to the Gullah-Geechee culture. "Benne" is a West African word for sesame, and it reflects the primary ingredient in these thin, crispy cookies. Enslaved West Africans brought the tradition of using sesame seeds to the southern United States, and over time, benne wafers emerged as a distinctive culinary creation.

    Benne Wafers | Photo from Amazon (Olde Colony Bakery)

    The cookies gained popularity in Charleston, South Carolina, where African culinary influences melded with European baking techniques. The wafers became a cherished part of the local food culture, often prepared for celebrations and special occasions. Benne wafers are known for their sweet, nutty flavor and delicate texture.

    In Charleston, there's a company, Olde Colony Bakery, still crafting Benne Wafers today. These tasty treats are a local favorite, and you can order them online to savor the Southern goodness.

    10. She-Crab Soup

    She-crab soup is a quintessential dish hailing from the Lowcountry of South Carolina, celebrated for its rich flavors and coastal charm. The soup's main star is the blue crab, particularly the female crab known as the "she-crab." 

    With its distinctive blend of creamy broth, lump Blue crab meat, and a hint of sherry, she-crab soup offers a delectable experience that captures the essence of Southern hospitality. Originating in Charleston, this soup has become a symbol of the region's culinary heritage, often served at elegant gatherings and esteemed restaurants.

    Whether enjoyed on a chilly evening or as a culinary tribute to the bounties of the Atlantic, she-crab soup stands as a savory testament to the unique and flavorful traditions of South Carolina.

    11. Oyster Roast

    The history of the oyster roast traces back to coastal communities in the Southern United States, particularly in South Carolina's Lowcountry. Descendants of West African slaves, the Gullah-Geechee people, played a crucial role in shaping this tradition. Oyster roasts were informal gatherings held outdoors, where oysters were roasted on grills over open flames, creating a unique and flavorful cooking method. 

    Preparing oysters to be roasted | @ Canva.com

    Today, these roasts are communal events, fostering social bonds as participants gather to shuck and savor the briny, succulent oysters. The tradition has become a cherished celebration of local seafood and community in coastal regions throughout the South.

    Once the oysters are roasted, they are poured out on a table for people to gather around and shuck while you eat them. The oyster meat is often placed on a saltine cracker and then topped with hot sauce, Cocktail sauce, or Horseradish sauce. 

    Adding hot sauce to a roasted oyster.
    Hot Sauce on a Shucked Oyster | @ Canva.com

    12. Pimento Cheese

    Pimento cheese has a flavorful history deeply rooted in the Southern United States, with origins that can be traced back to the early 20th century. The combination of cheese, mayonnaise, and chopped pimentos (sweet red peppers) became a beloved staple in Southern households, often considered a comfort food.

    Palmetto Cheese
    Creamy, Cheesy, Palmetto cheese

    The exact origins of pimento cheese are a bit elusive, but it gained popularity in the early 20th century when mass-produced food products became more widely available. Pimento cheese offered a convenient and affordable way to add flavor and versatility to meals, and it quickly became a regional favorite.

    Making Pimento cheese homemade is best, but if you want to try a great commercially made pimento cheese, check out Palmetto Cheese. It is made right here in the Palmetto State. 

    Palmetto cheese review.

    Pimento cheese became a symbol of Southern hospitality and a popular dish at social gatherings, picnics, and church events. It also found its way into upscale Southern cuisine, with chefs incorporating it into creative recipes. You will even see it in big events such as the Master's Golf Tournament in April as well. 

    13. Peach Cobbler

    South Carolina has a longstanding and sweet association with peaches, a history that dates back to the late 19th century. The state's climate, particularly in the upstate regions, proved to be ideal for cultivating this juicy and flavorful fruit.

    Although its neighboring state, Georgia, is known as the "Peach State", SC produces and exports more peaches than Georgia coming in nationally only to California. 

    History of Peach Cobbler

    One of the most iconic peach dishes from the South is the Peach Cobbler. Peach cobbler, a classic Southern dessert, has roots that can be traced back to early American history. The dish evolved as European settlers adapted traditional fruit-based desserts to the ingredients available in the New World.

    The word "cobbler" itself is thought to originate from the British term "cobeler," referring to a person who mends shoes. The name likely stuck because the biscuit or pastry topping resembles a cobbled street.

    close up of peach cobbler with vanilla ice cream on top.

    As settlers moved westward in the 19th century, they brought their culinary traditions with them, incorporating locally available fruits into their desserts. Peaches, abundant in the Southern United States, became a popular choice for cobblers.

    ​While peach cobbler is not exclusively from South Carolina, the state, with its favorable climate for peach cultivation, has certainly contributed to the popularity of this classic Southern dessert.

    14. Okra Soup

    While the history of okra soup specifically in South Carolina might not be extensively documented, the use of okra in Southern cuisine, including the state of South Carolina, has deep historical roots. The presence of okra in Southern cooking can be traced back to the African diaspora and the culinary traditions of enslaved Africans who brought this versatile vegetable to the Southern United States.

    In South Carolina, where Gullah-Geechee communities preserved and adapted West African culinary practices, okra became a fundamental ingredient in various dishes, including soups and stews. The Gullah people, who resided in the Lowcountry regions of South Carolina, made significant contributions to the region's unique cuisine, incorporating ingredients like okra into their recipes.

    15. Sweet Tea

    Being a native of South Carolina, I have drank Southern Sweet Tea all my life. I cannot remember a time when there was not a pitcher of sweet tea in the refrigerator. It is one of my favorite all-time drinks and that is why I am sharing how to make the perfect southern sweet tea recipe. 

    ball wide mouth canning jar full of iced southern sweet tea

    Birthplace of Sweet Tea

    The birthplace of sweet tea is often attributed to the Southern United States, particularly the region known as the "Lowcountry," which includes states such as South Carolina and Georgia. While sweetened iced tea likely existed in various forms before the 19th century, the specific term "sweet tea" and its association with the South became prominent in the early 20th century.

    South Carolina Had the First Tea Plantations

    As stated before, I was born and raised in South Carolina. Some of the very first tea plantations were right here in the Palmetto State. Not only was South Carolina the first place to plant and raise tea, but it is also thought to have been the only state to grow tea commercially. 

    Image of my grandmas tea pitcher.
    Stoneware Tea Pitcher that's been in my family for generations

    One popular origin story points to the 1904 World's Fair in St. Louis, where iced tea with added sugar was showcased by tea plantation owner Richard Blechynden from Summerville, South Carolina. Visitors to the fair enjoyed the refreshing beverage and sweet tea gradually gained popularity in the Southern states.

    Tea Plantation | @ Canva

    Another tale attributes the creation of sweet tea to the tea plantations in the Lowcountry, where the hot climate inspired the addition of sugar to iced tea to create a more thirst-quenching and enjoyable beverage. Regardless of its exact origin, sweet tea has become an iconic and beloved Southern tradition. 

    Southern Hospitality

    It is often associated with hospitality, warm weather, and the cultural heritage of the American South. Today, sweet tea is a staple in Southern cuisine and is a South Carolina favorite that is enjoyed throughout the United States, with variations in sweetness levels depending on personal preferences.

    ​Conclusion

    As we wrap up our culinary tour through the Palmetto State, it's evident that South Carolina's traditional foods are not just a feast for the palate but a journey through the state's vibrant history and diverse cultural influences.

    From the Lowcountry's seafood delights to the barbecue traditions that ignite taste buds, each dish reflects a story woven into the fabric of South Carolina's rich heritage.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. We hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    The Best Instant Read Thermometer [2024]

    by Leave a Comment

    Whether you're a seasoned chef or an enthusiastic home cook, having the right tools at your disposal can make all the difference. Regarding accuracy, speed, and reliability in temperature measurement, the Thermoworks Thermapen stands out as the undisputed champion of the best instant read thermometer.

    Picture this: a perfectly cooked steak with a caramelized crust and a juicy, tender interior. Achieving such culinary perfection requires meticulous control over temperature, and that's where the Thermoworks Thermapen becomes your kitchen companion. This instant-read thermometer isn't just a gadget; it's a game-changer that elevates your cooking experience to new heights.

    For more tools that I recommend, check out this article on 5 Essential Kitchen Tools You Need.

    Photo from Canva.com

    In this blog post, we'll take a closer look at what makes the Thermoworks Thermapen the best instant-read thermometer on the market. From its cutting-edge technology to its user-friendly design, we'll delve into the features that set it apart and explore how it can revolutionize the way you approach cooking.

    Why You Need An Instant Read Thermometer

    An instant-read thermometer is one of if not the most important kitchen tools for professional chefs and home cooks alike. This tool is an indispensable tool in the kitchen for several compelling reasons:

    Photo from Canva.com

    Precision Cooking

    Instant-read thermometers provide accurate and instantaneous temperature readings, allowing you to achieve precision in your cooking. Whether you're grilling, baking, sous vide, roasting, deep frying, or pan-frying, knowing the exact internal temperature of your food is crucial for achieving the desired doneness.

    In reality, cooking by temperature is better than cooking by time or cutting open the meat to see the color inside as some home cooks do. Cutting into the meat releases the internal juices which allow the meat to dry out.

    Furthermore, cooking by time is not always accurate as temperatures on ovens, grills, crock pots, stove tops, or other cooking devices can vary from brand to brand and even unit to unit. 

    Food Safety 

    Ensuring that meat and poultry reach a safe internal temperature is vital to eliminate harmful bacteria and pathogens. With this in mind, instant-read thermometers help you verify that your food has reached the recommended temperature, reducing the risk of foodborne illnesses.

    Making sure that your food is cooked to the right temperature to imperative to kill bacteria which may be harmful if eaten. Not only is an instant-read thermometer great for providing accurate readings of food temperature for food safety, but it also helps to get the meat you are cooking to the desired temperature so you do not overcook it. 

    Consistent Results 

    Achieving consistency in your cooking is challenging without accurate temperature control. Furthermore, an instant-read thermometer ensures that your dishes are cooked consistently, eliminating the guesswork and providing reliable results every time.

    Versatility

    Instant-read thermometers are versatile tools suitable for various cooking methods and types of food. From checking the doneness of a steak to ensuring the perfect temperature for bread or candy making, these thermometers cover a wide range of culinary applications.

    Additionally, this versatile tool can be employed for tasks such as gauging water temperatures, ensuring the ideal lukewarm conditions for baking bread, or precisely measuring the temperature of frying oil when preparing dishes like Crispy Southern Fried Catfish.

    YouTube video

    Preventing Overcooking

    Overcooking can lead to dry and unappetizing meals. With an instant-read thermometer, you can pull your food off the heat at the exact moment it reaches the desired temperature, preventing overcooking and preserving moisture and flavor.

    Ideal for Grilling

    Grilling success often hinges on precise temperature control. Instant-read thermometers help you monitor the internal temperature of meat on the grill, ensuring that it reaches the ideal level for safety and taste.

    The Best Instant Read Thermometer is made by ThermoWorks

    In my view, ThermoWorks thermometers stand out as the top choice for instant-read thermometers on the market. This indispensable tool is renowned for its high-quality performance, earning endorsements from numerous restaurants and professional chefs.

    Notably, it is also trusted by America's Test Kitchen, further solidifying its reputation in the culinary world.

    The Thermoworks brand has earned its reputation as the best instant-read thermometer for a variety of reasons and my favorite model is their Thermapen. Here are some of the reasons I love it:

    Unmatched Speed and Accuracy

    The Thermapen boasts an incredibly fast response time, providing accurate temperature readings within seconds. This rapid performance ensures that you can make real-time adjustments to your cooking process.

    High Precision Design

    Engineered with high-precision sensors, the Thermapen delivers precise temperature readings with minimal variance. This level of precision is crucial for achieving consistent and perfectly cooked results. Not only that, but the Thermoworks Thermapen has one of the fastest reading speeds.

    This is so important when you are checking meat temps over a hot grill. The longer it takes to get a reading, the longer your hand is over the high temperatures.  

    User-Friendly Design

    The Thermapen is designed with user convenience in mind. Its ease of use and intuitive design features a simple one-handed operation. It has an easy-to-read display and an auto-rotating display for easy readability from any angle. This sets them apart from other brands of digital thermometers. 

    Durability and Build Quality

    Crafted with durable materials and robust construction, the Thermapen is built to withstand the rigors of the kitchen. Its sturdy design ensures longevity, making it a reliable and long-lasting investment for a long time. 

    Versatility Across Various Culinary Applications

    The Thermapen is versatile and suitable for a wide range of cooking applications. Whether you're grilling, roasting, baking, or candy making, this thermometer adapts to different culinary scenarios with ease.

    Water-Resistant Design

    The Thermapen is equipped with water-resistant housing and a rating of IP67. This adds an extra layer of protection against spills and splashes. This feature enhances the durability of the thermometer and makes it suitable for use in diverse kitchen environments.

    Extended Battery Life

    With efficient power management, the Thermapen offers an extended battery life of 2000 hours. This reduces the frequency of battery replacements. This ensures that the thermometer is ready for use whenever you need it.

    Automatic On/Off Functionality

    The Thermapen is designed with automatic on/off functionality, conserving battery life further. The thermometer activates when you unfold the probe and turns off when you close it, minimizing energy consumption.

    Quality Assurance and Calibration

    Thermoworks is known for its commitment to quality, and Thermapen is no exception. Each unit undergoes rigorous testing and calibration to meet high standards, ensuring that users receive a reliable and accurate tool.

    Customer Satisfaction and Reviews

    Positive reviews and widespread customer satisfaction attest to the excellence of the Thermapen. The thermometer has gained a loyal following in the culinary community, with users praising its performance and reliability.

    Thermapen One

    The thermapen One is the particular modem of Thermpen that I love. According to the Thermoworks website, "With full readings in ONE second or less, Thermapen One approaches the speed of thought - allowing you to focus exclusively on the quality of your work. Achieve such speed and accuracy without sacrificing durability and usability."

    The Thermapen One is the fastest-reading digital instant-read thermometer on the market making it the best instant-read thermometer. 

    Why Thermapen One is the Best Instant Read Thermometer

    This is a picture showing the Thermoworks Thermapen. It it is One of the best instant read thermometers.
    Check Price

    The Thermapen One is equipped with a myriad of features that set it apart as an exceptional instant-read thermometer:

    1. Ultra-Fast Readings:
      • The Thermapen One delivers lightning-fast temperature readings of one second, ensuring minimal wait time during the cooking process.
    2. High-Precision Sensors:
      • Engineered with advanced sensors, this thermometer provides precise and accurate temperature measurements for consistent cooking results.
    3. Intelligent Backlit Display:
      • Featuring an intelligent backlight, the display ensures easy readability in various lighting conditions, making it convenient for any kitchen environment.
    4. Auto-Rotating Display:
      • The Thermapen One's display automatically rotates, allowing for effortless reading from any angle, and enhancing user convenience.
    5. Water-Resistant Design:
      • With a water-resistant housing, the thermometer is built to withstand spills and splashes, adding durability and longevity to its design.
    6. Foldable Probe with Auto-On/Off:
      • The foldable probe design not only ensures easy storage but also activates the thermometer when unfolded and powers it off when closed, conserving battery life.
    7. Ergonomic Design:
      • Designed with user comfort in mind, the Thermapen One boasts an ergonomic form factor, allowing for easy handling and precise control.
    8. Certified Accuracy:
      • The Thermapen One undergoes rigorous testing and calibration, providing users with a certified level of accuracy that is essential for precise temperature measurement.
    9. Trusted Brand:
      • As part of the Thermoworks brand, the Thermapen One inherits a legacy of quality and reliability, earning trust among culinary professionals and home cooks alike.

    ​Exploring Limitations: Drawbacks and Considerations of the Thermapen One

    Even though we think that the Thermoworks Thermapen One is the best instant-read meat thermometer, it's essential to consider some potential drawbacks:

    1. Price Point: The Thermapen One is positioned as a premium product, and its cost may be higher compared to other instant-read thermometers on the market.
    2. None Locking Probe Design: The folding probe doesn't lock. While this isn't a deal breaker, it would be nice if the probe locked into multiple positions.
    YouTube video

    Conclusion

    In the world of precision cooking, the Thermoworks Thermapen One emerges as a leading force, offering unparalleled speed, accuracy, and a suite of features that elevate the culinary experience. From its lightning-fast readings to its water-resistant design, this instant-read thermometer is a testament to Thermoworks' commitment to quality.

    While the Thermapen One undoubtedly stands out as a top-tier kitchen tool, it's crucial to weigh the considerations. The premium price point may pose a challenge for some budgets, and the advanced features might be more than what every user needs. However, for those who seek the epitome of accuracy and reliability, the investment is well justified.

    FAQ's

    Can the Thermapen One be calibrated for accuracy?

    The Thermapen One is generally calibrated during the manufacturing process to ensure accuracy. Users are advised to follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper use and care, and in some cases, recalibration may be possible.

    Is the Thermapen One suitable for beginners in the kitchen?

    Absolutely! While the Thermapen One is a high-performance tool, its user-friendly design makes it accessible for both seasoned chefs and beginners alike. Its intuitive features and large display contribute to a positive user experience.

    What sets the Thermapen One apart from other instant-read thermometers on the market?

    The Thermapen One distinguishes itself with its ultra-fast readings, high-precision sensors, water-resistant design, and thoughtful features such as the intelligent backlight and auto-rotating display. Its combination of speed, accuracy, and durability sets it apart from many competitors.

    Does the Thermapen One require frequent battery replacements?

    The Thermapen One is designed with efficient power management, resulting in an extended battery life. While battery replacement is inevitable over time, users can expect a reasonable duration of use before needing to replace the batteries.

    How durable is the Thermapen One?

    The Thermapen One is crafted with durable materials and a robust design, making it well-suited for the demands of both professional and home kitchens. Its water-resistant feature adds an extra layer of protection against spills and splashes.

    Where can I purchase the Thermapen One?

    You can purchase one by following the affiliate link here.

    How to Make Peach Tea (Easy Recipe)

    by Leave a Comment

    Welcome to the refreshing world of homemade Peach Tea, where the sweet and succulent flavors of Georgia peaches mingle perfectly with the classic charm of Southern Tea Company's Georgia Peach Tea Bags. Creating this delightful beverage is a breeze and a journey into the heart of Southern hospitality, bringing the warmth of a summer day to your glass.

    This photo is used in the blog post on how to make peach tea.

    In this simple guide, we will walk you through the steps to craft a pitcher of Peach Iced Tea that captures the essence of the South. With the distinct aroma and taste of ripe peaches infused into each sip, this beverage is a perfect companion for lazy afternoons, backyard gatherings, or any moment you crave a cool and flavorful respite.

    So, let's dive into the world of how to make easy peach iced tea and discover how to transform ordinary tea into a sweet symphony of Southern charm and fruity bliss. Get ready to sip, relax, and savor the taste of summer in every glass!

    If you enjoy this Peach Iced Tea recipe, I think you'll love this complete list of the 25 most refreshing Iced Tea recipes.

    History of Southern Sweet Tea

    I was born and raised in South Carolina. Some of the very first tea plantations were right here in the Palmetto State. Not only was South Carolina the first place to plant and raise tea, but it is also thought to have been the only state to grow tea commercially. 

    Tea Plantation | Photo from Canva.com

    Many also say that sweet tea was born right here in our state of South Carolina as well. Check out this article from Southern Living about how South Carolina was the birthplace of Sweet Tea.

    I love homemade iced tea so much and it was about the only drink I had growing up. You can find out how I make my sweet iced tea by checking out this recipe on How to Make the Perfect Southern Sweet Tea. 

    Why Peach Flavor Iced Tea?

    From my childhood days, I've always enhanced my tea with a hint of lemon. This practice is common among many Southerners throughout the Southern States, and it's a tradition for Southern restaurants to accompany tea with a fresh lemon slice. The allure of fresh peaches follows a similar pattern. When it comes to beating the heat on a scorching summer day, nothing quite matches the revitalizing sensation of peach iced tea!

    Peach Iced Tea | Photo from Canva.com

    Peach Iced Tea is a Twist on a Classic Flavor

    Creating peach-flavored iced tea adds a delightful twist to the classic beverage, offering a unique and refreshing experience. There are several reasons why making this beverage can be a wonderful choice:

    1. Distinctive Flavor: Peaches impart a sweet and slightly tangy flavor to the tea, creating a deliciously distinctive taste. The natural sweetness of peaches complements the traditional tea flavors, resulting in a well-balanced and satisfying beverage.
    2. Seasonal Refreshment: Peaches are often associated with summertime, and peach iced tea is a perfect way to capture the essence of the season. The drink provides a cooling and hydrating option, making it ideal for hot days and outdoor gatherings.
    3. Southern Tradition: In Southern cuisine, peaches are a beloved ingredient, and peach iced tea has become a Southern classic. Embracing this tradition adds a touch of regional charm and cultural flair to your beverage choices.
    4. Versatility: This drink can be adapted to various preferences. Whether you prefer it sweetened or unsweetened, with or without lemon, the versatility of peach iced tea allows you to tailor it to your taste.
    5. Health Benefits: Peaches bring nutritional benefits to the table, including vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. Incorporating this fruit into your iced tea not only enhances the flavor but also adds a nutritional boost to your beverage.
    6. Eye-Catching Presentation: The vibrant color of peach iced tea makes it visually appealing. Serving this beverage with slices of fresh peach adds a touch of elegance to your table, making it a visually enticing option for guests.

    How To Make Peach Tea

    Peach-flavored tea is so yummy and you are going to love this so much. There are many ways you can make this delicious drink, from stepping black tea bags, pureeing peach slices to flavor the tea, and making a simple syrup to sweeten the drink. But I have an easier way to make it. To make the peach tea recipe super easy, I like to use Southern Tea Company Georgia Peach teabags. This makes the process super simple and it has a nice peachy flavor without being fake or too strong. 

    Equipment Needed:

    Note: For a rundown of brands I suggest, take a look at the Kitchen Essential Tools page.

    Preparation

    • Start by adding four cups of water to the stock pot. Turn the burner on high and bring water to a boil. 
    this is a photo of me adding water to a stock pot in order to make peach tea.
    • Once the water has boiled, cut the burner off. Add one family-size tea bag to the hot water. 
    This photo is a pot of water boiling in order to make sweet tea.
    • Let the teabag steep for 9 minutes. 

    Mixing

    • Add 1 ¾ cups of cane sugar to a 1-gallon pitcher
    This is a photo showing the steps to making Peach tea by adding in the sugar to a pitcher.
    • Pour hot tea over the sugar and stir with a wooden spoon or metal spoon.
    This photo is showing the steps to making tea. In this step is pouring hot tea over the sugar.
    • Fill the pitcher the rest of the way up with cold water and refrigerate. 
    this photo is filling the pitcher the rest of the way up with water.

    Serving a glass of refreshing Peach Iced Tea

    Grab a few individual glasses and fill them full of ice cubes. Next, pour the refrigerated tea over the ice. If it is peach season and you have access to real peaches, add a few slices of fresh peaches to the glasses. 

    This is the featured photo for a blog post on how to make peach iced tea.
    Note: If you do not have access to fresh peaches, you can use frozen peaches for the garnish. 

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, crafting homemade peach tea emerges as the ultimate summer drink, perfectly suited for those hot summer days and balmy summer months. The delightful fusion of simple ingredients of traditional tea flavors with the sweet and tangy notes of peaches creates a delicious recipe that captures the essence of the season. 

    Whether it's enjoyed on lazy summer afternoons or served at gatherings, homemade peach tea stands as the drink of choice for those seeking a refreshing and satisfying beverage. So, as the mercury rises and the sun graces us with its warmth, elevate your summer experience with the timeless charm of a glass of homemade peach tea – a true embodiment of summer in every sip. Cheers to the simple joys of sipping this enchanting concoction under the sun!

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    ​

    FAQ's

    Can I use frozen peaches for the homemade peach tea?

    Yes, for the garnish you can use frozen peaches.

    Can I use frozen peaches for the homemade peach tea? Yes, for the garnish you can use frozen peaches.

    It is not necessary but if you want to have true Southern Peach Iced Tea, it needs to be sweetened. 

    Can I Adjust how much sugar is in this recipe?

    Yes, I would recommend ¾ of a cup of sugar on the lighter side, and up to 2 cups on the sweeter side. 1 ¾ cups of sugar as this recipe mentions hits the sweet spot. 2 cups of sugar will be sweet like McDonald's sweet tea. Adjust the amount of sugar to your liking. 

    How can I enhance the presentation of homemade peach tea?

    Garnish your peach iced tea with fresh peach slices, a sprig of mint, or even a slice of lemon for an extra visual appeal. Serving over ice in stylish glasses adds to the overall presentation.

    Yield: 16

    How to Make Easy Peach Iced Tea

    This is the featured photo for a blog post on how to make peach iced tea.

    In this simple guide, we will walk you through the steps to craft a pitcher of Peach Iced Tea that captures the essence of the South.

    Prep Time 1 minute
    Cook Time 9 minutes
    Additional Time 9 minutes
    Total Time 9 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups of water
    • 1 Family Size Georgia Peach Teabag from Southern Tea Company
    • 1 ¾ cup of white cane sugar

    Instructions

    1. Bring 4 cups of water to a boil, then turn the burner off.
    2. Add in 1 family size Georgia Peach teabag from Southern Tea Company
    3. Steep for 9 minutes.
    4. Add sugar to a 1-gallon tea pitcher and pour hot tea over the sugar. Mix with a wooden spoon.
    5. Fill the pitcher up the rest of the way with cold water, then refrigerate until chilled.
    6. Serve the tea over ice and add in a few peach slices for a garnish.
    YouTube video

    Nutrition Information:

    Yield:

    16

    Serving Size:

    1
    Amount Per Serving: Calories: 89Total Fat: 0gSaturated Fat: 0gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 0gCholesterol: 0mgSodium: 3mgCarbohydrates: 23gFiber: 0gSugar: 23gProtein: 0g

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams

    How to Reheat a Smoked Ham: 3 Methods for Delicious Results

    by Leave a Comment

    Have you ever found yourself with a store-bought smoked ham, eager to impress your guests with a holiday feast but unsure about the perfect way to reheat it? Join us on a culinary journey as we explore three foolproof methods to learn how to reheat a smoked ham to perfection.

    When you pick up that fully cooked smoked ham from the grocery store, all you need to do is reheat it for a delectable holiday spread. Before we start though, I want to make sure you know the difference between smoked ham and fresh ham, this matters because one is already cooked, and the other is not.

    This is a image showing How to reheat a smoked ham.

    What is Ham?

    Ham is a type of meat that is typically obtained from the hind leg of a pig. It can be prepared in various ways, including curing, smoking, and sometimes cooking.

    This image is showing what a spiral smoked ham looks like. This image is used to show what we are going to reheat vs a green or fresh ham that would need to be fully cooked.
    Fully cooked smoked ham

    There are different types of ham, with the most common being:

    1. Fresh Ham (Green Ham): This is an uncured leg of pork. It is similar in appearance to a roast and is not preserved with curing salts. Fresh ham is typically cooked like other cuts of pork.
    2. Cured Ham: Ham is often cured with a mixture of salt, sugar, and sometimes other flavorings. This curing process helps preserve the meat and gives it a distinct salty flavor. Cured ham can be further divided into various types, such as city ham, country ham, and prosciutto.
    3. Smoked Ham: Some cured hams are also smoked to add a smoky flavor. This is common in many varieties, including American-style hams.
    4. Cooked Ham: Some hams are fully cooked during processing, making them ready to eat or requiring only reheating before consumption. Cooked ham is often used for deli meat. 

    Frequently, ham can combine several of these characteristics, as exemplified by a Honey Baked Ham. In this case, it undergoes curing, smoking, and finally, a delectable glazing process.

    This pictures shows pouring a glaze over a smoked ham that has been reheated.

    People enjoy ham in various culinary dishes, including sandwiches, omelets, and quiches, and as the centerpiece of holiday feasts, showcasing its versatility as meat. The flavor, texture, and preparation methods of ham vary widely, making it a popular and widely consumed meat product in many parts of the world.

    Ensuring You Have a Thoroughly Cooked Ham: Why It Matters

    Given our discussion about a fully cured and cooked ham, it's crucial to verify that the ham you've acquired is indeed fully cooked and not in its uncooked state. When you visit a grocery store, you'll come across smoked ham, but you might also encounter fresh ham or what's known as "green" ham.

    This is a close up of the smoked ham with the person pointing at "Fully Cooked". The purpose of this image is to make sure the audience knows the difference between a smoked ham that is fully cooked and a green or fresh ham that is raw and needs to be cooked.
    Make sure you buy a fully cooked ham and not a fresh or "green" ham

    Fresh or green ham refers to a ham that has not undergone the cooking or curing process.

    According to Michigan State University, "You can identify if the ham has been processed as the package will say what type of ham it is." The label should also tell you if the ham needs to be cooked or not. 

    What is a smoked ham?

    Although you may know what a smoked ham is, I thought it might be useful for some people to know exactly what and how it is. A smoked ham is a fully cooked ham that has been cured and then smoked. 

    Curing Process

    The process typically involves taking a raw ham and curing it with a mixture of salt, sugar, and various seasonings. After curing, the ham is then smoked, which imparts a distinct smoky flavor and helps to preserve the meat.

    Smoking Process

    The smoking process can vary, and different types of wood or other flavorings may be used to add specific taste profiles to the ham. Smoking also contributes to the ham's characteristic pink color. 

    Ham Ready to be smoked | Photo Credit: Canva.com

    Different ways it is used

    Smoked ham can be found in various forms, including whole hams, ham steaks, and sliced ham for sandwiches or other dishes. It is a popular ingredient in many cuisines and is often served during holidays and special occasions such as Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Easter. 

    Picture from Canva showing the smoked ham being in the center of a holiday feast.
    Photo Credit: Canva.com

    Smoked ham is fully cooked

    It is important to reiterate that smoked ham is fully cooked and this recipe is dedicated to showing 3 ways to reheat a smoked ham. As such, smoked ham can be eaten cold or heated, and it is known for its savory, salty, and smoky flavor.

    A good example of this is Honey Baked Ham. Honey Baked Ham is a spiral-sliced ham that undergoes smoking and is often enjoyed both cold and hot.

    How to Reheat a Smoked Ham: Best Practices and Techniques

    Now that we know what a smoked ham is and why when we need to cook or reheat a ham depending on what type it is, let's go over my favorite 3 ways on how to reheat a smoked ham. 

    The first thing you need to know is the weight of the smoked ham. This will determine how long you cook the ham. The weight should be listed on the package; if not, you can weigh it beforehand.

    This image is showing that you need to know the weight of your smoked ham before reheating it. The weight tells us how long we will need to reheat it for.

    Method #1: Reheating a Smoked Ham on the Orion Cooker

    By far my favorite method of how to reheat smoked ham is using the Orion Cooker. The main reason I love this method is the simplicity in which it works. I conducted an honest review of the Orion Cooker, and you can explore the details and discover why I'm impressed with it in my dedicated blog post. 

    picture of the orion cooker with charcoal lit.

    I'll skip the lengthy explanation in this post and skip right to the straightforward instructions on using it.

    Tools Needed:

    Instructions:

    Preparations

    • Fill the bottom ring and top ring with match light charcoal. If using regular charcoal, make sure to soak the charcoal with lighter fluid. 
    • Next, if you want to add a little extra smoke flavor and color, (which I recommend), add some wood chips to the outside edge of the drip pan at the bottom of the inside of the Orion Cooker. 
    • Next, add your rack.
    • Remove all the packaging from the ham and then place your ham on the rack. If you have half ham or ¼ ham, place it on the rack with the flat side down and the fat cap up. If you have a whole ham, place it on the flattest side with the fat cap up. This allows the fat to drip down, basting the ham as it cooks. 
    • Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature. 
    • Close the lid. 

    Cooking

    • Light the Charcoal and set your timer. Orion is a timer-based cooker. Your time starts when you light the charcoal. Trust the time and do not open the lid as this greatly affects the cooking time. 
    • For an 8 to 9-pound ham, you will cook for 1hr 40 minutes or about 13 mins per lb. 
    • Once time is reached, the remote BBQ alarm temp should be close to 140 degrees Fahrenheit. If this temp is reached earlier, you can remove ham at that time. 
    • If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp after the time is done. 
    • For reheating precooked ham, the 140-degree Fahrenheit range is a good serving temperature for ham slices but anything within 140 to 150 is adequate.
    This is a image showing How to reheat a smoked ham.
    Ham that has been reheated on the Orion Cooker

    Note: Don't fret, the charcoal and lighter fluid never come in contact with the food. The food will seal inside the chamber of the Orion Cooker, while the charcoal will supply heat from the outside of the cooker.

    YouTube video

    Method #2 Reheating a smoked ham in a roaster oven

    Using a roaster oven to reheat a smoked ham is a great choice and one that will make a very juicy ham. This method uses an appliance that is similar to a slow cooker, but on a larger scale to be able to fit a large ham.

    This image shows a smoked ham sitting in a roaster oven ready to be reheated.

    This method also works well for cooking fresh ham, boneless hams, other precooked ham, and even a whole turkey. 

    ​Tools Needed:

    Preparations

    • Add 2 cups of water or chicken stock to the bottom pan then replace the rack. 
    This image is a person adding chicken stock to a roaster oven in order to reheat a smoked ham.
    • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit. 
    This image is showing the temperature setting on a roaster oven.
    • Remove all the packaging from the ham and place on the rack.
    • Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature. 
    This image shows a remote meat thermometer placed in the center of a smoked ham that is about to be reheated in order to be served.

    Cooking

    • Place the ham on the rack with the fat cap up and close the lid. 
    • Bake for 10-15 minutes per pound. 
    • Once the meat probe reaches an internal temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit, remove the ham from the roasting oven. If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp. 
    This image is showing what the Thermoworks Smoke Remote BBQ alarm looks like.
    Once the ham reaches 140 degrees, you are done.

    Method #3 Reheating a smoked ham in the oven​

    The next and last method I am going to recommend is reheating a smoked ham in the conventional oven. The benefit of this option is it is the least expensive option as most people will already have an oven in their house. We will use a low heat and slow cooking time, along with a roasting pan to produce a flavorful and juicy ham. 

    This image shows someone putting a precooked ham in the oven in order to show how to reheat a smoked ham.

    The oven produces great results, but in my opinion, the other two methods mentioned above are the best ways to cook a pre-cooked ham.

    ​Tools Needed:

    Preparations:

    • The oven temperature we are using will be 325 degrees Fahrenheit. Preheat the oven to that temperature. 
    • Place a cup of water or chicken stock in the bottom of the pan. 
    • Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature.
    This image shows a remote meat thermometer placed in the center of a smoked ham that is about to be reheated in order to be served.
    • Next, put the ham on the rack in the pan and cover tightly with a single layer of heavy-duty aluminum foil. 

    Cooking:

    • Cook for 10-15 minutes per pound of ham until the meat thermometer reaches 140 degrees Fahrenheit. 
    This image shows someone putting a precooked ham in the oven in order to show how to reheat a smoked ham.
    • Once the meat probe reaches an internal temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit, remove the ham from the roasting oven. If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp. 
    Note: If you do not have a roasting pan, you could use a baking dish.

    ​Serving

    Ham is typically served in slices. If you have a spiral-cut ham, you can serve the ham on a platter and let guest cut their own slice. You could also precut the slices of ham and serve them on a platter. 

    What to serve with smoked ham

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, adding a perfectly warmed pre-cooked ham to your holiday table is not just a good idea; it's the secret ingredient for creating a delicious meal that your guests will remember. The tender, flavorful, and moist holiday ham, carefully prepared in your roasting oven, Orion cooker, or conventional oven, will undoubtedly be the centerpiece of your holiday table. 

    Its exquisite taste and impressive presentation will make your holiday table complete. So, whether it's Thanksgiving, Christmas, Easter, or any special occasion, consider including a holiday ham as a delightful addition to your holiday festivities. Your holiday table and your guests will thank you for this delectable addition.

    FAQ's

    What can I do with leftover ham?

    If you have leftover ham, cut the remaining ham off the bone and place it in an airtight container. It will be good in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

    Can I freeze leftover ham?

    Yes. Place in a freezer-safe container or freezer-safe ziplock bag. It will be good for 2 to 3 months in the freezer.

    Can I use any pre-cooked ham for this recipe?

    Yes, you can use various pre-cooked ham types, but ensure it is fully cooked and follow specific packaging instructions if available.

    How do I prevent the ham from drying out during warming?

    Covering the ham with foil when cooking in the oven with help with drying out. The other two methods do a great job of conserving moisture. Also, make sure to monitor the internal temperature as this is key to maintaining moisture. You do not want to overcook the ham.

    What can I use to glaze the ham for added flavor?

    You can use the ham's own juices to bast or glaze the ham, a glaze from the packaging, or a homemade glaze to enhance the flavor.

    Can I use a roasting bag instead of foil?

    Yes, you can use a roasting bag for a similar effect. Just follow the bag's instructions.

    21 Unique Christmas Gifts for Cooks and Foodies (2025)

    by Leave a Comment

    The holiday season is fast approaching, and what better way to celebrate than by delighting the culinary enthusiasts and food lovers in your life with extraordinary Christmas gifts? Whether they're a master chef or simply someone who appreciates the art of cooking, this curated list of 21 unique Christmas gifts for Cooks and Foodies is sure to bring joy to their hearts and creativity to their kitchens. 

    From innovative gadgets to delectable treats and kitchen essentials with a twist, we've scoured the culinary world to find the perfect presents that will make this holiday season a gastronomic delight. Get ready to embark on a culinary journey filled with inspiration, flavors, and the joy of giving. Let's Jump Right into it, shall we?

    This is a featured picture showing two chefs, Christmas presents, and unique Christmas Gifts for cooks and foodies.

    1. Instant Read Thermometer

    In my kitchen, one of the most frequently employed tools is an instant-read thermometer. Whenever I prepare any type of meat, it becomes my trusted companion, ensuring that it attains the precise temperature required.

    Thermoworks Thermapen One is a instant read thermometer.
    Check Price

    Not just for meat

    Not only are they great for temping meat, but they are also useful for checking other things as well. I use it to check the temperature of the water when I am feeding my sourdough Starter.

    I also use it to check the temperature of frying oil when cooking Southern-style catfish. There are just so many uses for it, which is why I think it is one of the best kitchen gift ideas for Christmas.

    Thermoworks

    I have tried a few brands over the years. A few have broken, and I still have one, but the one that I love the most is made by Thermoworks. They are a professional-grade company that is used by Chefs and home cooks alike.

    What We Like

    • Super Fast: If you try a cheaper brand, you will find that it has a delay in the time that it display the temperature. Thermapen is super fast at displaying the temperature. This is important if you are standing over a blazing hot grill.
    • Professional: Thermoworks Thermapen is of professional quality and made to last.
    • Large Display: Thermapen has a nice, large display that is easy to read.

    What We Don’t Like

    • Splash Proof: While this may seem like a pro, I wish it were waterproof instead of splashproof.
    • Premium Price: The price is higher than many instant-read thermometers, but this one is worth the price.

    2. Orion Cooker

    If you are looking for unique gifts for cooks, then this is a great gift for that special someone or foodie friend who likes to cook outdoors. The Orion cooker may be the perfect gift for them. The Orion Cooker has the remarkable ability to transform an ordinary cook into a culinary star, thanks to its user-friendly operation and the exceptional flavor it imparts to the food it prepares.

    A Honest Review of The Orion Cooker.
    Check Price

    The Orion cooker cooks with four basic methods. The first is indirect heat. The main principle it works on is convection cooking. The chamber is completely sealed to the outside. No air gets in or out. 

    The sleek design and quality of the unit make this a no-brainer. The unit is made of 100% stainless steel, so you never have to worry about it rusting. This thing should outlast me. Even the hardware is stainless steel.

    picture of the orion cooker with charcoal lit.
    Charcoal on the outside never comes in contact with the food

    The charcoal is on the outside of the cooker, and the chamber that the food is in is sealed. The indirect heat causes a convection current to swirl around the inside of the chamber as it builds up pressure. This indirect heat and convection cook the meat. It also seals in moisture and stea,m which helps the meat retain moisture and helps to cook as well.

    What We Like

    • Ease of use: This is the easiest cooker/smoker you will find. 
    • Quality of construction
    • Set it and forget it

    What we don't like

    • Lack of Crust/bark: Since it holds moisture so well, the meat doesn't form a good crust or bark. 
    • Limited capacity: The original size doesn't hold a lot of meat if you're cooking for a group. They do offer a larger size unit that you can buy. 
    • Clean up: The grease drips on the bottom, but there is a pan to catch it. You have to let the unit cool down some to get it out and clean it. This is just a minor disadvantage, as we love the Orion Cooker. 

    3. Bajio Sunglasses

    You may be thinking, this item is weird to be on a list for unique gifts for cooks and foodies or home cooks, but follow me for a minute. If you love grilling, smoking meats, or cooking over a campfire, sunglasses make an awesome gift for that person.

    Not only are sunglasses useful when cooking outside, but they are great to wear anytime you are outdoors to protect your eyes.

    Check Price

    True to their roots

    The Brand that I have come to love is Bajio. The company is based in Florida, and according to its website, their company was founded in New Smyrna Beach, Florida, and is against the international profiteers that are trying to destroy the outdoors industry.

    It's worth noting that a vast majority of sunglass companies are under the ownership of a single corporate giant. Bajio, however, is challenging this status quo by charting its unique course. When it comes to quality, Bajio sunglasses can easily hold their own against renowned brands like Oakleys, Costas, or Smiths. 

    Assembled in the USA

    One distinctive feature of Bajio is that their glasses are meticulously assembled in the USA, a testament to their commitment to producing high-quality eyewear. They're not ones to conform to industry norms set by others; instead, they're blazing their own trail.

    These shades are tailor-made for various outdoor pursuits, whether it's fishing in the coastal flats, deep-sea fishing, or simply unwinding while tending to your smoker.

    What's even better is that you have the option to choose between Polycarbonate and glass lenses, each delivering exceptional clarity. This flexibility ensures that you get the eyewear that perfectly suits your needs and preferences.

    What we like:

    • Quality Construction
    • Clarity 
    • Stylish 

    What we don't like

    • Price: Although the price point is similar to other brands in this category, I wish they were a little cheaper. I do understand, though,h that you pay for what you get. 
    • Heavy: although the glass lenses are far superior in clarity and durability, they come with added weight. In my opinion, it is worth the extra weight for the quality of the lenses, though. 

    4. Aerogarden

    The Aerogarden is a standout among my cherished kitchen gadgets. It's hard to categorize it solely as a kitchen gadget because it's so versatile. Mine is placed near my stove, so it is convenient to get herbs from, but you can essentially put it anywhere you like. 

    Aerogarden. This is a picture of the Aerogarden hydroponic indoor herb garden.
    Check Price

    This innovative indoor herb garden is an exceptional gift for the passionate cook. In my opinion, it is one of the finest gifts for cooking enthusiasts, so I had to include this in this list of unique gifts for cooks and foodies!

     If your relative or foodie friend loves cooking with fresh herbs and veggies, the AeroGarden may be the perfect gift for them. With the AeroGarden, they will be able to grow fresh herbs and veggies year-round right on their counter.

    It is Automatic

    The best part is that it is pretty much automatic. It has a built-in LED light, and the water circulates on a schedule, so everything is programmed to take care of itself. The only thing you have to do is add water and more nutrients once every two weeks. The AeroGarden makes a perfect kitchen gift idea for anyone who loves to cook or grow their food!

    Outside view of AeroGarden with parts labeled.
    inside view of water resevoir of the AeroGarden with parts labeled.
    view of indicator lights panel on the front of the Aerogarden.

    What We Like:

    • Easy-no fuss: One of the Easiest ways to add fresh veggies and herbs to your diet.
    • Virtually fool-proof: Anyone can grow an abundance of herbs and veggies in the AeroGarden.
    • Convenient: Grow Herbs year-round right on your counter. You can have it close to your cooking area to have the freshest herbs possible for cooking.

    What We Don’t Like:

    • Overcrowding: Because the plants grow so fast, they can get overcrowded quickly.
    • Maintenance: Although the AeroGarden is easy and foolproof to use, there is ongoing maintenance. When you have to replace the plants, you have to clean the whole system.
    • Price: While they are convenient, easy, and foolproof, they come with a price. They start at $100.00 for the cheapest and go up from there.

    5. Cookbook

    What great cook doesn't love a new cookbook? Cookbooks are a reasonable idea and one of the best gifts you can give. 

    There are so many great cookbook authors out there, and I have created a great list of my favorite Southern cookbooks that I love. One of my favorite cookbooks is Magnolia Table by Joanna Gaines.

    This would make an ideal addition to any collection of cookbooks for home chefs.

    Southern Cook book called Magnolia Table by Joanna Gaines
    Check Price

    If you have not heard of Joanna and Chip Gaines, you must be living under a rock. They became popular because of Joanna’s eye for detail in designing, which led to a super popular TV show called Fixer Upper.

    Joanna Gaines is deeply rooted in her faith and family, which is why she loves to cook so much. According to her Bio, she believes in Home! This cookbook is filled with Southern comfort dishes that are sure to delight your family and give you that truly home-cooked meal they desire. 

    Favorite Recipes:

    • Chicken Pot Pie
    • Chocolate Chip Cookies
    • Fried Chicken

    6. New Set of Pots and Pans

    Most cooks already have a set of pots and pans, but maybe you are buying for a friend or relative who would love a nice quality set of pots and pans. Maybe your loved ones' set of pots and pans has gotten old and needs replacing. 

    All Clad Anodized cookware is on of the great gift ideas for moms on mothers day.
    Check Price

    Having a nice set of pots and pans improves your cooking skills. It will make a good cook into a serious home cook. All-Clad is a quality brand that has been around for a while now. Their products are known by home chefs and professionals alike.

    What we like:

    • Easy to clean: The non-stick coating on these All-Clad pots and pans makes for easy cleanup after cooking.
    • Stacks and Stores Neatly: The way the pans are designed, they nest into each other, which makes them stack and store neatly.
    • Versatile: These pans have a high working temperature, which enables them to go from the stovetop to the oven.

    What we don’t like:

    • No pour spout: While we love the All-Clad pots and pans, we wish they had a pour spout on them to make pouring liquids, sauces, and gravies easier.
    • Can scratch: As with most non-stick pans, they tend to scratch if extra care is not taken.

    7. Hot Sauce

    Hot sauce makes a fantastic Christmas gift because it adds a spicy twist to the holiday season. It offers a unique and flavorful experience for those who enjoy culinary adventures. It's a versatile and thoughtful present that can spice up holiday dishes and delight the taste buds.

    Check Price

    Gator Hammock Hot Sauce is the ultimate Christmas gift for the hot sauce enthusiast in your life. Packed with flavor and a touch of heat, it's the perfect blend of spicy and savory, making it an exceptional addition to any culinary journey.

    This is one of my all-time favorite hot sauces, and it ranks about a 6 on the heat scale from 1 to 10. Gator Hammock Gator Sauce has a very unique flavor that is vastly different from your average sauce. That is why I included it in my unique gifts for cooks and foodies.

    This Christmas, give the gift of flavor that will leave them craving more and spicing up their holiday season in the most delicious way.

    8. Knife Set

    A knife set is a thoughtful and practical Christmas gift that keeps on giving. It's not just a set of kitchen tools; it's the key to culinary creativity. From effortlessly slicing through ingredients to crafting impressive dishes, a quality knife set enhances the joy of cooking.

    Every time they use these precision blades, they will be reminded of your generosity and thoughtfulness. So, this Christmas, give the gift of precision, versatility, and culinary delight with a knife set that elevates every meal and fills their kitchen with festive cheer.

    Check Price

    A good knife set will include a few types of knives: A chef's knife is the first thing they will need in a knife set. This knife is for basic cutting and chopping.  While a top-notch traditional chef's knife is essential, I also have a deep appreciation for the Nakiri, which is a Japanese knife. The Nakiri is great for making thin slices of vegetables. 

    Another type of knife that is useful is a paring knife. A paring knife is great for peeling fruits and vegetables as it is small and fits in your hand well. The last knife I would suggest getting is a bread knife. 

    One brand that I have come to love is Buck Knives The quality and construction are made to last and they are made in Japan, which is known for making quality knives.

    9. Instant Pot

    The Instant Pot is a multi-cooker that can replace several appliances such as a slow cooker, pressure cooker, rice cooker, and more. It is a popular kitchen appliance that has gained a lot of attention in recent years, and it can make a great Christmas gift for several reasons.

    Instant Pot is a great gift idea for mom on Mother's Day.
    Check Price

    One of the big draws to an Instant Pot is how quickly it cooks foods that would normally take a long time to cook or tougher cuts of meat, such as roast beef.

    Making boiled peanuts in my instant pot.
    Making boiled peanuts in my Instant Pot

    What we like:

    • Time-Saving: The Instant Pot replaces many of the kitchen appliances that you would normally use and cooks food a quickly time such as rice, beans, and tougher cuts of meat.
    • Versatility: The Instant Pot can cook a variety of dishes, from soups and stews to rice and pasta.
    • Convenience: The Instant Pot is easy to use and clean, which can be a big selling point for Moms who do not have a lot of time to spend in the kitchen.

    What we don’t like:

    • Learning Curve: While the Instant Pot is easy to use, it has a lot of buttons, and it takes a little getting used to.
    • Bulky: The Instant Pot is available in a range of sizes; the larger models can be bulky and take up a lot of counter space.

    10. Bread Machine

    If you have followed me for any time, you know that I am a big fan of bread machines. I got one for a gift some 13 or 14 years ago and loved it. Bread machines make great gift ideas, but I think many times the bread recipe that comes with it is not very good, so the machine doesn’t get used.

    Cuisinart bread machine
    Check Price

    I know this was the case for me when I first received mine, so I got to looking for a bread recipe that I liked. Once I found one, I tweaked it to my liking, and I came up with this Homemade White Bread in the Bread Machine recipe.

    Since my machine has recently ceased to function, I've decided that this will be the one I choose when I eventually acquire a replacement. From my thorough investigation, it seems like not only an excellent addition for my own needs but also a fantastic gift idea for Christmas!

    What we like:

    • Stainless Steel: I love the fact that it is stainless steel and not plastic like many of the bread machines. I feel like this unit would be very durable.
    • Versatility: Not only can you bake bread, but you can cook other items as well. I love a versatile machine that serves dual purposes.
    • Easy to clean: This unit is easy to clean with the stainless steel exterior and the non-stick bread pan.

    What we don’t like:

    • Bulky: As with many kitchen appliances, they tend to be bulky and take up a lot of counter space.
    • Noise: Most bread machines do make a lot of noise, but it is only when it is mixing.

    11. Coffee

    If your cherished coffee enthusiast is on your Christmas gift list, why not treat them to some exceptional coffee? When selecting coffee, I make it a point to seek out smaller brands that take pride in roasting their beans in small batches.

    Check Price

    In my experience, this approach yields the finest-tasting coffee that stays fresh and maintains its quality for an extended period after opening. Furthermore, I appreciate companies that demonstrate a commitment to causes or values that align with my own.

    A perfect example of such a coffee company that I admire is Fire Department Coffee. Their dedication to quality and community engagement makes them a top choice for the discerning coffee lover.

    12. Coffee Frother

    If your loved one is a coffee connoisseur, they are going to adore this handy kitchen gadget! For someone who enjoys frothy, creamy milk in their coffee, this gadget does the trick and makes it an ideal Christmas gift.

    Zulay coffee frother and mixer.
    Check Price

    Also, a frother can be used for other things as well, such as blending protein powder or making DIY whipped cream. If they love egg omelets, the frother could be used to aerate the eggs for a fluffy omelet. It is the perfect addition to the kitchen. 

    The versatility of this little kitchen gadget is the main reason that I included it in my list of 21 unique Christmas gifts for Cooks and Foodies.

    13. Great Scrape Grill Cleaner

    Are you worried about getting metal bristles in your food from cleaning your grill? Great Scrape has solved that issue for you! This tool, called the Great Scrape, is the ideal gift for your loved one who likes to grill or cook out. 

    Check Price

    There have been a lot of news reports on social media about metal bristles getting into people’s food when they clean their grills with old-fashioned metal bristle brushes. I had the opportunity to review a great product that will take care of this issue for you. It is called the Great Scrape.

    I use this every time I use my gas grill. The one I have, I have had since 2016, and it has held up great.

     The great scrape is a wooden board with a wooden handle. The basis of how this works is that you get your grill very hot and burn grooves into the flat front of the wooden paddle. Then each time you are ready to use the grill, you slide the paddle up and down the grill grates and the grooves clean themselves for you. It works great! One note, make sure you wear oven mittens when burning it in, as the grill will be very hot. 

    14. Kitchen Aid Stand mixer

    No kitchen is complete without a Kitchen Aid Stand mixer.  There are so many useful things you can do with a stand mixer, the sky is the limit. 

    The KitchenAid stand mixer is the quintessential kitchen workhorse, combining versatility, power, and timeless style. With a robust motor and a range of attachments, it effortlessly handles tasks from mixing and kneading to whipping and blending.

    Check Price

    Its iconic design is not just about aesthetics but also a symbol of quality and durability. Perfect for both novice bakers and seasoned chefs, the KitchenAid stand mixer is a culinary companion that brings precision, consistency, and efficiency to every kitchen, elevating the joy of cooking and baking.

    A KitchenAid stand mixer is a fantastic gift idea for several reasons:

    1. Versatility: It's an incredibly versatile kitchen appliance, capable of performing various tasks, from mixing and kneading dough to whipping cream and much more. This versatility makes it a valuable addition to any kitchen.
    2. Time-Saver: A stand mixer saves a significant amount of time and effort when compared to manual mixing and kneading. This means less strenuous work in the kitchen, allowing the recipient to enjoy cooking and baking without the laborious hand mixing.
    3. Consistency: Stand mixers ensure consistent results, which is essential for achieving precise baking and cooking outcomes. Whether it's cookies, bread, or cakes, the mixer guarantees uniform mixing and texture.
    4. Quality Construction: KitchenAid is known for its durable and high-quality construction. A stand mixer is built to last, which means it's a long-term investment in the recipient's culinary adventures.
    5. Attachment Options: KitchenAid offers a wide range of attachments, allowing the stand mixer to be used for even more tasks like pasta making, meat grinding, and more. This adaptability enhances the mixer's utility in the kitchen.
    6. Stylish Design: KitchenAid mixers come in a variety of colors and designs, making them a stylish addition to any kitchen decor.
    7. Gift-Worthy: The KitchenAid stand mixer is a popular and sought-after kitchen appliance, making it an impressive and thoughtful gift for anyone who loves cooking and baking.

    15. Can Cooker

    The Can Cooker is another one of my favorite or unique gifts for cooks and foodies who love the outdoors and love to cook. 

    Check Price

    The CanCooker is a unique and innovative cooking device designed for unconventionally preparing meals. It's essentially a cylindrical, portable, and lightweight cooking vessel that resembles a can. The CanCooker uses steam to cook food, making it an ideal choice for outdoor cooking, camping, and other adventurous culinary experiences.

    Here's how it works:

    1. Steam Cooking: The CanCooker relies on steam to cook food. It operates on the principle of convection, with a vented lid that allows steam to circulate and cook the contents.
    2. Versatility: You can use the CanCooker to prepare a wide range of dishes, from traditional stews and soups to seafood, vegetables, and even desserts. It's known for its ability to cook large quantities of food quickly.
    3. Efficiency: One of the key benefits of the CanCooker is its speed. It can cook a complete meal in a fraction of the time it would take with traditional cooking methods.
    4. Portability: The CanCooker is designed for portability, making it a great option for outdoor enthusiasts, campers, and those who enjoy cooking on the go.
    5. Ease of Use: It's user-friendly, requiring minimal effort and attention during the cooking process.

    The CanCooker is often used for cooking in the great outdoors, but it can also find a place in home kitchens. It's a unique and efficient way to prepare delicious, well-cooked meals, and it's particularly appreciated by those who value simplicity and speed in their cooking endeavors.

    16. Bison Coolers

    Like many of the gifts on this list, you've probably noticed that I'm an avid outdoor enthusiast who relishes the art of outdoor cooking whenever the opportunity arises. In the great outdoors, one indispensable item you absolutely must have is a reliable cooler to keep your food and beverages chilled while enduring extended journeys. 

    Check Price

    Necessity

    Owning a high-quality cooler is more than just a practicality; it's a necessity. Though they may seem a bit pricey, they're a wise investment that far outlasts their cheaper counterparts, ensuring that your ice stays frozen and your provisions stay fresh throughout your outdoor adventures.

    Bison Coolers are the ultimate companions for outdoor enthusiasts and adventurers. Crafted for rugged durability, these coolers are designed to withstand the toughest conditions, keeping your contents perfectly chilled or hot for extended periods. 

    Quality

    With a commitment to quality and eco-friendly practices, Bison offers a range of sizes to cater to various needs, making these coolers the go-to choice for camping, picnicking, tailgating, and more. When you choose Bison, you're choosing a cooler that's built to last, with the strength to keep your adventures cool and refreshing.

    Choosing a Bison cooler as a Christmas gift for someone is a thoughtful and practical choice for several compelling reasons:

    1. Durability: Bison coolers are known for their rugged construction, designed to withstand the toughest outdoor conditions. They are built to last, making them a long-term investment.
    2. Insulation: These coolers offer exceptional insulation, which means they can keep contents cold (or hot) for an extended period. This is ideal for outdoor adventures, picnics, camping trips, and more.
    3. Versatility: Bison coolers can be used for various purposes, from storing beverages and perishable items to keeping food fresh during outdoor activities.
    4. Quality Materials: Bison coolers are made from high-quality materials, ensuring they are resistant to wear and tear and capable of enduring rough handling.
    5. Eco-Friendly: Bison is committed to sustainability and environmental responsibility, making it a conscientious choice for those who care about the environment.
    6. Range of Sizes: Bison offers coolers in various sizes to suit different needs, from small, portable options to larger models for extended trips.
    7. Gift-Worthy: Bison coolers are a thoughtful and practical gift for anyone who enjoys outdoor adventures, tailgating, or simply appreciates well-designed and reliable gear.

    17. Hitch Fire Portable Grills

    For those who crave unique gifts, Hitch Fire grills offer a one-of-a-kind outdoor cooking experience. The cool thing about Hitch Fire is it slides into your receiver hitch on your vehicle, making it portable but also functional. It is a great way to carry your grill with you when you are camping, tailgating, or on the go. It is the perfect gift for those who love being on the go but also want to cook. 

    Check Price

    On-the-go cooking

    Hitch Fire portable grills are the perfect solution for taking your love of grilling on the go. Designed for outdoor enthusiasts and adventure seekers, these innovative grills attach to your vehicle's hitch receiver, allowing you to grill wherever your journey takes you. 

    With a focus on quality, convenience, and durability, Hitch Fire grills are built to withstand the rigors of the open road while providing a reliable and enjoyable grilling experience. Whether you're tailgating, camping, or simply exploring the great outdoors, Hitch Fire portable grills are your ticket to savoring delicious grilled meals wherever you roam.

    Hitch Fire grills take cooking outdoors to the next level, it is one of the most unique gifts for cooks who love the outdoors.

    18. Black Stone Grill

    The Blackstone grill is your gateway to a world of outdoor culinary possibilities. With its versatile design and ample cooking surface, it's the perfect tool for grilling, frying, and preparing a variety of delectable dishes.

    Check Price

    Built to last and user-friendly, this grill is tailor-made for outdoor enthusiasts and those who love to cook and entertain in the open air. 

    Cooking breakfast will never be the same

    Your loved one will want to cook breakfast all the time if you buy them a Blackstone grill. They are fun to cook on and very versatile. From pancakes to smash burgers to pork chops, it is truly a great Christmas gift option. 

    The Blackstone grill makes an outstanding Christmas gift for several compelling reasons:

    1. Versatility: It's a versatile cooking appliance that allows for grilling, frying, and cooking a variety of foods, from burgers and steaks to breakfast items like pancakes and eggs.
    2. Outdoor Cooking: The Blackstone grill is designed for outdoor use, making it an ideal addition for those who love to cook and entertain outdoors, whether it's in the backyard, at the campsite, or during tailgating events.
    3. Large Cooking Surface: Blackstone grills come in various sizes, with ample cooking surfaces to accommodate a range of dishes and larger quantities, making it perfect for gatherings and family get-togethers.
    4. Durability: They are built to last, with sturdy construction and materials that can withstand the elements.
    5. User-Friendly: Blackstone grills are designed for easy use, making outdoor cooking accessible for individuals of all skill levels.
    6. Flavorful Results: The open-grate design and propane heat source result in a unique cooking experience that imparts a delicious, smoky flavor to food.
    7. Gift-Worthy: A Blackstone grill is a thoughtful and practical gift for anyone who enjoys outdoor cooking, grilling, and creating delicious meals for family and friends.

    Blackstone grills are favored by outdoor cooking enthusiasts, campers, tailgaters, and anyone who enjoys preparing meals in an outdoor setting. They offer a unique and flavorful cooking experience, making them a popular choice for those who value the taste of grilled or griddled dishes prepared in the great outdoors.

    19. Solo Stove

    ​The Solo Stove is a remarkable piece of outdoor equipment designed for outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers. Its innovative design is centered around efficient wood-burning, allowing you to enjoy a cozy, smokeless fire while minimizing the environmental impact. 

    Check Price

    Quality counts

    Crafted from high-quality stainless steel, Solo Stoves are built to last and endure the elements. With a compact and portable design, they're perfect for backpacking, camping, or simply enhancing your outdoor experience. Whether you're roasting marshmallows with friends or enjoying a peaceful evening under the stars, a Solo Stove adds warmth, ambiance, and an eco-friendly touch to your outdoor adventures.

    The Solo Stove makes an excellent Christmas gift for a foodie or someone who enjoys cooking, and here's why:

    1. Versatile Cooking: While known for its efficient wood-burning capabilities for creating a warm and inviting campfire, the Solo Stove also serves as an outdoor cooking tool. It allows for roasting marshmallows, grilling, and even pot cooking, giving the recipient the chance to cook and enjoy delicious meals outdoors.
    2. Smokeless Design: The Solo Stove's unique design minimizes smoke production, making it a pleasant and hassle-free experience for cooking and enjoying the outdoors.
    3. Quality Materials: It's built from high-quality stainless steel, ensuring durability and longevity, so the gift will be appreciated for many years to come.
    4. Portability: The compact and lightweight design of the Solo Stove allows for easy transportation, making it a perfect addition to camping trips, picnics, or other outdoor cooking adventures.
    5. Connection to Nature: The Solo Stove provides a direct connection to nature and the great outdoors, which can be particularly appealing to those who have a passion for cooking and savoring food in natural settings.
    6. Memorable Experiences: It not only provides a means for cooking but also offers the opportunity to create memorable experiences, such as open-air dining, cooking over a crackling fire, and enjoying the ambiance of the great outdoors.
    7. Eco-Friendly: The Solo Stove's wood-burning feature aligns with sustainable and eco-friendly principles, which can resonate with those who value environmentally conscious practices.

    20. Le Creuset Dutch Oven

    The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is a culinary icon, renowned for its superior craftsmanship and vibrant enamel finishes. Crafted with precision, this versatile cookware is perfect for simmering, roasting, baking, and more. 

    Check Price

    Heat retention and durability

    Its exceptional heat retention ensures even cooking, while the timeless design adds a touch of elegance to any kitchen. A Le Creuset Dutch Oven is not just a cooking vessel; it's a symbol of culinary excellence and a treasured heirloom for generations to come.

    The enamel coating allows for easy cleaning versus that of a traditional cast-iron Dutch oven. 

    Heirloom quality

    Whenever the opportunity arises to give the gift of cast iron cookware, seize it. Cast iron's durability allows it to be passed down through the ages, a quality that sets it apart from Teflon cookware.

    In addition, it's noteworthy that both professional chefs and home cooks across the globe rely on the same Dutch oven, making it a truly exceptional and timeless culinary essential.

    The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is an outstanding Christmas gift for serious home cooks for several compelling reasons:

    1. Exceptional Quality: Le Creuset is renowned for its top-tier craftsmanship and durable materials, making it a kitchen investment that will last for years.
    2. Versatility: This Dutch Oven is incredibly versatile, capable of handling a wide range of cooking techniques, from braising and roasting to simmering and baking. Serious home cooks will appreciate its adaptability.
    3. Even Cooking: It's excellent heat retention and even heat distribution ensure consistent cooking results, ideal for creating complex, flavorful dishes.
    4. Timeless Design: The Dutch Oven's elegant design and vibrant enamel finishes add a touch of sophistication to any kitchen. It's not just a practical tool; it's a statement piece.
    5. Culinary Exploration: For serious home cooks, this kitchen workhorse encourages culinary exploration, allowing them to master a variety of recipes and techniques.
    6. Heritage and Tradition: Le Creuset Dutch Ovens are often passed down through generations, making them a cherished family heirloom that symbolizes culinary passion and tradition.
    7. Gift-Worthy: The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is a highly desirable kitchen item, and receiving it as a gift is sure to be a joyous and treasured moment for any serious home cook.

    21. Amazon Prime

    When thinking about great gift ideas, Amazon Prime is one that comes to mind. What I like about this idea is that your loved one can use the Prime membership to purchase items they like and get free Prime shipping. 

    Amazon Prime is a subscription service offered by Amazon, one of the world's largest online retailers. It provides members with various benefits and features designed to enhance their shopping and entertainment experiences. 

    Check Price

    Some of the key features of Amazon Prime include:

    1. Free Two-Day Shipping: Prime members have access to free, expedited shipping on eligible items, with delivery in as little as two days in many areas.
    2. Amazon Prime Video: Subscribers can stream a vast library of movies, TV shows, and original content through Amazon Prime Video.
    3. Amazon Prime Music: This feature offers access to a diverse catalog of music for streaming and offline listening.
    4. Amazon Prime Reading: Members can borrow eBooks, magazines, and more from the Prime Reading library at no extra cost.
    5. Amazon First Reads: Subscribers have early access to new book releases and exclusive deals on Kindle eBooks.
    6. Twitch Prime: Gamers can enjoy free in-game loot, monthly channel subscriptions, and other gaming-related perks on Twitch, Amazon's gaming platform.
    7. Amazon Family: Prime members can access family-oriented features, such as family discounts, baby registry benefits, and more.
    8. Amazon Photos: Prime members receive secure and unlimited photo storage, along with 5 GB of additional file storage.
    9. Prime Wardrobe: This feature allows customers to try on clothing and accessories before purchasing them.
    10. Early Access to Deals: Prime members get early access to Amazon's lightning deals and exclusive discounts.

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, finding the perfect Christmas gift for the cooks and foodies in your life just got a whole lot easier. This list of 21 unique and thoughtful gift ideas has something for every culinary enthusiast, from cutting-edge kitchen gadgets to Sunglasses and tools that elevate their cooking experience. 

    Whether you choose a beautifully crafted Dutch oven, a high-quality chef's knife, or a Prime subscription, your gift will not only delight their taste buds but also show that you've put thought and care into your selection. This holiday season, let your gift be a source of inspiration for their culinary adventures, making their time in the kitchen even more enjoyable and memorable. From our kitchen to yours, we wish you a joyful and flavorful holiday season. Happy cooking and happy gifting!

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    Step-By-Step Dehydrating Fresh Figs at Home (Easy How To)

    by Leave a Comment

    Dehydrating fresh figs at home is a delightful and practical way to preserve the sweet and succulent flavors of this seasonal fruit for year-round enjoyment. Whether you have an abundance of fresh figs from your garden or simply wish to savor their unique taste long after the fig season, the process of dehydrating figs is surprisingly simple and rewarding. 

    In this step-by-step guide, we will walk you through the process of transforming plump, ripe figs into a delicious, shelf-stable snack that can be used in various culinary creations. By the end of this tutorial, you'll have a batch of dehydrated figs ready to add a burst of natural sweetness to your dishes, making them an excellent addition to your pantry.

    So, gather your fresh figs, and let's embark on this journey of turning this exquisite fruit into a delightful, preserved treat.

    What is Dehydrating?

    Before we can look at dehydrating figs, we must first look at why we dehydrate foods and what dehydrating is in the first place. Dehydrating is a drying process that takes the moisture out of the food. The reason you may wish to dehydrate foods such as fruits or meats is to preserve them for eating later on.

    Dehydrating foods is one of the oldest forms of food preservation. The history of dehydrating foods dates back thousands of years and has been an important method of food preservation across various cultures. Back then, ancient civilizations would dry food in direct sunlight to remove the moisture so food would last. It was an important part of living. Fast forward to modern times, people still love dehydrating food to preserve it. 

    Here are a few more reasons why you may want to dehydrate food:

    1. Prolonged Shelf Life: Dehydrating food reduces the water content, which inhibits the growth of bacteria, yeasts, and molds that cause spoilage. This allows food to be stored for an extended period without refrigeration.
    2. Reduced Weight and Volume: Removing moisture significantly reduces the weight and volume of the food, making it more convenient for storage and transportation, especially for hikers, campers, and those in emergency preparedness situations.
    3. Reduced Food Waste: Dehydration is an excellent way to preserve surplus or excess produce when fruits and vegetables are in season. It prevents them from going to waste and allows you to enjoy them throughout the year.
    4. Nutrient Retention: When done properly, dehydrating food can retain a majority of its nutritional value, including vitamins and minerals. While some nutrients may be lost in the process, it's often a more nutrient-dense option compared to other preservation methods.
    5. Convenience: Dehydrated foods are lightweight and portable, making them convenient for outdoor activities like camping, hiking, and backpacking. They require minimal preparation and cooking, as rehydration can be as simple as adding hot water.
    6. Improved Flavor: Dehydration can concentrate the flavors of food, resulting in an intense and sometimes sweeter taste.
    7. Homemade Snacks: Dehydrating allows you to create your own healthy, preservative-free snacks like fruit chips, jerky, or dried herbs.
    8. Emergency Preparedness: Dehydrated food is a staple in emergency preparedness kits as it can provide a source of nutrition during disasters or when access to fresh food is limited.

    Common foods that are often dehydrated include fruits, vegetables, herbs, meats (for jerky), and even cooked grains or pasta. Dehydrating food can be done using various methods, including air drying, sun drying, oven drying, or using specialized food dehydrators.

    Figs Are A Perfect Fruit to Dehydrate

    One of the downfalls of figs is it is a delicate fruit, and lacks good shelf stability. This is why you seldom find them on grocery store shelves; they simply don't withstand shipping and storage. 

    Consequently, dehydrating figs emerges as the ideal solution. By dehydrating these fruits, you not only increase their longevity but also secure a supply for future use, particularly during bumper harvests.

    Growing up in the South, there are many common fruits and veggies you see around a homestead.

    We moved to the place that I called home for 26 years when I was 4 years old. As stated in my Muscadine Jelly Recipe, a few things were present when we showed up. One of those things was a muscadine trellis with a huge vine and also a couple of fig trees.

    My backyard orchard at my house | Fig Tree in the Foreground

    I loved going out there to pick fresh figs from the tree and eat them. But you can only eat so many fresh figs before they start to get overripe.

    If you own fig trees, you're likely familiar with the annual abundance of ripe figs. Fig season is short-lived and a bunch seem to ripen all at once. So they make the perfect fruit to dehydrate for future use.

    Best Variety of Figs to Use

    When it comes to dehydrating figs, some fig varieties are better suited than others due to their flavor, texture, and overall characteristics. Here are a few fig varieties that are considered excellent for dehydrating:

    1. Black Mission Figs: Black Mission figs are one of the most popular fig varieties for drying. They have a sweet and rich flavor, and their dark skin adds a beautiful color to the dried figs.
    2. Calimyrna Figs: Calimyrna figs, also known as Turkish figs, are another excellent choice for drying. They have a nutty and slightly honeyed flavor that intensifies during the drying process.
    3. Brown Turkey Figs: Brown Turkey figs are a versatile fig variety and are good for both fresh consumption and drying. They have a sweet and mild flavor.
    4. Adriatic Figs: Adriatic figs, also known as White Kadota figs, have a honey-like sweetness. They dry well and maintain a delicate flavor.
    5. Kadota Figs: Kadota figs are another variety with honey-like sweetness and make excellent dried figs.
    6. Texas Everbearing Figs: These figs are known for their exceptional sweetness, which is enhanced during the drying process. They are particularly well-suited for making dried figs.
    Brown Turkey Fig from my backyard orchard

    When selecting figs for drying, it's essential to choose ripe figs that are not overly mushy. Ripe figs are sweeter and more flavorful, which will result in better-tasting dried figs.

    Dehydrated Figs

    Experiment with these ideas to find the best ways to incorporate dehydrated figs into your favorite dishes and discover new flavor combinations.

    How To Dry Figs in a Dehydrator

    Before we begin, you will need a few tools and ingredients. The most important tool is a dehydrator. You can use an oven, but a dehydrator works best for this method.

    What You Need To Dehydrate Figs

    Ingredients:

    • Fresh Whole Figs

    Equipment Needed to Make Dehydrated Figs:

    • Knife
    • Large Pot
    • Wire Strainer
    • Glass Jars or Airtight container
    • Tea Cloth
    • Parchment Paper
    • Food Dehydrator: See Below for more information 

    Note: To see a created list of items and brands we recommend for canning and preserving, check out our dedicated page here.

    Food Dehydrator Information

    There are many dehydrators on the market from the very basic to commercial units. A basic one will do but the issue with them is they are hard to control the temperature and time. The more fancier dehydrators have more bells and whistles that help make this job easier.

    The very basic dehydrator heats from the bottom as the more expensive ones heat from the back. This method tends to provide more even heat distribution. If the unit heats from the bottom, the trays closest to the bottom will dehydrate faster so it is important to rotate your trays every few hours if that is the type you have. 

    Lem Dehydrator | Middle of the road in features

    Also, the more expensive units have temperature control and this is important if you plan to use the dehydrator for other foods such as meat which requires a higher temperature than fruit or herbs.

    The last thing to consider is time. The more expensive units can be set to run a certain time, after that they cut off. This is a nice feature to have to keep from over-dehydrating your food.

    Here are my recommendations for a dehydrator from least expensive to most:

    • Basic dehydrator: This unit heats from the bottom but does have an adjustable heat setting. It does not have a timer setting. 
    • Middle-of-the-road dehydrator: This is the unit that I use at the moment. This unit has digital control for heat and has a time setting. The downside is it heats from the bottom. 
    • Dehydrator with bells and whistles: This is the Excalibur Dehydrator and the one that I would personally buy if I were to buy a new one. They are highly recommended, heat from the back, have stainless steel trays with small holes in them, digital temp setting, and timer control. They are also highly recommended amounts for most homesteaders and people who preserve food.

    Washing and Inspecting:

    Check the figs to make sure there are no bugs, bad spots, or brown spots. Also, do not use any that are overripe. Only select the best quality fruit for dehydrating. Make sure to handle the figs carefully so you do not bruise them. 

    Washed and dried figs

    Also, there is a bug called a fig wasp that likes to bore into figs in some areas. The fig wasps are not in all areas so check your area to see if this applies to you.

    Once you have checked your fruit over, the next thing to do is to wash the figs. If this applies to you make sure to look them over good for holes in the fruit. 

    Blanching Figs:

    The next thing we are going to do is to water-blanch the figs. According to the Complete Dehydrator Cookbook, This is a pretreatment method that is also called "checking" or "Crazing" and will create fine, microscopic cracks in the skin of the figs. This helps the fruit to dry more evenly. To do this, take a large pot of water and bring it to a boil. Dip the fruit in the boiling water using a wire strainer for 30 seconds and quickly remove them. Dry them off with a paper towel or tea cloth.

    Preparation:

    Now that the figs have been blanched the next thing to do is prepare them. If the figs are small, they can be dehydrated whole, but if they are medium to large, you will want to cut them. Remove the stem, even from the whole figs. Cut the medium to large size ones in half or quarter them. 

    This is a picture of me removing Stems from fresh figs in order to prepare them for dehydrating.
    Remove Stems
    This is a picture of me using a sharp knife to cut the figs in half in order to prepare the figs to dehydrate.
    Cut fresh figs in half
    This is a picture of a closer view of me cutting the fresh figs in half.
    Close view of cutting in half.

    Dehydrating Figs:

    Place figs on the dehydrator trays and arrange them in a single layer. If you have trays with large holes, you can use parchment paper to line the trays.  

    Put the wire rack or plastic trays into the dehydrator and set the temperature to 125 to 135 degrees Fahrenheit. 

    Drying Time:

    Drying time will vary from 8 hours to 24 hours. You are looking for a product that is firm and has a slightly chewy texture. You should be able to bend the fruit without it cracking or breaking and it shouldn't be sticky.  Larger fruit takes a longer time to dry. 

    This is a picture of dehydrated figs. This is what the figs should look like when they are done.

    Many factors can affect the drying time such as the room temperature of the area, humidity in the area, etc. 

    How to Store Dehydrated Figs

    Use an airtight container that is clear such as a quart-size glass jar with a lid such as a mason or ball jar. You may also use a clear plastic food storage container. Store the figs in an airtight container in a cool dry place. It is also best to store them in a dark place out of direct sunlight. 

    This is a picture of storing figs. I am placing the figs in a ziplock bag.
    Placing dried figs in a clear ziplock bag


    Conditioning Dehydrated Figs

    During the initial week of fig storage, it's crucial to undertake a conditioning phase. This entails daily stirring or gently shaking the container to redistribute the figs. The purpose of this practice is to facilitate moisture equalization among the figs.

    Occasionally, one fig may contain slightly more moisture than another. By periodically mixing them within the container, moisture redistributes, gradually achieving equilibrium. This essential step plays a key role in preventing the onset of mold and the proliferation of harmful bacteria, ensuring the figs remain in optimal condition.

    If you happen to notice any moisture on the inside of the container, you will want to remove the figs and continue to dehydrate the batch. 

    Ways to use Dried Figs

    Dehydrated figs are a versatile ingredient that can be used in a variety of culinary applications. They have a sweet and concentrated flavor, making them a great addition to both sweet and savory dishes.

    Here are some ways to use dehydrated figs:

    1. Snacking: Dehydrated figs make for a delicious and nutritious snack on their own. Simply eat them as a healthy alternative to candy or other sugary treats.
    2. Rehydrate and Use in Baking: You can rehydrate dehydrated figs by soaking them in warm water or fruit juice for about 30 minutes. Once they are plump and soft, use them in baking recipes such as fig muffins, fig cakes, fig cookies, or fig bread.
    3. Trail Mix: Combine dehydrated figs with nuts, seeds, and other dried fruits to create your customized trail mix. It's a great energy-boosting snack for hiking or on-the-go.
    4. Breakfast: Chop or slice dehydrated figs and add them to your morning oatmeal, yogurt, or cereal for a sweet and fruity twist.
    5. Salads: Rehydrated and chopped figs can be added to salads for a sweet contrast. They pair well with greens, nuts, cheese, and vinaigrette dressings.
    6. Cheese Platter: Dehydrated figs are a popular addition to cheese platters. They complement a variety of cheeses, including goat cheese, blue cheese, and brie.
    7. Compotes and Chutneys: Simmer dehydrated figs with water, sugar, and spices to create a fig compote or chutney. These can be used as condiments for meats, cheese, or as a spread.
    8. Smoothies: Add a few dehydrated figs to your smoothie for a natural sweetness and flavor boost. They work well with ingredients like yogurt, bananas, and spinach.
    9. Stuffing: Chopped or rehydrated figs can be used as part of a stuffing for poultry, like chicken or turkey, or in vegetarian stuffed peppers.
    10. Marinades and Glazes: Blend rehydrated figs with other ingredients to create a flavorful marinade or glaze for meat or vegetables. This is especially delicious for roasted or grilled dishes.
    11. Fig Bars: Make homemade fig bars by blending rehydrated figs and spreading the mixture between layers of pastry or oat-based dough. Bake until golden brown.
    12. Fig Jam or Spread: Simmer dehydrated figs with sugar, lemon juice, and a little water to create your fig jam or spread. Enjoy it on toast, in sandwiches, or as a condiment for various dishes.
    13. Desserts: Incorporate dehydrated figs into desserts like rice pudding, panna cotta, or ice cream for a sweet, fruity addition.
    14. Energy Bars: Make homemade energy bars by blending rehydrated figs with nuts, seeds, and other healthy ingredients. Press the mixture into a pan, chill, and cut into bars.

    Happy Dehydrating

    Let me know how these Dehydrated figs turn out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you!

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    Step-By-Step Dehydrating Fresh Figs at Home (Easy How To)

    Dehydrating figs. This is a picture showing what figs look like after they have been dehydrated.

    Dehydrating fresh figs at home is a delightful and practical way to preserve the sweet and succulent flavors of this seasonal fruit for year-round enjoyment. Whether you have an abundance of fresh figs from your garden or simply wish to savor their unique taste long after the harvest season, the process of dehydrating figs is surprisingly simple and rewarding. 

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Active Time 8 hours
    Total Time 8 hours 10 minutes

    Instructions

    Washing and Inspecting

    Check the figs to make sure there are no bugs, bad spots, or brown spots. Also, do not use any that are overripe. Only select the best quality fruit for dehydrating. Make sure to handle the figs carefully so you do not bruise them. 

    Also, there is a bug called a fig wasp that likes to bore into figs in some areas. The fig wasps are not in all areas so check your area to see if this applies to you. Once you have checked your fruit over, the next thing to do is to wash the figs. If this applies to you make sure to look them over good for holes in the fruit. 

    Blanching

    The next thing we are going to do is to water-blanch the figs. According to the Complete Dehydrator Cookbook, This is a pretreatment method that is also called "checking" or "Crazing" and will create fine, microscopic cracks in the skin of the figs. This helps the fruit to dry more evenly. To do this, take a large pot of water and bring it to a boil. Dip the fruit in the boiling water using a wire strainer for 30 seconds and quickly remove them. Dry them off with a paper towel or tea cloth.

    Preparation

    Now that the figs have been blanched the next thing to do is prepare them. If the figs are small, they can be dehydrated whole, but if they are medium to large, you will want to cut them. Remove the stem, even from the whole figs. Cut the medium to large size ones in half or quarter them.

    Dehydrate

    Place figs on the dehydrator trays and arrange them in a single layer. If you have trays with large holes, you can use parchment paper to line the trays.  Put the wire rack or plastic trays into the dehydrator and set the temperature to 125 to 135 degrees Fahrenheit. 

    Drying time

    Drying time will vary from 8 hours to 24 hours. You are looking for a product that is firm and has a slightly chewy texture. You should be able to bend the fruit without it cracking or breaking and it shouldn't be sticky.  Larger fruit takes a longer time to dry. 

    There are many factors that can affect the drying time such as the room temperature of the area, humidity in the area, etc. 

    Storing and Conditioning

    Use an airtight container that is clear such as a quart-size glass jar with a lid such as a mason or ball jar. You may also use a clear plastic food storage container. Store the figs in an airtight container in a cool dry place. It is also best to store them in a dark place out of direct sunlight. 

    During the initial week of fig storage, it's crucial to undertake a conditioning phase. This entails daily stirring or gently shaking the container to redistribute the figs. The purpose of this practice is to facilitate moisture equalization among the figs.

    Occasionally, one fig may contain slightly more moisture than another. By periodically mixing them within the container, moisture redistributes, gradually achieving equilibrium. This essential step plays a key role in preventing the onset of mold and the proliferation of harmful bacteria, ensuring the figs remain in optimal condition.

    If you happen to notice any moisture on the inside of the container, you will want to remove the figs and continue to dehydrate the batch. 

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Category: Preserving

    Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples Recipe

    by 4 Comments

    Are you craving a simple yet irresistible dessert or side dish that embodies the cozy flavors of fall? Look no further than our Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples Recipe.

    This delightful recipe takes humble apples to a whole new level of deliciousness. With just a handful of readily available but simple ingredients, you can transform ordinary apples into a warm, aromatic, and comforting treat that's perfect for any occasion.

    Easy Baked Cinnamon Sugar Apples.

    The combination of sweet, tender apples, fragrant cinnamon, and caramelized sugar creates a symphony of flavors that will fill your kitchen with an inviting aroma. It will be hard to resist taking a bite straight from the oven.

    Whether you're looking for a side dish or a quick dessert to satisfy your sweet tooth or planning a cozy gathering with loved ones, this recipe is a surefire winner. So, let's roll up our sleeves and embark on a journey to bake the tastiest Easy Baked Cinnamon and sugar Apples you've ever had.

    Baked Cinnamon Apples vs. Fried Apples

    You may be wondering, what is the difference between baked cinnamon apples and fried apples? The simple answer is how they are cooked.

    Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples and Southern Fried Apples are both incredibly straightforward and uncomplicated recipes. While this particular recipe focuses on the baked version, you also have the option of preparing Southern Fried Apples in a skillet. Both methods are refreshingly simple to execute. 

    Backed Cinnamon Sugar Apples.

    In my personal experience, the flavor profile remains quite similar in both cases. However, opting for baking is the easier choice as it demands less time spent tending to the stove, allowing you to enjoy these delightful treats with minimal fuss.

    Side dish or dessert?

    You may ask yourself, is this recipe a side dish or dessert? Well, I am here to confuse you even more. If you are not aware, many dishes in the South are labeled as side dishes or (vegetables) that may not be considered in other parts of the United States. For instance, this Old Fashioned Southern Sweet potatoes Casserole is sometimes served as a side dish. 

    Yam Casserole on a serving spoon.
    Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole

    If you ever go to a diner or Southern-style restaurant that serves country cooking and what we call a "meat and three" type of restaurant, many of the side dishes are labeled as vegetables that are not vegetables, such as Southern Mac and Cheese or corn pudding. Cracker Barrel would be a prime example of this, they serve fried apples as a side dish rather than dessert. 

    If you want to find more awesome desserts, check out our dessert recipes here.

    Fun for the whole family

    Exploring an apple orchard located near apple-growing regions can be a delightful adventure for the entire family. Whether you opt for a day trip or extend it into a weekend getaway, apple picking offers an opportunity to not only enjoy the outdoors but also to educate children about the origins of their food.

    Photo Credit | Canva.com

    It's a hands-on experience that takes them from the bountiful fields to the kitchen table, connecting them with the journey of food from orchard to plate.

    Why you will love this recipe

    People are likely to love a Baked Cinnamon apple recipe for several compelling reasons:

    1. Delightful Aroma: The combination of apples, cinnamon, and sugar creates an irresistible aroma that fills the kitchen and triggers feelings of comfort and nostalgia.
    2. Warm and Cozy: Baked cinnamon apples are the epitome of warm, comforting, and cozy desserts, making them perfect for the fall and winter seasons.
    3. Ease of Preparation: This recipe is incredibly easy to make, requiring only a few basic ingredients and minimal effort. It's accessible to both novice and experienced cooks.
    4. Minimal Ingredients: With just apples, cinnamon, sugar, and optionally some butter and lemon juice, this recipe relies on simple pantry staples.
    5. Versatility: Baked cinnamon apples can be enjoyed in various ways. They can be served as a side dish or a standalone dessert. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream or use it as a topping for pancakes, waffles, french toast, oatmeal, or yogurt. It also makes a great topping for pork chops. 
    6. Natural Sweetness: The natural sweetness of the apples, enhanced by the cinnamon and sugar, provides a healthier alternative to overly processed desserts.

    In summary, people are likely to love the Baked Cinnamon Apples recipe for its simplicity, comforting qualities, delightful flavors, and versatility, making it a beloved dessert for various occasions.

    Easy baked cinnamon and sugar apples overhead view.


    Apple Variety

    One of the most important decisions when making this recipe is the apple variety you will use.

    The best apples for baking are those that maintain their texture, flavor, and sweetness when cooked. Here are some of the best apples for baking:

    1. Granny Smith: These green apples are known for their tartness and firm texture, which holds up well in baking. They add a nice contrast to sweet desserts.
    2. Honeycrisp: Honeycrisp apples are sweet and juicy, making them a popular choice for baking. They maintain their shape and add a pleasant sweetness to baked goods.
    3. Jonagold: Jonagold apples are a hybrid of Jonathan and Golden Delicious apples. They have a sweet-tart flavor and hold their shape when baked, making them excellent for pies and crisps.
    4. Braeburn: Braeburn apples have a balanced sweet-tart flavor and a firm texture, making them suitable for various baked goods like pies, tarts, and crisps.
    5. Fuji: Fuji apples are sweet and crisp, making them a great choice for baking. They add a pleasant sweetness to desserts without becoming overly mushy.
    6. Cortland: Cortland apples have a sweet-tart flavor and are slow to brown when sliced, making them ideal for apple slices in pies and other baked treats.
    7. Pink Lady: Pink Lady apples are sweet and slightly tart with a firm texture. They hold their shape well in baking and add a nice flavor to pies and crisps.
    8. Gala: While Gala apples are primarily known as eating apples, they can also be used in baking when you want a sweeter flavor profile. They work well in apple cakes and muffins.
    Remember that the best apples for baking can vary depending on personal preference and the specific dish you're making. Mixing different apple varieties can also create a unique flavor and texture in your baked goods. Experimentation is encouraged to find the perfect apple for your favorite recipes.

    How to Make Easy Baked Cinnamon & Sugar Apples Recipe

    The list of ingredients used is very simple and most people would have them on hand except for the apples. Apples can be bought year round in most cases but they are best when apple season is in which is the fall season in the US.

    Ingredients

    • Apples: The best apples for baking are those that maintain their texture, flavor, and sweetness when cooked.
    • Cinnamon: Cinnamon is a key ingredient and adds warmth to this dish as well as an aromatic fragrance.
    • Sugar: Brown sugar is a type of sugar characterized by its brown color and unique flavor. This is distinct from the simple sweetness of white sugar. It is made from white granulated sugar combined with varying amounts of molasses. Maple syrup, honey, or agave nectar may be substituted for a more natural approach.
    • Butter: Butter adds a rich, creamy, and slightly nutty flavor to the baked apples. This complements the natural sweetness of the fruit. This buttery flavor enhances the overall taste of the dish, making it more delicious and satisfying.
    • Lemon Juice: Lemon juice adds a bright, tangy, and slightly citrusy flavor to the baked apples. This acidity provides a pleasing contrast to the natural sweetness of the apples. It also keeps them from oxidizing (turning brown). 
    • Vanilla Extract: Vanilla extract contributes a warm, sweet, and floral flavor to the baked apples.
    • Sea Salt: Salt enhances the overall flavor of a dish by amplifying and balancing other tastes. A pinch of salt can help bring out the natural sweetness of the fruit. This makes the dish taste even sweeter without being cloying. It also complements the warmth of spices like cinnamon and the richness of ingredients like butter.
    • Cornstarch: Cornstarch will help tighten up (thicken the dish.) The apples will release moisture and this will create a thick sauce.

    Equipment:

    • 9 x13 Baking dish
    • Sharp knife
    • Vegetable peeler or apple peeler
    • Apple coring tool
    • Cutting board
    • Mixing bowl
    • Mixing spoon

    Note: To find this list of products and the brands I recommend, check out this Kitchen Essentials List I have curated.

    Preparation

    Pro Tip: If you wish to peel the apples, there are a few different tool options that can be used to peel an apple. You can simply use a knife, you can use a vegetable peeler, or you can use an apple peeler.
    • Start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit (175 degrees Celsius).
    • Next, wash and peel the apples (Optional) with a sharp knife, vegetable peeler, or apple peeler. 
    Vegetable peeler used to peel apples.
    Vegetable Peeler
    Pampered chef vegetable peeler.
    Victorio apple peeler.
    Apple Peeler works great too too
    • Core the apples and cut the apples into slices.
    Pampered chef apple coring tool.
    Coring Tool
    How to use pampered chef apple coring tool.
    Place in the center of apple
    Apple coring tool.
    Core removed
    • Toss the apples with the lemon juice to prevent them from browning, then place the apples in the baking dish.
    Adding lemon juice to apples.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt.
    Brown sugar for baked apples.
    Adding Cinnamon to baked apples recipe.
    Adding Corn Starch to baked apple recipe.
    Mixing ingredients for baked apples.
    Mix ingredients until there is no clumps and it is well mixed.
    • In a small bowl that is microwave-safe, melt the butter in the microwave. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two.  
    • Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apple slices. 
    • Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
    • Give the apples a quick stir to ensure they are fully coated with the cinnamon-sugar mixture. 
    Apples coated in cinnamon sugar mixture.

    Baking

    • Cover the dish with aluminum foil and bake the apples in the preheated oven for 35 minutes.
    • Remove the foil and cook for an additional 10 minutes. Check for doneness by inserting a fork into apple slices. The baked apple slices will be tender when done. 

    Serving

    There are a few ways to enjoy these sweet apples that have been baked. 

    • Serve them as a side dish or dessert.
    • Warm cinnamon apples go great with pork and make a delicious topping for pork chops. They also make a great side dish with roasted pork tenderloin.
    • Place a spoonful of baked cinnamon apples on top of waffles, pancakes, or French toast then top with maple syrup. 
    • Eat as a dessert topped with whipped cream or a scoop of vanilla ice cream. 

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, this Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples Recipe offers a delightful and fuss-free way to enjoy the comforting flavors of fall. With just a handful of readily available ingredients, minimal effort, and a short preparation time, this recipe proves that achieving deliciousness in the kitchen doesn't have to be complicated.

    Whether you're seeking a quick dessert to satisfy your sweet tooth or planning a cozy gathering with loved ones, this recipe is a winner.

    Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples Recipe Pinterest Picture.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    FAQ's

    What type of apples should I use?

    You can use your favorite apple variety but some apples hold up better to baking than others. The texture, taste, sugar content, and tartness all make a difference. Granny Smith is one of the gold standards for baking apples. Some other good varieties are Honey Crisp and Pink Lady which are on the sweeter side.

    Do I need to peel the apples?

    Peeling the apples is optional. It depends on your personal preference and the texture you desire in the final dish.

    Can I use margarine or oil instead of butter?

    While in my opinion butter is best for flavor, you can use margarine or a neutral oil.

    Is lemon juice necessary?

    Lemon juice helps prevent the apples from turning brown (oxidizing) and adds a subtle tang. With that being said, it is optional but is recommended.

    Do I have to add extra sugar?

    If you prefer to skip the extra sugar, you can do that. Sugar does help to thicken the sauce that is made when the juice from the apples and the sugar caramelizes. You can adjust the recipe to suit your taste though.

    How do I store the leftover baked apples?

    You can store the leftover baked apples in an airtight container for 3 to 4 days in the refrigerator.

    Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

    Yes, you can make it ahead of time and reheat it before serving.

    Can I freeze baked apples?

    Baked apples can be frozen for longer storage. Ensure they are fully cooled, place them in an airtight container or freezer bag, and store for up to 3 months. Thaw and reheat as needed.

    Yield: 6

    Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples Recipe

    Easy baked cinnamon and sugar apples.

    Easy Baked Cinnamon Apples: Sliced apples coated in a sweet cinnamon glaze, baked to perfection, and ready to warm your heart

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 6-7 Apples
    • 1 ½ teaspoons of ground cinnamon
    • ½ cup of brown sugar
    • 2 tablespoons of butter (melted)
    • 1 teaspoon of lemon juice
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon of sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon of corn starch

    Instructions

    Preparation

    • Start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit (175 degrees Celsius).
    • Next, wash and peel the apples (Optional) with a sharp knife. 
    • Core the apples and cut the apples into slices.
    • Toss the apples with the lemon juice to prevent them from browning, then place the apples in the baking dish.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt.
    • In a small microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter in the microwave. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two.  
    • Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apple slices. 
    • Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
    • Give the apples a quick stir to ensure they are fully coated with the cinnamon-sugar mixture. 

    Baking

    • Cover the dish with aluminum foil and bake the apples in the preheated oven for 35 minutes.
    • Remove the foil and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
    • Check for doneness by inserting a fork into apple slices. The baked apple slices will be tender when done. 

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams

    Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli Over Rice

    by 2 Comments

    Are you searching for a hassle-free yet incredibly satisfying dinner option that your family will rave about? Look no further than our Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli over Rice recipe. This dish is the epitome of comfort food, combining tender chicken, vibrant broccoli florets, and a lusciously creamy sauce that's incredibly easy to prepare. 

    Over head shot of the finished recipe of creamy slow cooker chicken and broccoli over rice.

    The magic happens in your slow cooker, allowing the flavors to meld together as you go about your day. When it's time to serve, you'll have a delightful aroma and a mouthwatering dish that pairs perfectly with fluffy rice. Get ready to elevate your weeknight dinner game with this delicious and convenient recipe that will have everyone asking for seconds.

    Why I Love Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli

    This recipe, y'all, it's as hearty and fillin' as they come. It's the kind of dish you can enjoy all year round, it doesn't matter if it's hotter than a jalapeño in July or colder than a polar bear's toenails. Let me tell ya, it's got more flavor than a Sunday potluck, and our young'uns can't seem to get enough of it. It is one of our favorite slow cooker meals that we love to make. 

    Photo of the finished recipe called Creamy slow cooker chicken and broccoli over rice recipe.

    Now, what really sets my heart a flutter for this dish is the creamy, cheesy sauce that the chicken is cooked in. It's a real treat, especially when it's one of them busy weeknights. Among all the slow cooker recipes we've tried, this one's the real belle of the ball. It's got everything you need, y'all: plenty of protein, veggies, and carbs to keep you goin'. This dish can be a side dish or a one-pot dish because It is a complete meal.

    A Fan of the Slow Cooker

    Anytime I can use the slow cooker to cook a meal, I do it. I love slow cooking my meals because the meal can cook low and slow while I am at work and it reduces the cooking time that I have to actively do. It just makes the cooking process so much better. 

    Close up photo of creamy slow cooker chicken and broccoli recipe.

    If you are a fan of slow cooker meals like I am, give these other slow cooker meals a whirl, like Sweet Baby Ray's Crockpot Chicken, Easy Slow Cooker Beef and Bean Chili recipe, Easy Slow Cooker Chicken Noodle Soup, or Southern-Style Crock Pot Mac and Cheese. 

    How To Make Slow Cooker Creamy Chicken and Broccoli

    Ingredients:

    There are just a few simple ingredients for this easy crock pot chicken meal. The ingredients and cooking process will be listed here and the amounts will be listed in the printable recipe down below near the bottom.  

    • Chicken: I prefer to use skinless boneless chicken breasts but you can also use skinless boneless chicken thighs. 
    • Chicken Broth or Chicken Stock 
    • Cream of Chicken Soup
    • Cheddar Cheese Soup
    • Cream Cheese: Softened at room temperature.
    • Sharp Cheddar Cheese: I prefer sharp cheddar cheese because it gives a good tang which pairs well with the other flavors of this dish. Save a little bit for garnishing the dish at the end after you ladle it into bowls.
    • Broccoli: You can use frozen broccoli florets or fresh broccoli florets.
    • Salt: For the best taste, use kosher salt or sea salt. Idonize salt or table salt can give the dish an off taste. 
    • Garlic powder
    • Black Pepper
    • Rice: This recipe calls for long-grain white rice. For a low-carb option, you can substitute brown rice or cauliflower rice.
    • Optional: Cajun Seasoning for a bit more flavor and a little kick of heat. 

    Tools Needed:

    • ​Slow Cooker (crock Pot)
    • Whisk
    • Measuring Spoons
    • Measuring Cups
    • Large Spoon and Ladle
    • Large Bowl

    Note: For a rundown of brands I suggest, look at the Kitchen Essential Tools page.

    Preparation:

    • Step 1. Grab your slow cooker and turn it on to start pre-heating it. 
    • Step 2: In a large bowl, pour chicken broth and cream of chicken, cheddar soup, salt, black pepper, garlic powder, and whisk together. (This can also be done in the Slow cooker (crock pot) if you prefer). 
    add chicken broth to the bowl.
    Chicken broth
    adding cream of chicken soup to the recipe.
    Cream of chicken
    Adding cheddar cheese soup to the recipe.
    Cheddar cheese soup
    Adding salt to chicken and broccoli over rice recipe.
    Salt
    adding black pepper to chicken broth to make chicken and broccoli over rice.
    Black pepper
    Adding garlic powder to chicken broccoli over rice.
    Garlic powder
    Whisk ingredients together.
    Whisk ingredients together
    This is what the ingredients should look like after you have mixed them up.
    This is what it should look like after whisking together

    Slow Cooking

    • Step 1: Add chicken to the crock pot and pour the sauce over top of the chicken. Cover with the lid and cook on low for 6 hours on low, or cook for 3 hours on high. 
    Place chicken in the slow cooker.
    Place chicken in slow cooker
    Pour the sauce over the chicken.
    Pour sauce over chicken
    Chicken in the crock pot covered with the creamy sauce.
    What it should look like
    • Step 2: Once the chicken is done, use a fork to shred the chicken apart. 
    • Step 3: Add the softened cream cheese to the slow cooker and whisk it in as it melts until it is nice and incorporated.

    Steaming Broccoli

    • Step 1: Steam broccoli until fork tender. I like using frozen Steamfresh broccoli as I can heat it up in the microwave while I am cooking the rice. You can also add the broccoli to the crock pot about a ½ hour before the chicken is done to cook it all together.  
    • Step 2: If using the Steamfresh broccoli, add the tender broccoli to the Slow cooker. 

    Rice Preparation

    • Step 1: Cook rice according to the rice package either on the stovetop, rice cooker, or instant pot. 

    Serving

    Add the rice to a bowl and ladle the Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli over the rice for a delicious and hearty meal.  Garnish with cheddar cheese.

    Close up photo of creamy slow cooker chicken and broccoli recipe.

    ​Side Suggestions

    ​​Conclusion

    In summary, our Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli over Rice recipe is the ultimate easy and satisfying dinner choice. This comfort food masterpiece combines tender, moist chicken, vibrant broccoli, and a creamy sauce, all effortlessly prepared in your slow cooker. When it's time to serve, you'll be met with a delicious aroma and a dish that pairs perfectly with fluffy rice. 

    Elevate your weeknight dinner game with this recipe that's sure to leave your whole family asking for seconds. Next time you are looking for an easy weeknight meal, make sure you give this one a try. It is such an easy dinner idea.

    Creamy slow cooker chicken and broccoli over rice recipe photo for Pinterest.

    FAQ's

    Can I use frozen chicken for this recipe?

    While it is generally recommended to thaw chicken beforehand for safety reasons, you can use frozen chicken breast in this recipe. Just be sure to adjust the cooking time as it may take longer to cook the frozen chicken breast and/or thighs.

    Can I use a different type of cheese?

    Yes, while I love the tang of sharp cheddar cheese in this dish, you could also use mild cheddar, Monterey Jack, or even parmesan to suit your taste.

    How can I store leftovers?

    I recommend storing leftovers in an airtight container. I prefer to put the leftover rice in the bottom of the container and pour the remaining chicken and broccoli mixture over the top of it. This will help the rice from drying out. This should last for 3 to 4 days in the refrigerator.

    How can I reheat this dish?

    To reheat, spoon out the amount that you wish to reheat in a microwave bowl with a lid. Add just a little bit of water to the bottom and microwave it until it is heated. The water will help put moisture back into the rice so it isn't crunchy and is soft and tender again.

    Can I make this dish without a slow cooker?

    Yes, you can make this dish on the stovetop or even in the instant pot. You will just have to adjust the times for cooking.

    How can I make this dish spicer?

    If you like a little bit more heat, you can add in some crushed red pepper. This will also give it a pretty contrasting color. Another way is to add in a little bit of hot sauce such as Texas Petes or Franks Red Hot.

    Can I use bone-in chicken breast/thighs or a whole chicken for this dish?

    While using boneless skinless chicken breast or thighs is recommended for simplicity for this dish, you can use bone-in chicken if you prefer. Just make sure to adjust your cooking time and ensure the chicken reaches a safe internal temperature of 165 degrees Fahrenheit. You will also have to add additional time for deboning or picking the meat.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35​

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
    Yield: 6

    Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli Over Rice

    Creamy Crock pot chicken and broccoli.

    Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken & Broccoli over Rice – an easy, family-favorite dinner recipe that is sure the please.

    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 6 hours
    Total Time 6 hours 20 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 4 boneless chicken breasts (can substitute for thighs)
    • 16 oz of chicken broth (half of a box of chicken broth)
    • 1 can of cream of chicken soup
    • 1 8oz package of softened cream cheese
    • 1 cup of sharp cheddar cheese
    • 1 can of cheddar cheese soup
    • 6 cups of frozen or fresh broccoli florets ( The frozen Steamfresh broccoli works great for this recipe)
    • ½ teaspoon of salt
    • ½ teaspoon of black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon of Garlic Powder
    • 2 cups of long grain white rice (brown rice or cauliflower rice for low-carb substitutions)

    Optional

    • Cajun Seasoning

    Instructions

    Preparation:

    Step 1. Grab your slow cooker and turn it on to start heating it up. 

    Step 2: In a large bowl, pour chicken broth, cream of chicken, cheddar cheese soup, salt, black pepper, and garlic powder. Whisk ingredients together. (This can also be done in the crock pot if you prefer). 

    Slow Cooking:

    Step 1: Add chicken to the crock pot and pour the sauce over the chicken. Cover with the lid and cook on low for 6 hours on low, or cook for 3 hours on high. 

    Step 2: Once the chicken is done, use a fork to shred the chicken apart. 

    Step 3: Add the softened cream cheese and whisk it in until it is nice and incorporated.

    Steaming Broccoli:

    Step 1: Steam broccoli until fork tender. I like using frozen Seamfresh broccoli as I can heat it up in the microwave while cooking the rice. You can also add the broccoli to the crock pot about an hour before the chicken is done to cook it all together.  

    Step 2: Add the tender broccoli to Slow cooker. 

    Rice Preparation:

    Step 1: Cook rice according to the rice package either on the stovetop, rice cooker, or instant pot. 

    Serving:

    Add the rice to a bowl and spoon the Creamy Slow Cooker Chicken and Broccoli over the rice for a delicious and hearty meal. Garnish with cheddar cheese.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American

    Southern-Style Green Beans and Potatoes Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Get ready to savor a taste of the South with our Southern-style green Beans and Potatoes recipe. These tender, flavorful green beans, and hearty potatoes, slow-cooked with a medley of aromatic seasonings, will transport your taste buds to a comforting Southern kitchen.

    Close up of Southern Style Green beans and Potatoes Recipe.

    Whether it's a family dinner or a special occasion, this classic Southern dish is sure to be a crowd-pleaser that the whole family will love. 

    Southern comfort on a plate: Green Beans and Potatoes

    Southern Style Green Beans and Potatoes is a classic Southern comfort dish that brings together the earthy goodness of fresh green beans and tender chunks of potatoes, infused with the smoky richness of pork such as Bacon or Hamhocks. This hearty and flavorful recipe showcases the essence of Southern cuisine, where simplicity meets soul-satisfying flavors.

    In this dish, crisp-tender green beans and rustic potatoes are simmered to perfection in a savory broth, alongside sautéed onions and garlic, which add depth and aroma. The addition of smoky bacon or salt pork provides a delightful smokiness that elevates the overall taste. 

    Green beans and red potatoes.
    Photo Credit | Canva.com

    Seasoned with salt and pepper, this comforting Southern staple embodies the heartwarming spirit of Southern hospitality, making it a beloved side dish that pairs perfectly with a variety of main courses. With its down-home charm and timeless appeal, Southern Style Green Beans and Potatoes is a true Southern classic that's sure to please the palate and warm the soul.

    Why you will love this recipe

    • It is an easy side dish to make
    • can be adapted to the slow cooker (Crock Pot)
    • Picky eaters will tend to like this recipe even if they do not like many vegetables.
    • Soul-Satisfying Comfort
    • Simple ingredients but big flavor
    • It is a very versatile side dish
    • Add smoked sausage or smoked ham to make it a main course meal

    What to serve Southern Style Green beans and Potatoes with

    Many people think that Green beans are just served around holidays such as Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Easter. In the South, that is not the only place you see them as they are a very popular side dish. They show up at potlucks, cookouts, BBQs, and just as a typical side dish for supper (what Southerners call Dinner).

    Overhead shot of southern-style green beans and potatoes recipe.

    This classic southern dish is great with many other dishes. 

    Here is a list of my favorite dishes to serve green beans with:

    How to Make Southern-Style Green Beans

    Southern Green Beans and Potatoes is primarily characterized by the use of simple, hearty ingredients and traditional cooking techniques that are prevalent in Southern cuisine. This recipe is cooked on the stovetop, but It can also be adapted to a slow cooker (crock pot). 

    Note: I will include additional notes on how to cook this recipe in the slow cooker down below. 

    Ingredients

    Here are some ways in which the Southern influence is reflected in this recipe with these simple ingredients:

    Choice of Ingredients

    • Fresh Produce: Southern cooking often emphasizes the use of fresh, seasonal vegetables. In this recipe, green beans (also called snap beans or string beans) and potatoes which are staples in Southern gardens are used. We typically like red potatoes or Yukon Gold potatoes. Other great options are baby potatoes (new potatoes) or Russet Potatoes. Green beans are best if they are fresh but in a pinch, you can use frozen or canned. 
    • Bacon or Salt Pork: Many Southern recipes incorporate bacon or salt pork for flavor. In this case, the addition of bacon provides a smoky and savory element to the dish.  

    Flavorful Aromatics

    • Onions and Garlic: Onions and garlic are frequently used as a flavor base in Southern cooking. They add depth and aroma to the dish. I like to use sweet onions if they are available. If not, use yellow or white onions. 
    Ingredients used to make Southern Style Green beans.

    Slow Cooking

    • Simmering: Southern cuisine often involves slow-cooking methods to develop rich flavors. The simmering of green beans and potatoes allows them to become tender while absorbing the flavors of the aromatics and bacon.

    Seasoning

    • Salt, Pepper, Sugar: Simple yet essential, Southern cooking relies on the proper seasoning of dishes. Salt and black pepper are foundational seasonings in this recipe. The small amount of sugar is not noticeable in making the dish sweet, but it brings out the flavor of the green beans and potatoes in a big way. It wakes them up and I feel it is an essential ingredient as salt is. 

    Broth or Water

     The use of chicken broth or water to create a flavorful liquid for simmering is common in Southern cooking. It enhances the overall taste of the dish.

    Garnishes

    Southern dishes often include garnishes for added flavor and visual appeal. Options like fresh herbs or crispy bacon bits can be added to enhance the dish's presentation and taste.

    Variations

    Southern cuisine is known for its regional variations and adaptations. This recipe can be customized to reflect different Southern flavors, such as adding Cajun spices for medium heat or using smoked ham hocks for a Southern Appalachian touch. Instead of a ham hock, you could also use Smoked Sausage. 

    The Southern influence in this Southern-style Green Beans and Potatoes recipe is evident in its use of fresh ingredients, classic seasonings, and slow-cooking methods that are characteristic of this Classic Southern side dish. The combination of green beans, potatoes, bacon, and aromatic seasonings creates a hearty and satisfying dish that pays homage to the culinary traditions of the American South.

    Equipment needed

    • Large pot or Dutch oven
    • Knife
    • Cutting board
    • Garlic Press

    Note: For brands that I recommend, check out our Kitchen Essentials page.

    Prep

    This recipe is very simple to cook and only takes a little bit of preparation. 

    • If you have fresh-picked green beans, start by washing them. 
    • Next, you want to cut the ends off (or snap them off) and then cut or snap the beans into 2-inch sections.
    Cutting green beans into 2 inches sections for green bean recipe.
    Note: If the beans are not young and tender, they may have a string that goes down the length of the bean that will have to be pulled out (hence the name "string beans") If not, they will be stringy and fibrous.

    Snapping green beans was traditionally done sitting on the porch or gathered around a table and "snapping" the green beans into sections. It was an activity that involved the whole family and sometimes friends. Although it was work, it was also a social time. While you worked, you would listen or tell stories, etc.

    Snapped green beans ready to be cooked.
    Snapped green beans ready to be cooked or preserved
    YouTube video
    How to "Snap" green beans
    • If you have frozen green beans, you shouldn't have to worry about the string step.
    • Next, Wash and scrub the potatoes in cold water so that you remove all the dirt. 
    • It is typical to leave the peelings on. Cut the potatoes into 1 or 2-inch chunks. Then, place them in a large bowl and cover with water until you are ready to use them. This will keep them from oxidizing (turning brown). 
    Red potatoes cut into fourths.
    • Peel and chop the onion. 
    Chopping a sweet onion up to add to southern style green beans.
    • Peel and mince the garlic or use a garlic press if you have one (my favorite way).
    Showing how to use the garlic press.
    Add garlic
    Once garlic is in the press, squeeze the handle to push the garlic out the other side. This leaves the skin behind.
    Squeeze handle
    Once you squeeze or press out the garlic, you are left with the peel.
    You are left with the peel
    • Cut up bacon into smaller pieces. 
    Cutting bacon into small pieces.

    Cooking the Green Beans

    • ​Start with the large pot on the stove on medium-high heat. 
    • Add in a little tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil or bacon grease, then toss in the bacon.
    Adding olive oil to a stock pot.
    Add olive oil
    Adding bacon into a stock pot to render out the fat.
    Add bacon
    • After the bacon fat has started to render out, add the onions and garlic to the pot. Make sure to stir constantly to keep the garlic from burning. 
    Rendering out fat from bacon by cooking it in a stock pot.
    Bacon fat has rendered
    Adding onions to rendered bacon in a stock pot to sweat the onions down.
    Add onions
    Once garlic is in the press, squeeze the handle to push the garlic out the other side. This leaves the skin behind.
    • Next, after the onions have turned translucent add green beans and potatoes. 
    Adding potatoes and green beans to stock pot.
    • Then, add enough water to cover the ingredients, then the salt, pepper, and sugar. 
    Adding water to southern style green beans and potatoes recipe to cook it.
    Cover with water
    Adding salt to southern style green beans and potatoes.
    Add salt
    Adding black pepper to green bean recipe.
    then black pepper
    Adding sugar to green bean recipe.
    Next add the sugar
    • Stir to combine the ingredients. 
    What the ingredients look like in the stock pot before cooking southern style green beans and potatoes.
    The recipe like before cooking

    Simmer

    1. Bring to a boil on medium-high heat. 
    2. After it has come to a boil, turn the burner down to low and let it simmer for 50 to 60 minutes or until you have tender potatoes and the liquid has reduced.  I like my potatoes falling apart slightly.

    Serving

    • This dish is typically served "family style" where the bowl is brought to the table and each individual serves. 
    • You can also ladle the green beans and potatoes onto individual plates or bowls. If you do not want any juice, use a slotted spoon to drain the juice. 
    • Garnish with chopped herbs, sliced almonds, or crispy pieces of bacon. 

    Slow Cooker Instructions

    1. Saute Bacon, onions, and garlic in a large nonstick skillet.
    2. After the onions turn translucent, add them to the slow cooker.
    3. Add water to cover the ingredients.
    4. Add in green beans, potatoes, salt, pepper, and sugar.
    5. Stir to combine.
    6. Cook on low for 8 hours or high for 4 hours making sure the potatoes are tender before being done.

    Conclusion

    ​In conclusion, Southern Style Green Beans and Potatoes is a delightful dish that captures the heart and soul of Southern cuisine. Its simplicity, rich flavors, and comforting appeal make it a beloved addition to any table. 

    From the earthy goodness of fresh green beans to the rustic tenderness of potatoes, and the smoky allure of bacon, this recipe offers a harmonious blend of ingredients that resonate with tradition and warmth.

    Whether you're seeking a comforting side dish for a family dinner or a crowd-pleaser for a special gathering, this recipe delivers on all fronts.

    Its versatility allows you to customize it to your liking, adding your personal touch to a cherished Southern classic.

    As you savor each bite of tender green beans and flavorful potatoes, you'll be transported to the heart of Southern hospitality, where food isn't just sustenance but a means of bringing people together. So, prepare a pot of Southern-style green Beans and Potatoes, and share in the joy of good company and great food, all while celebrating the time-honored traditions of the American South.

    hanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
    Yield: 8

    Southern-Style Green Beans and Potatoes Recipe

    Southern-Style green beans and potatoes.
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour
    Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds of green beans
    • 1 pound of Red, Yukon, Baby, or Russet potatoes.
    • 1 medium onion
    • 6 slices of bacon
    • 2 cloves of garlic or ¼ teaspoon of garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon of white sugar
    • 1 teaspoon of black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon of sea salt or kosher salt

    Instructions

    Prep

    1. If you have fresh-picked green beans, start by washing them. 
    2. Next, you want to cut the ends off (or snap them off) and then cut or snap the beans into 2-inch sections. If the beans are not young and tender, they may have a string that goes down the length of the bean that will have to be pulled out (hence the name "string beans") If not, they will be stringy and fibrous.
    3. Next, Wash and scrub the potatoes in cold water so that you remove all the dirt. 
    4. If you have whole potatoes, it is typical to leave the peelings on. Cut the potatoes into 1 or 2-inch chunks. Place them in a large bowl and cover with water until you are ready to use them. This will keep them from oxidizing. 
    5. Peel and chop the onion. 
    6. Peel and mince the garlic or use a garlic press if you have one.
    7. Cut up bacon into smaller pieces. 

    Cooking the Green Beans

    1. ​Start with the large pot on the stove on medium-high heat. 
    2. Add in a little tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil or bacon grease, then toss in the bacon.
    3. After the bacon fat has started to render out, add the onions and garlic to the pot. Make sure to stir constantly to keep the garlic from burning. 
    4. After the onions have turned translucent, add green beans, potatoes, and enough water to cover the ingredients in the pot. 
    5. Next, add in the salt, pepper, and sugar. 
    6. Stir to combine the ingredients. 

    Simmer

    1. Bring to a boil on medium-high heat. 
    2. After it has come to a boil, turn the burner down to low and let it simmer for 50 to 60 minutes or until you have tender potatoes and the liquid has reduced.  

    Slow Cooker Instructions

    1. Saute Bacon, onions, and garlic in a large nonstick skillet.
    2. After the onions turn translucent, add them to the slow cooker.
    3. Add water to cover the ingredients.
    4. Add in green beans, potatoes, salt, pepper, and sugar.
    5. Stir to combine.
    6. Cook on low for 8 hours or high for 4 hours making sure the potatoes are tender before being done.

    Nutrition Information:

    Yield:

    8

    Serving Size:

    1
    Amount Per Serving: Calories: 145Total Fat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 9mgSodium: 460mgCarbohydrates: 24gFiber: 5gSugar: 6gProtein: 7g

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: Southern / Category: Side Dishes

    Stone-Ground Grits vs. Quick Grits (What's the Difference)

    by Leave a Comment

    When it comes to Southern comfort food of the American South, few dishes are as iconic and beloved as grits. These creamy, savory, and versatile morsels of goodness have been a staple in Southern cuisine for generations.

    But as any grits enthusiast will tell you, not all grits are created equal. In fact, there's a heated debate in the culinary world over stone-ground grits vs. quick grits, with die-hard fans on both sides of the aisle. 

    how to cook grits.

    So, what's the difference between these two varieties of grits, and why does it matter? Join us on a culinary journey as we explore the nuances, flavors, and traditions that make stone-ground grits and quick grits distinct, helping you make an informed choice the next time you're faced with that tempting bowl of creamy goodness.

    CLoseup picture of stone ground grits and quick grits in two separate bowls.
    Yellow stone ground grits | White quick grits

    Whether you're a grits connoisseur or a newcomer to this quintessential Southern delight, get ready to unravel the delicious debate between stone-ground grits and quick grits.

    What are grits?

    Grits are a type of comfort food and one of the many iconic Southern Recipes. Before making grits, you need to know a few tricks on how to get them just right. Fortunately, I have created a recipe on How to Cook Grits to share my secrets with you.

    How To Cook Grits

    Additionally, they start out as dried corn on the cob that is then shelled into loose corn. Subsequently, the corn is milled on a grist mill into ground corn, resulting in the creation of grits.

    Why corn?

    The history of corn's introduction by Native Americans is a testament to their agricultural ingenuity. Long before the arrival of European settlers, indigenous peoples in the Americas were cultivating maize, commonly known as corn. 

    Native American Lady standing out on the reservation looking across the vast dessert at sunset.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Through generations of selective breeding and cultivation, Native Americans transformed a wild grass called teosinte into the staple crop we recognize today as corn. Their expertise in maize cultivation not only provided a reliable source of sustenance but also fueled the growth of complex civilizations such as the Maya, Aztecs, and Inca. 

    Photo from Canva.com

    Corn rapidly became a crucial crop, spreading across the Americas and eventually reaching Europe and other parts of the world after the Columbian Exchange. This historical journey underscores the significant impact of Native American agricultural practices on global food culture and highlights their deep connection to the growth and dissemination of one of the world's most essential crops.

    ​Corn thrived abundantly in the Southern United States, where it was both prolific and affordable. As a result, grits became a breakfast staple for many Southerners due to their cost-effectiveness and ability to feed large families. 

    Dried Corn.
    Dried corn | Photo from Canva.com

    Beyond human consumption, corn played a crucial role in providing sustenance for animals on homesteads, solidifying its status as an indispensable grain. The versatility of corn extends to various culinary applications, from crafting cornmeal for cornbread to savoring corn on the cob and incorporating corn kernels into a myriad of recipes.

    Among the Southern culinary treasures that showcase corn's adaptability, grits shine as an enduring classic.

    Corn and grist mills were an important part of Southern life

    Southern culture considered corn to be an essential grain since it was used not only to feed their families but also to feed their livestock. Moreover, depending on the purpose of the corn, it was milled differently. As a result, farmers used whole corn and cracked corn to feed their livestock.

    Picture of the grits mill that is located in Cades Cove, TN.
    Grist Mill in Cades Cove, TN | Photo by Smokymountains.com

    Corn was fed into the mill through a shute and made its way between two stones of a grist mill. These two stones have groves cut in them in a special pattern called furrows.

    One stone is stationary and the other turns. There is a system of pulleys and gears that turn the stone that is usually powered by an animal, tractor, or even water-powered if the grist mill is located near a water source.

    inside of a grist mill at George Washington's Mt Vernon.
    Inside of a Grist Mill | Photo by George Washinton's Distillery and Gristmill

    The distance between the stones determines how fine the grain is milled. Cracked corn took the least amount of time to mill.

    If you wanted grits, the gap was closed between the stones to make finer cracked corn. If you wanted corn meal, the gap was even closer so that it could be milled into a finer powder-like texture.

    Up close picture of a stone mill stones.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Creeks, Streams, and rivers were dotted with grist mills. The flowing water was used to power these mills to grind corn for communities.

    Water powered grits mill.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Southerners grew their own corn and would take the corn to the community grist mill where they would have it ground into cracked corn, grits, and stone-ground cornmeal.

    Visiting the gristmill served a dual purpose: providing sustenance for both your family and livestock while fostering a sense of community. People would congregate at the grits mill, engaging in conversations while their corn was being ground.

    Grits

    Before we delve into the art of cooking the perfect pot of grits, it's essential to familiarize ourselves with some key details about this beloved Southern dish. Grits exhibit variations based on the type of corn utilized, their color, the ground type, and their cooking speed.

    Let's explore these facets of grits to gain a better understanding of this iconic dish.

    stone ground grits vs quick grits pinterest picture.

    Type of corn used

    Grits are typically made from Dent Corn, which is a type of field corn known for its starchy, indented, or "dented" kernels.

    Up-close picture of dent corn.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Grits are often made from Dent Corn for several reasons:

    1. Starch Content: Dent Corn has a higher starch content compared to other types of corn, making it ideal for grits. The starch is what gives grits their creamy and smooth texture when cooked.
    2. Texture: Dent Corn kernels have a distinctive indented or "dented" appearance, which contributes to the desired texture of grits. This texture allows grits to absorb liquids and thicken effectively during cooking.
    3. Flavor: Dent Corn has a mild and slightly sweet flavor, which is well-suited for grits. Its flavor profile pairs nicely with various seasonings and toppings, allowing for versatility in grits recipes.
    4. Tradition: Dent Corn has a long history of being used for grits in Southern cuisine, and tradition often plays a significant role in culinary choices.

    While Dent Corn is a popular choice for making grits, it's worth noting that grits can also be made from other types of corn, such as Flint Corn and hominy corn, each of which imparts its unique flavor and texture to the final dish. The choice of corn type can vary depending on regional preferences and the desired characteristics of the grits being produced. Further discussion on hominy corn will follow below.

    Color of corn

    Corn comes in various hues, with both white corn and yellow corn variations available. It's all a matter of personal preference, but I primarily enjoyed white corn grits during my upbringing. When it comes to flavor, yellow grits are essentially indistinguishable from white grits.

    White and Yellow corn on the cob freshly picked.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Varieties of Grits

    Moving forward, there are four main kind of grits readily available in your local grocery store. First up, we have stone-ground grits, reminiscent of the grits our ancestors enjoyed when they brought their corn to the communal grist mill for milling.

    ​

    Stone Ground Grits

    Stone-ground grits are characterized by their coarser texture, which requires a longer cooking time. Their distinct appeal lies in their rich corn flavor, as these grits retain all components of the whole corn kernel, including the germ.

    Consequently, it's perfectly normal for stone ground grits to have a speckled appearance or to spot grey specks in your stone ground grits, this is a testament to their wholesome nature.

    close of what stone ground grits texture looks like.

    Stone-ground grits are often considered a nutritious option due to their whole-grain nature. They are the least processed among grit varieties, which not only preserves their nutritional value but also enhances their health benefits. 

    Sometimes stone ground grits can be found at local grocery stores, but if you cannot find a brand, I recommend ordering grits from Palmetto Farms, Marsh Hen Mill, The Old Mill, or Cotton Hills Farm. For this recipe, you will need 1 cup of grits.

    picture of stone-ground grits in a cloth sack from Palmetto farms in SC.
    SC-grown stone ground grits
    Check Price

    Since stone ground grits are the least processed varieties of grits, they take the longest to cook. Typically, stone-ground grits require approximately 30 to 40 minutes of cooking time.

    One of my favorite ways to cook stone ground grits to to make these Cheesy Grits. This recipe results in grits that have an incredibly rich corn flavor, and creamy texture, and bursting with cheesy goodness. After all, who doesn't love cheesy and creamy grits?

    cheesy southern cheese grits recipe.
    Creamy Cheesy Southern Cheese Grits

    Stone ground grits can come in different grind textures:

    1. Coarse Grind: Coarse stone-ground grits have a more substantial texture and a longer cooking time. They retain more of the corn's natural texture and flavor, making them a favorite among grits purists.
    2. Medium Grind: Medium stone-ground grits are a middle ground between coarse and fine grinds. They offer a balance of texture and creaminess and tend to be a popular choice for those who enjoy the traditional stone-ground taste but with a slightly smoother texture.
    3. Fine Grind: Fine stone-ground grits are ground to a finer consistency, resulting in a smoother and creamier texture. They cook relatively quickly compared to coarser grinds and are often chosen for their smoother mouthfeel.

    The choice of grind depends on personal preference and the dish you plan to prepare. Coarser grinds are excellent for dishes where you want a more rustic texture, while finer grinds work well in recipes where a smoother consistency is desired.

    Experimenting with different grind sizes can help you discover the perfect stone-ground grits for your culinary creations.

    Quick-cooking grits

    The next type of grits you will find in the grocery store is called quick grits. Quick grits are what most people cook these days.

    Quick cooking grits, as the name suggests, are a type of grits that have been processed to cook faster than traditional stone-ground or regular grits. These grits are typically made by pre-cooking the corn and then drying it before grinding it into grits. This pre-cooking and drying process reduces the cooking time significantly, making quick cooking grits a convenient option for those who want a quicker meal preparation.

    Close up of what quick grits texture looks like.

    While they are convenient, it's essential to note that quick-cooking grits may not have the same depth of flavor or texture as stone-ground grits. The more extended cooking process of stone-ground grits allows for a fuller corn flavor and a creamier, thicker texture while quick-cooking grits tend to be smoother and may have a milder taste.

    Quick-cooking grits are a popular choice for busy individuals who want to enjoy grits without spending as much time in the kitchen. They can be a versatile addition to various dishes, from breakfast to dinner, and are especially handy when you're short on time.

    ​

    Hominy grits

    Hominy grits are a type of grits made from hominy, which is a dried maize (corn) kernel that has had its tough outer hulls removed through a process called nixtamalization. The whole corn kernels are soaked in an alkaline solution (lye solution), usually limewater, which softens the hulls and makes them easier to remove.

    Overhead picture of a bowl of Hominy grits.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Afterward, the kernels are washed to remove the alkali solution, dried, and ground into the coarse, grainy texture that characterizes grits.

    What does Hominy taste like

    Hominy grits have a distinct flavor and texture compared to regular corn grits. They are known for their slightly nutty and earthy taste, as well as their chewy consistency. These grits are a popular staple in Southern and Mexican cuisines and are used in a variety of dishes, including breakfast items, side dishes, and even casseroles. They are versatile ingredients with a unique flavor profile that sets them apart from traditional corn grits.

    Instant Grits

    Instant grits are a type of grits that have undergone further processing to reduce their cooking time significantly. Unlike traditional stone-ground or regular grits, which can take anywhere from 20 to 60 minutes to cook, instant grits can be prepared in a matter of minutes, typically within 1 to 2 minutes. These are the type of grits that come in little packets similar to instant oatmeal. 

    Quaker instant grits spilled out on a cutting board.

    The process of making instant grits involves partially cooking the grits before drying them. This precooking step, along with the fine grinding of the corn, allows them to rehydrate quickly when mixed with boiling water or another liquid. As a result, they are a convenient option for those looking to prepare a quick meal or side dish.

    However, it's worth noting that instant grits may have a different texture and flavor compared to stone-ground or regular grits. Some enthusiasts find that instant grits have a slightly less robust taste and can be less creamy. Nonetheless, they remain a popular choice for those seeking a fast and easy way to enjoy this classic Southern dish but they are my least preferred way to eat grits. 

    How are grits served?

    Grits can be served in various ways, making them a versatile dish that can be enjoyed for breakfast, lunch, or dinner.

    Here are some common serving methods for grits:

    1. Breakfast Grits: Grits are often served as a breakfast dish. They can be cooked with water, milk, or even chicken broth for a creamy consistency and served with a variety of toppings, including butter, cheese, bacon, sausage, fried eggs, or shrimp. A popular breakfast variation is "shrimp and grits," Which is a South Carolina Traditional Dish where sautéed shrimp are served over a bed of creamy grits.
    2. Savory Side Dish: Grits can be served as a side dish alongside other Southern favorites like fried chicken, collard greens, or barbecue. They can be prepared with savory toppings like gravy or cheese for a hearty accompaniment.
    3. Cheesy Grits: Grits are often cooked with cheese to create a creamy and cheesy dish. Cheese grits use a variety of cheeses such as Cheddar, American, or Parmesan cheese. Each is commonly used to add flavor and richness.
    4. Grits Casseroles: Grits can be incorporated into casseroles, often layered with vegetables, meats, and cheese to create a satisfying one-dish meal.
    5. Grits Cakes: Cooked grits can be chilled, cut into shapes, and pan-fried to make grits cakes. These can be served as a side or even as a base for toppings such as grilled shrimp or vegetables.
    6. Sweet Grits: While grits are typically savory, they can also be prepared with sweet additions like sugar, cinnamon, and vanilla for a dessert-like treat. Serve them with fruit, honey, or maple syrup for a delightful twist.
    7. Grits Bowls: Create customized grits bowls by offering a variety of toppings and mix-ins, such as avocado, salsa, grilled vegetables, or crumbled bacon, allowing each person to customize their meal.
    Stone ground grist with a fried egg on top.
    Photo from Canva.com

    Ultimately, how grits are served depends on personal taste and regional traditions. They are a blank canvas for culinary creativity, making them a beloved staple in Southern and comfort food cuisine.

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, grits stand as an enduring staple that has won the hearts and palates of generations. From their humble origins as nutritious sustenance for Native Americans to their prominence on Southern breakfast tables, grits have showcased their versatility and adaptability over the years. 

    Whether opting for the coarser grind of stone-ground grits or embracing the convenience of quick-cooking grits, the essence of good grits remains unchanged—the celebration of corn in all its glory, from the entire kernel to the creamy, low-heat embrace of a slow cooker. In the end, the Southern tradition of savoring grits, rich in flavor and history, continues to warm hearts and bring families together, embodying the essence of a true Southern staple.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Welcome to a delightful culinary adventure where the earthy sweetness of butternut squash meets the rich, irresistible allure of caramelization. Our "Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash" recipe is a celebration of autumn's bounty, a symphony of flavors and textures that will elevate your dining experience to new heights.

    Golden roasted butternut squash.

    With the smooth and creamy texture of butternut squash coated in olive oil and sea salt, this dish is a simple but perfect side or even a star attraction on your dinner table. 

    Whether you're a seasoned chef or a home cook looking to impress, join us as we unlock the secrets to creating this mouthwatering masterpiece. Get ready to savor the warmth and depth of flavors that only caramelization can deliver in every delectable bite. You're going to love this recipe for baked Butternut Squash!

    What is Butternut Squash?

    Butternut squash is a type of winter squash known for its sweet, nutty flavor and smooth, creamy texture when cooked. It is similar in many ways in taste and texture to baked sweet potatoes.

    Close of of the inside of a butter pumpkin showing the seeds and stringy bits.
    Inside view of a Butternut Squash (Winter Squash)

    It's a popular vegetable in many culinary dishes, particularly during the fall and winter months. Here are some key characteristics of butternut squash:

    1. Appearance: Butternut squash typically has a long, bell-like shape with pale beige to tan-colored skin. The flesh inside is vibrant orange.
    2. Flavor: The flesh of butternut squash is mildly sweet with a slightly nutty undertone. It's often described as having a flavor reminiscent of pumpkin, sweet potato, and butterscotch.
    3. Texture: When cooked, butternut squash becomes tender and smooth, making it suitable for various preparations, including roasting, pureeing, and soups.
    4. Nutritional Value: Butternut squash is a nutritious vegetable. It's rich in vitamins A and C, as well as dietary fiber. It also provides essential minerals like potassium and manganese.
    5. Versatility: Butternut squash can be used in a wide range of dishes, from savory to sweet. It's commonly used in soups, roasted as a side dish, mashed, pureed for baby food, or even used in desserts like pies and muffins.
    6. Harvest Season: Butternut squash is typically harvested in the late summer and early fall, but it can be stored and enjoyed throughout the winter, which is why it's classified as a "winter squash."

    According to The Spruce, Butternut squash is a versatile and delicious ingredient that can add depth of flavor and vibrant color to a variety of recipes. This makes it a favorite choice for home cooks and chefs alike. Or you can eat it right out of the oven as an easy side dish. 

    Alternate Names For Butternut Squash

    While the common name for butternut squash is well-known, it may also be recognized by several other names. Here are some synonyms and alternative names for butternut squash:

    1. Butter Pumpkin: In some regions, butternut squash is referred to as butter pumpkin due to its creamy texture.
    2. Winter Squash: Butternut squash belongs to the winter squash family, which includes other varieties like acorn squash and spaghetti squash.
    3. Buttercup Squash: This is another type of winter squash that has a similar taste and texture to butternut squash.
    4. Sweet Pumpkin: Because of its sweet flavor, butternut squash is sometimes called sweet pumpkin.
    5. Bellini Squash: This is a less common term for butternut squash used in certain areas.
    6. Nutty Squash: Butternut squash has a slightly nutty flavor, which can be highlighted in dishes.
    7. Pear-shaped Squash: This name refers to its distinctive shape, which resembles that of a pear.
    8. Cucurbita moschata: This is the scientific name for butternut squash, often used in botanical contexts.
    9. Autumn Squash: Butternut squash is often associated with fall and is sometimes called autumn squash.
    10. Soup Squash: Due to its creamy texture and suitability for making soups, butternut squash is sometimes referred to as soup squash.

    Baked Halved Butternut Squash

    This recipe is destined to become one of your all-time favorites in no time. It is a simple roasted butternut squash recipe to make, and it doesn't take much time to cook. Roasting it is the easiest way to cook it.

    Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash makes the perfect side dish for almost any meal. Baking or roasting this winter squash is my favorite way to make this vegetable. This dish is the perfect holiday meal that can be served around the holiday table such as at the Thanksgiving table, Christmas dinner, or even Easter dinner. To be honest, I enjoy this dish anytime I am looking for a healthy side dish. 

    Backed Caramelized butternut squash closeup picture.

    In this recipe, we are going to roast or bake this squash in halves versus cutting it up into cubes. We will leave the peeling on it and all. If you prefer, you can use a vegetable peeler and cut the butternut squash into squash cubes but it is not necessary to make this recipe perfect. I typically eat the flesh of the roasted butternut squash just as it is but you could also make butternut squash soup from the roasted butternut squash. 

    Rich baked butternut squash closeup.

    How To Make Baked Butternut Squash

    First, let's go over the simple list of ingredients needed for Caramelized Butternut Squash. The quantities will be listed in the recipe card at the bottom of the post. 

    • Butternut Squash
    • Olive oil
    • Sea salt

    Optional Ingredients

    In our recipe, I am going to share the basic ingredients that I use and how I typically like them. You can make your combination from the optional ingredients listed below based on how you prefer.

    Adding Rosemary to the butternut squash for flavor.
    add preferred seasoning

    Individual preferences for butternut squash vary; while some relish it as a savory delight, others favor its sweet side, like indulging in cinnamon-roasted butternut squash. If you're adhering to a low-carb diet, butternut squash can still be a wonderful addition to your meals, though you might lean towards using savory ingredients to keep your carb intake in check.

    Savory Ingredients:

    • Rosemary
    • Chili powder
    • Black Pepper
    • Melted Butter
    • Bacon
    • Thyme
    • Sage
    • Oregano
    • Garlic
    • Parmesan Cheese
    • Nuts such as toasted almonds, pecans, or walnuts
    • Toasted pumpkin seeds
    • Balsamic Vinegar
    • Sour cream

    Sweet Ingredients:

    • Cinnamon
    • White granulated sugar
    • Brown sugar
    • Pure maple syrup
    • Raw honey

    Equipment needed:

    • ​Sharp knife
    • Sheet pan, baking dish, or roasting pan
    • Metal spoon

    Note: For a rundown of brands I suggest, take a look at the Kitchen Essential Tools page.

    Preparation

    • The first step is to Preheat the oven to 375 degrees Fahrenheit. 
    • To start with, wash the outside of the squash and then dry it off with a dish towel. 
    Washing the outside skin on the nutty squash before cooking it.
    • Place the squash on a cutting board. 
    • For the next step,  use a sharp knife to cut the top part of the squash off (Stem). 
    Cutting the stem off of the Cucurbita Moschata.
    • Next, use the sharp knife to split the squash into halves by cutting from the top to the bottom.  
    Cutting butternut squash into two halves.
    Use a sharp knife to split the butternut squash into two halves
    • Using the metal spoon, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits in both squash halves and discard them. 
    Scooping out the seeds and stringy bits from the soup squash part 1.
    Scooping out the seeds and stringy bits from soup squash part 2.
    • Place the squash halves on the prepared baking sheet pan, baking dish, or roasting pan. For an easy cleanup, line the pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil. 
    • Coat the inside with a little olive oil, then sprinkle a little sea salt over the surface. If you are using any of the optional ingredients, sprinkle them on at this time. I used rosemary when I cooked this one.  
    Adding olive oil to coat the sweet pumpkin so it will caramelize when roasting.
    Drizzle Olive Oil on the halves
    Brushing olive oil on the butternut squash.
    Brush the olive oil in
    Adding sea salt to the winter squash.
    Add sea salt
    Adding Rosemary to the butternut squash for flavor.
    add preferred seasoning

    Baking

    • Place the butternut squash into the preheated oven. 
    • Bake for 40 to 50 minutes until the squash is fork-tender. 
    Pear shaped squashed that has been roasted.
    Golden Roasted Butternut Squash

    Note: If you have a smaller butternut squash it may have a quicker cooking time such as 25-30 minutes.

    Serving

    To serve the Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash, allow it to cool enough to be able to handle. At that point, you can use a knife and cut sections to serve. It is safe to eat the peeling if you prefer or you can scoop out the flesh and eat it that way. 

    Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash recipe Pinterest picture.

    Variations

    This dish can be eaten savory or sweet. One variation I like to do is to scoop out the flesh and add other ingredients at this time so as a little butter, cinnamon, and brown sugar if you want a dish that is similar to Sweet potato mash. 

    What to Eat With Roasted Butternut Squash:

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash is not just a side dish; it's a warm embrace of the holiday season that brings comfort and joy to your holiday meals. Whether you're preparing a lavish Thanksgiving dinner or simply enjoying a meal with the whole family, this dish is sure to be a star on your table.

    Its sweet, caramelized perfection combined with the savory notes creates a symphony of flavors that will leave your taste buds singing. So, as you usher in the holiday season, remember that the simplest of recipes can often be the most cherished, uniting the whole family in a shared appreciation for the delicious moments life has to offer.

    ​Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
    Yield: 4

    Caramelized Butternut Squash Recipe

    Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash Recipe.

    Elevate holiday meals with Caramelized Baked Butternut Squash: sweet, savory, and perfect for Thanksgiving.

    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes
    Additional Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour

    Ingredients

    • 1 Butternut Squash
    • 1 tablespoon of olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon of sea salt

    Instructions

    Preparation

    • The first step is to Preheat the oven to 375 degrees Fahrenheit. 
    • To start with, wash the outside of the squash and then dry it off with a dish towel.
    • Place the squash on a cutting board. 
    • For the next step,  use a sharp knife to cut the top part of the squash off (Stem).
    • Next, use the sharp knife to split the squash into halves by cutting from the top to the bottom.  
    • Using the metal spoon, scoop out the seeds and stringy bits in both squash halves and discard them.
    • Place the squash halves on the prepared baking sheet pan, baking dish, or roasting pan. For an easy cleanup, line the pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
    • Coat the inside with a little olive oil, then sprinkle a little sea salt over the surface. If you are using any of the optional ingredients, sprinkle them on at this time. I used rosemary when I cooked this one.

    Baking   

    • Place the butternut squash into the preheated oven. 
    • Bake for 40 to 50 minutes until the squash is fork-tender.

    Notes

    Note: If you have a smaller butternut squash it may have a quicker cooking time such as 25-30 minutes.

    Nutrition Information:

    Yield:

    4

    Serving Size:

    1
    Amount Per Serving: Calories: 50Total Fat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 0mgSodium: 147mgCarbohydrates: 5gFiber: 2gSugar: 1gProtein: 0g

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American

    Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Welcome to a journey through the heart of Southern comfort cuisine! In the realm of classic dishes that evoke nostalgia and warmth, few can rival the time-honored delight of an Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole.

    Steeped in tradition and crafted with care, this culinary masterpiece captures the essence of Southern cooking, infusing it with the rich flavors of sweet potatoes, warm spices, brown sugar, and butter.

    Old fashioned southern sweet potato casserole.

    With each bite, you're transported to a simpler time, where family gatherings and cherished gatherings are accompanied by the irresistible aroma and taste of this beloved casserole. It is truly a favorite recipe around our area and one of my favorite sweet potato recipes. 

    What is Sweet Potato Casserole?

    Sweet Potato Casserole is classified as a Southern side dish that is dessert-like in many ways. It almost reminds you of sweet potato pie but the texture is not as smooth and there is no crust. It is easy to make and only requires a few simple ingredients to make it. 

    Old fashioned southern sweet potato casserole closeup shot.

    To make this casserole dish, you will combine fresh sweet potatoes that have been baked, the flesh is scooped out then mashed. It is then mixed with milk, eggs, sugar, and other ingredients to make the base. The topping is made of pecans, flour, butter, and brown sugar.  

    It is the perfect side dish for holiday meals, potluck, or family dinners such as Sunday dinner. This sweet potato side dish is the perfect make-ahead dish. It is often served alongside many traditional favorites such as turkey, Southern Cornbread Dressing, Mac and cheese, Old-fashioned Persimmon Pudding, and Southern-style green beans among other recipes.

    ​History of Southern Sweet Potato Casserole

    As with many dishes of the South, it is customary to have Southern Sweet Potato Casserole around the fall and winter holidays such as Thanksgiving and Christmas. Growing up in the South, this was always a traditional dish that was served at our family meals.

    Many of my aunts have made this dish as well as my mom. Now, as I have gotten married, the recipe has been passed on to my wife as a side dish that we bring to these events. 

    Being that this is such a popular dish in the South around this time, I wanted to go over the background of the humble sweet potato casserole and uncover some history of it. According to Tasting Table, the first recipe that can be traced dates back to the 1740s to a lady named Ameilia Simmons.

    Her recipe, which she called Potato Pudding, is the oldest written recipe for sweet potato casserole. 

    Close up of Southern Sweet Potato Casserole on a spoon.

    There are many variations of the dish from being topped with candied pecans to mini marshmallows. There are varying stories on how each one of these variations came to be with the marshmallows being a marketing scheme from the marshmallow company.

    Either way, the version we are sharing today doesn't include marshmallows but the candied pecans as we feel this is the more traditional version of Southern Sweet Potato Casserole. 

    Side Dish or Dessert?

    This is a question that often comes up when talking about Sweet Potato Casserole. Is it a side dish or a dessert? Well, that depends on who you ask. I will say that around our area, most of the time the Sweet Potato Casserole ends up on the table with the side dishes and not the dessert.  What about around your house? I would love to hear what you think. 

    Old fashioned Southern Sweet potato Casserole Pinterest Picture.

    The reason people cannot decide where to put this classic recipe is because it is sweet, similar in taste to Sweet Potato Pie but without a crust. Some sweet potato casseroles are even topped with mini marshmallows, although this recipe does not include them as we are making the more traditional sweet potato casserole. 

    This recipe is a staple in the deep South on the holiday table for Thanksgiving dinner but also on other holidays such as Christmas dinner or Easter dinner. Many people even make it for Sunday Dinner. This is truly a Southern Staple and a very easy recipe to make for a side dish. 

    Now if you are looking for a recipe that truly first squarely in the dessert category for fall time, I have the perfect one for you. You are going to love Southern Food Junkie Pumpkin Squares!

    How To Make It

    Now we will cover the ingredients and the process by which to make this recipe for best results.  A recipe card is located at the bottom of the post with the amounts for each ingredient, read on.

    Tools you will need

    Ingredients

    Base

    • Sweet potatoes
    • Melted butter
    • White sugar
    • Cinnamon
    • Eggs
    • Vanilla extract
    • Milk
    • Salt
    Sweet Potato Casserole Base ingredients.

    Topping

    • Chopped pecans
    • All-purpose flour
    • Brown sugar
    • Melted butter
    Sweet potato casserole recipe topping ingredients.

    Preparing the Sweet Potatoes

    There are a few ways to prepare the sweet potatoes. Some folks like to peel them and parboil them. Others like to bake the potatoes or cook them in the microwave like a baked potato. I prefer to bake them if I have time as I feel it gives them a deep rich depth of flavor that I love.

    If I am short on time, I will use the microwave to cook them in a shorter time frame. Typically this is how I prepare them.

    Boiling them would be my least favorite way but you can do it that way if you prefer. But parboiling sweet potatoes is useful for other recipes.

    In this recipe, we are going to cover how to bake them and microwave them. 

    Note: ​To begin with, wash the sweet potatoes and dry them off. 

    washing and scrubbing a sweet potato before cooking it.

    Oven Baking Method

    • Put a light coating of olive oil or other vegetable oil on the outside of the sweet potatoes. Then prick the outside of the potatoes with a fork.
    using a fork to puncture holes in a sweet potato.
    coating the skin of a sweet potato with olive oil.
    • Place the Sweet Potatoes on a cookie or baking sheet and bake at 425 degrees Fahrenheit for 45 minutes or until the potatoes are tender. 

    Microwave Method

    • Put a light coating of olive oil or other vegetable oil on the outside of the sweet potatoes. Then prick the outside of the potatoes with a fork.
    using a fork to puncture holes in a sweet potato.
    coating the skin of a sweet potato with olive oil.
    • Place potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. Cook for 5 minutes per sweet potato, then check. Rotate sweet potatoes and cook for an additional 1 minute or until they are tender. 4 medium-sized size sweet potatoes took me 20 minutes to cook in the microwave.  
    Putting sweet potato in the microwave on a microwave safe plate.

    Creating the Base Mixture

    This base mixture will be the main component of the Sweet Potatoe Casserole.

    • Remove the sweet potato mash (insides) from the skins.
    Peeling the skin off of the sweet potatoes.
    The peeling should peel right off if they are at the correct doneness
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the tender sweet potatoes with the butter, sugar, beaten eggs, vanilla extract, cinnamon, salt, and milk. Blend until smooth. You can use a hand mixer or stand mixer for this if you wish.
    Melted butter
    adding sugar to the recipe.
    Sugar
    Beaten eggs
    Cinnamon
    Milk
    adding vanilla extract to the recipe.
    Salt
    Vanilla extract
    Using a hand mixer to mix all the ingredients together to create the base layer for Sweet Potato Casserole.
    Mixing together with a hand mixer
    • Pour the mixture into the 9x13 baking dish or casserole dish.
    Spraying cooking spray in a 9x13 casserole dish to help prevent sticking of the recipe.
    Greasing 9x13 casserole dish
    Pour mixture in dish
    Spread it evenly
    • Make sure to level the mixture by giving it a couple of side-to-side shakes or using the back of a spoon.

    Preparing the Topping

    • In a small bowl, mix the chopped pecans, all-purpose flour, brown sugar, and butter together until fully incorporated. 
    Chopped pecans
    Flour
    Brown sugar
    Melted butter
    Mix the topping ingredients together
    This is how the topping should look after it has been mixed up.
    This is how the topping should look after being mixed up
    • Spread the Pecan topping mixture over top of the base mixture until it is evenly covered. A fork works great to spread the mixture around. Also, it may not completely cover the entire mixture, but this is okay.
    Spread the topping evening across the casserole.

    Baking

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Place the assembled casserole in the oven for 30 minutes or until the top is golden brown.

    Serving

    Allow the casserole to cool slightly before serving. It is best served warm and not chilled. This casserole can be made ahead of time and reheated before eating. If preferred, garnish lightly with powdered sugar.

    Sweet Potato Casserole closeup on a serving spoon.

    What to Serve it With

    Southern Sweet Potato Casserole is one of my favorite Holiday Recipes. I love to serve it alongside these other awesome dishes. such as Crock Pot Mac and Cheese or Southern Baked Macaroni. It also goes great with Deviled Eggs, collard greens, Pork Chops, Smoked Turkey, Fried Turkey, or Baked Turkey.

    If you are serving it for Easter Dinner, Glazed Ham goes great with Sweet Potato Casserole along with these homemade biscuits from scratch!

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, the Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole is a true testament to the heart and soul of Southern cooking. This beloved dish takes us on a journey through the flavors and traditions that have been cherished for generations.

    As we've embarked on this culinary adventure, we've witnessed the transformation of humble sweet potatoes into a masterpiece of sweet, spice, and comforting flavors. The harmonious blend of ingredients, from the creamy sweet potato base to the irresistible layer of crusted-candied pecans, reminds us of the magic that happens when simple, wholesome ingredients come together with love and care.

    ​FAQ's

    What is the difference between a Sweet Potato and a Yam?

    Sweet potato and Yam are different root vegetables. Many times you will see stores mention yams or sweet potatoes interchangeably when actually they are referring to Sweet Potatoes. They are not the same and they actually taste quite different from each other. Sweet potatoes have orange flesh and Yams have white or off-white flesh. It turns out that the reason for all the confusion was how sweet potatoes were marketed back in the early 1900s to try to sell the root vegetable. The term stuck, and it is often mislabeled to this day.

    Can I make this recipe in advance?

    Yes, this side dish can be made in advance. Make sure to warm the Sweet Potato Casserole up before serving though.

    How can I store this recipe?

    You can store this recipe in an airtight container or cover the casserole dish with aluminum foil and place it in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

    Is this recipe just for special occasions?

    No, this recipe can be made as a side dish anytime you wish. It is often served alongside Sunday dinner or church functions in the American South.

    Can I use canned yams?

    Yes, you can use canned yams. Although what is in the can is actually Sweet Potatoes and not yams. Use two big cans and make sure to drain them. You may want to adjust the sugar as the Canned yams typically are in syrup. You may even want to wash or rinse the yams first.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35​

    - Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole Recipe

    Old fashioned Southern sweet potato casserole

    Sweet Potato Casserole is classified as a Southern side dish that is dessert-like in many ways. It almost reminds you of sweet potato pie but the texture is not as smooth and there is no crust. It is easy to make and only requires a few simple ingredients to make it.

    Prep Time 25 minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes

    Ingredients

    Base Mixture

    • 5 to 6 medium sweet potatoes
    • 8 tablespoons of melted butter or a whole stick
    • 1 cup of white granulated sugar
    • ½ teaspoon of cinnamon
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 ½ teaspoons of vanilla extract
    • ½ cup of milk
    • ½ teaspoon of Kosher or Sea Salt

    Topping

    • 1 cup of chopped pecans
    • ½ cup of all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup brown sugar
    • 4 tablespoons of melted butter or half a stick.

    Instructions

    Note: Before beginning, wash and dry the sweet potatoes

    Preparing Sweet Potatoes

    Oven Baking Method:

    • Put a light coating of olive oil or other vegetable oil on the outside of the sweet potatoes. Then prick the outside of the potatoes with a fork.
    • Place the Sweet Potatoes on a cookie or baking sheet and bake at 425 degrees Fahrenheit for 45 minutes or until the potatoes are tender. 

    Microwave Method:

    • Put a light coating of olive oil or other vegetable oil on the outside of the sweet potatoes. Then prick the outside of the potatoes with a fork.
    • Place potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. Cook for 5 minutes per sweet potato, then check. Rotate sweet potatoes and cook for an additional 5 minutes or until they are tender. 4 medium size took me 20 minutes.

    Creating the Base Mixture

    • Remove the sweet potato mash (insides) from the skin.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the tender sweet potatoes with the butter, sugar, beaten eggs, vanilla extract, cinnamon, salt, and milk. Blend until smooth. You can use a hand mixer or stand mixer for this if you wish.
    • Pour the mixture into the 9x13 baking dish or casserole dish.
    • Make sure to level the mixture by giving it a couple of side-to-side shakes or using the back of a spoon.

    Preparing the Topping

    • Mix the chopped pecans, all-purpose flour, brown sugar, and butter together until fully incorporated. 
    • Spread the Pecan topping mixture over top of the base mixture until it is evenly covered. A fork works great to spread the mixture around. Note: it may not completely cover the entire surface but this is ok.

    Baking

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Place the assembled casserole in the oven for 30 minutes or until the top is golden brown.

    Serving

    Allow the casserole to cool slightly before serving. It is best served warm and not chilled. This casserole can be made ahead of time and reheated before eating. Garnish lightly with powdered sugar.

    Notes

    Make sure to wash and dry the potatoes before starting.

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams

    19 Things to Do in Maggie Valley North Carolina

    by 5 Comments

    Nestled in the heart of the Great Smoky Mountains, Maggie Valley, North Carolina, is a hidden gem that beckons adventurers, nature enthusiasts, and those in search of a tranquil mountain retreat. This picturesque town is a paradise for anyone seeking an escape from the hustle and bustle of city life and yearning for a taste of Appalachian culture.

    19 things to do in Maggie Valley, NC.

    With its breathtaking landscapes, outdoor adventures, and a rich tapestry of history you are sure to love this town.

    Maggie Valley offers a diverse array of activities and attractions that will leave you spellbound. In this comprehensive guide, we will take you on a journey through Maggie Valley, NC, unveiling the myriad experiences that await you.

    Whether you're a seasoned hiker looking to conquer the trails of the Great Smokies or a history buff eager to explore the town's rich heritage, Maggie Valley has something for everyone. Join us as we uncover the top things to do in Maggie Valley, NC, each one promising an unforgettable experience in this charming corner of North Carolina.

    Why I Love Maggie Valley, NC

    Every year we make the trip up to Maggie Valley in the fall. It has become an annual tradition for our family. One of the main reasons we love going there is that the area is so low-key. Most of the businesses there are owned by locals.

    This includes most of all of the restaurants in town. There are tons of restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC but one of our favorites is Joey’s Pancake House.

    I have fond memories of going to Maggie Valley, NC as a kid. My very first memories of any vacation were being in Maggie Valley. I fondly remember being at a motel carrying a stuffed animal bear that I had bought. I later found out that this motel is the newly renovated Route 19 motel, which we stayed at this past fall (2023). 

    Back then, people flooded the town to visit Ghost Town, a Western theme park that was built up on top of the mountain.

    Wife-Dad-Nephew on the Gunslinger at Ghost Town in the Sky (2007)

    Now that the park has closed, the small quaint town doesn't pull in nearly as many visitors as nearby Pigeon Forge, TN, which mimics Myrtle Beach in the mountains.

    But please, do not let that stop you from visiting Maggie Valley. Especially if you are an outdoor lover, and love a slower, less crowded pace. 

    It is still a great place to visit and make lasting memories in Western North Carolina. In this blog post, we will cover great activities in Maggie Valley (and the nearby surrounding area), shopping, and food. So, let's get to a few of the best things to do in Maggie Valley.  

    Things to do in Maggie Valley

    Maggie Valley is home to many fun activities whether you want to play golf, fish, joy ride, hike, or shop. I am going to share with you a few of our favorite things to do while we visit Maggie Valley, North Carolina besides just the obvious (Eating at Joey’s Pancake House).

    #1 Visit Cataloochee Valley

    We love to visit Cataloochee Valley. The trip up to Cataloochee Valley can be quite rough as part of it is a dirt road, but once you get inside the Great Smoky Mountains National Park, it is so worth the ride.

    Cataloochee is home to the Elk that was reintroduced in the early 2000s and this is the main reason why we go here. We sometimes stop in town and buy a sandwich to take there and have a picnic.

    Bull Elk walking in a field in Cataloochee Valley, North Carolina.

    There are many old buildings and houses located here. It will take you back in time to a place when things were simpler but a harder way of living. It is best to go early in the morning or late in the evening to see the elk, bear, or turkeys.

    The Caldwell House located across the creek in Cataloochee Valley, NC.
    The Caldwell House

    Cataloochee Valley is a picturesque and historic area located within the Great Smoky Mountains National Park in North Carolina. This valley is known for its stunning natural beauty, rich history, and diverse wildlife.

    Photo of the creek taken near the Caldwell House

    Here are some key features and information about Cataloochee Valley:

    1. Location: Cataloochee Valley is situated in the southeastern part of the Great Smoky Mountains National Park, which straddles the border of North Carolina and Tennessee. It is closer to the North Carolina side of the park.
    2. History: The valley was settled by European-American pioneers in the 19th century, and several families established homesteads there. Some of the historic buildings from this era, including homes, barns, and churches, have been preserved and can still be visited today.
    3. Wildlife: Cataloochee Valley is renowned for its diverse wildlife population. It is a prime location for viewing elk, which were reintroduced to the area in 2001. Visitors often come to watch these majestic animals in their natural habitat. Other wildlife species such as deer, coyote, turkey, and black bear can also be spotted.
    4. Scenic Beauty: The valley offers stunning scenic views, especially during the fall when the foliage turns vibrant shades of red, orange, and yellow. There are numerous hiking trails and overlooks that provide excellent opportunities for taking in the natural beauty of the area.
    5. Access: Cataloochee Valley can be reached by car, but a portion of the road leading into the valley is a narrow, winding, and unpaved mountain road. It is recommended that visitors check the road conditions before attempting to visit, especially during the winter months as it may be closed.
    6. Historic Structures: As mentioned earlier, the valley is home to several well-preserved historic structures, including the Palmer House, the Caldwell House, and the Cataloochee Church. These buildings provide a glimpse into the lives of the early settlers in the area.
    7. Hiking: There are various hiking trails in Cataloochee Valley, ranging from easy to moderate in difficulty. The trails offer opportunities to explore the valley's natural beauty and observe wildlife.
    8. Camping: If you are looking for campgrounds in Maggie Valley, NC, I suggest Cataloochee Campground, which offers a rustic camping experience within the national park.
    Elk grazing in the valley

    #2 Soco Falls

    If you are looking for a waterfall near Maggie Valley, let me suggest Soco Falls. If you dive up Highway 19 (Soco Road), headed towards Cherokee, North Carolina there is a pull-off on the left-hand side of the road. Here is where you can visit Soco Falls.

    Keep your eyes open, you will ride right past it. There is a little tiny sign that lets you know about it but it is hard to see. The parking is in a sharp curve on Soco rd and there isn’t much room for many cars.

    The pull off to Soco falls is very small. You will walk behind the guard rail and around the fence to access the trail.
    Parking lot for Soco Falls | Walk behind the guard rail and around the fence to access the trail.

    The trail to the waterfall is a very short walk but also it is a very steep trail. Just take your time and you can do it. Be careful if you go in the wintertime as the overspray from the waterfall will make the rocks and observation deck icy and slick. Just ask me how I know haha.

    Soco Falls

    #3 Scenic Blue Ridge Parkway

    Not far past Soco Falls is an entrance to the Blue Ridge Parkway. If you are looking for a scenic drive, this is the place to go. The Blue Ridge Parkway is noted for its scenic beauty and vast views of the mountains and valleys of the Smoky Mountains.

    Honey Bee on a native wildflower along the Blue Ridge Parkway

    There are many pull-offs and overlooks. A few of our favorites are Bunches Bald Overlook, Lickstone Overlook, and Plott Balsam Overlook. 

    Bunches Bald Overlook on the Blueridge Parkway near Maggie Valley, NC.

    The Blue Ridge Parkway is a breathtakingly scenic drive that winds its way through the Appalachian Highlands, offering unparalleled views of the Blue Ridge Mountains. Known for its stunning vistas, hiking trails, and opportunities for wildlife viewing, it's often considered one of America's most beautiful drives. 

    Overlook on the scenic Blueridge parkway.

    Spanning 469 miles from Virginia to North Carolina, this iconic highway is a meandering ribbon of road that showcases the natural beauty of the region, making it a must-visit destination for nature lovers and road-trippers alike.

    Overlook on the Blueridge Parkway.

    #4 Visit Nearby Waynesville, NC

    When we visit Maggie Valley, we always have to visit nearby Waynesville, NC. Waynesville is only a short 18-minute drive from Maggie Valley, so getting there is pretty quick.

    Photo Credit | Downtown Waynesville

    Waynesville has many unique shops. Not only do they have awesome shops but also the dining is epic too. I have compiled a list of my favorite 7 restaurants from the Waynesville area, make sure to check them out. Another must-visit shop is the Mast General Store. We stop in here every time we visit Waynesville.

    #5 Golf

    Maggie Valley is home to one of the prettiest golf courses I have ever seen. Although I have not played here yet, this is on my list of things to do one day. I have ridden around it and also stayed on it in the past and the course is so pretty.

    It is an excellent golf course that combines challenging play with beautiful mountain scenery. The Maggie Valley Club & Resort features an 18-hole championship golf course set against the backdrop of the Great Smoky Mountains.

    Photo Maggie Valley Golf Club.
    Photo Credit | Maggie Valley Golf Club

    Golfers of all skill levels can enjoy this course, which offers well-manicured fairways, strategically placed bunkers, and stunning views of the surrounding peaks. It's not just a golfing experience; it's a nature and relaxation retreat. Whether you're a seasoned golfer or a beginner looking to learn, this course offers a delightful golfing experience in the heart of Maggie Valley.

    #6 Lake Junaluska

    Lake Junaluska is a serene and picturesque destination nestled in the mountains of Western North Carolina, just a short drive from Maggie Valley.

    Picture at the overlook at Lake Junaluska in Waynesville, NC
    View of Lake Junaluska from the overlook

    This stunning lake is surrounded by lush forests and rolling hills, creating a peaceful and natural retreat for visitors of all ages.

    If you ride around the loop, about halfway through, there is a parking lot that overlooks the lake. There is a huge cross here and it is just so peaceful to get out of your vehicle and just sit and look.

    Huge Cross at the Overlook | Lake Junaluska

    #7 Visit Haywood Community College

    You may be thinking why visit a community college in the first place? The first time I visited this place, it was to play disc golf. They have a challenging but beautiful course.

    Disc Golf Course at HCC

    Haywood Community College, often abbreviated as HCC, is a vibrant educational institution located in Clyde, North Carolina, near Maggie Valley. Here's an overview of what you can expect to find at Haywood Community College. 

    There is a grist mill that the college students helped to build that is on-site. The landscaping around the grist mill and campus is so beautiful.

    Grist mill at the Haywood Community Collage.
    Grist Mill on-site at HCC

    There is a nice walking trail that goes around the campus if you want to get out and walk without hiking up mountains. Make sure to check out the Dahlia gardens while you are there as well. I recommend this place.

    Closeup of a Zinnia at the Haywood Community College Zinnia Garden.
    Dahlia | Picture taken at the Dahlia garden at HCC

    #8 Play Disc Golf

    Disc golf, also known as Frisbee golf, is a fun and challenging outdoor sport that combines elements of traditional golf with the use of flying discs, often referred to as "discs" or "frisbees." The objective of disc golf is to complete a course in as few throws as possible, similar to how golfers aim to complete a traditional golf course in as few strokes as possible. 

    Mando Hole on the disc golf course at HCC

    Haywood Community College offers a beautiful Course. If you are into Disc Golf and the rest of your crew is not, they can meander around the walking trail at the college while you get in a round of 18 holes of disc golf. 

    #9 Maggie Valley Hiking

    Maggie Valley is a great location to stay if you want to go hiking. There are tons of trails located nearby or just a short distance away. One of the more popular ones is the Waterrock Knob trail. It is located in the parking lot of the Waterrock Knob overlook. 

    Hiking in the Great Smoky Mountain National Park.
    Hiking Juney Whank Falls Trail

    A few other popular hiking trails are Alum Cave Trail, Max Patch, Big Creek Trail, Black Balsam Knob, Deep Creek Loop Trail, and Juney Whank Falls Trail, among many others. 

    #10 Cataloochee Ski Area and Tube World

    If you visit Maggie Valley in the wintertime, you can ski or tube! Tube World is located right across from Ghost Town in the sky, and Cataloohcee Ski Area is located up the road beside Ghost Town. You turn into the parking lot and follow the road up to the top of the hill.

    Cataloochee Ski Area is a popular winter sports destination located in Maggie Valley, North Carolina, within the Great Smoky Mountains. Known for its beautiful mountain setting and reliable snow conditions, Cataloochee Ski Area offers a range of winter activities for both beginners and experienced skiers and snowboarders.

    #11 Maggie Valley Festival Grounds

    Maggie Valley is home to many festivals throughout the year that draw crowds from all over. From Mini truck rallies to Moonshine festivals to the Rally in the Valley motorcycle rallies. I even recently came across a Jeep Rally as well. 

    The Maggie Valley Festival Grounds is a popular outdoor venue located in Maggie Valley, North Carolina. This scenic venue hosts a variety of events, festivals, and activities throughout the year, making it a hub for community gatherings and entertainment.

    Here's some information about the Maggie Valley Festival Grounds:

    1. Event Hosting: The Maggie Valley Festival Grounds hosts a diverse range of events, including music festivals, car shows, craft fairs, and more. It's a versatile space that accommodates both large and small gatherings.
    2. Scenic Location: The grounds are nestled in the picturesque Great Smoky Mountains, providing a beautiful natural backdrop for events. The surrounding mountain views add to the charm of the venue.
    3. Music Festivals: The venue is known for hosting music festivals featuring various genres, from bluegrass and country to rock and folk. These festivals often draw both local and nationally renowned artists and bands.
    4. Car Shows: Car enthusiasts will appreciate the classic car shows and automotive events that take place at the Maggie Valley Festival Grounds. These events showcase vintage cars, hot rods, and other unique vehicles.
    5. Craft Fairs and Art Shows: Craftsmen and artisans often display their creations at craft fairs and art shows held on the grounds. These events provide an opportunity to shop for handmade goods and unique gifts.
    6. Community Gatherings: The venue also hosts community events, gatherings, and fundraisers, fostering a strong sense of community in Maggie Valley.
    7. Food and Beverages: Depending on the event, you may find food vendors and concessions offering a variety of delicious treats and refreshments.
    8. Family-Friendly Atmosphere: Many events at the Maggie Valley Festival Grounds are family-friendly, making it a great place to bring the whole family for a day of fun and entertainment.

    To attend an event at the Maggie Valley Festival Grounds or to learn more about upcoming events and activities, it's recommended to check their official website or contact the venue directly for the most current information.

    #12 Horseback Riding

    If you want to see the mountains differently, give horseback riding a try. There are a few companies that have horses you can ride and a guide to take you out on the trail.

    One place that comes to mind that is located near Cataloochee Ski area is Cataloochee Ranch. 

    #13 Dining

    Now eating is one of our favorite things to do (after all we are a food site) while we are out of town, and Maggie Valley and the surrounding areas have no shortage of great places to visit. I even compiled a list of my favorite 7 restaurants in nearby Waynesville. 

    Clyde's Dinner decorated for fall
    Clyde's dinner in Waynesville, NC decorated for fall

    If you are looking for breakfast, I love Joey's Pancake house. It is one of my favorite breakfast places.

    Additionally, here are a couple more restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC that I recommend: If you're in the mood for BBQ, Butts on the Creek is excellent, especially if you prefer not to travel to Waynesville. For Italian cuisine, I always enjoy dining at Frankies Italian Trattoria.

    There are many others to choose from in and around Maggie Valley as well.

    #14 Visit Nearby Bryson City

    Located about 40 minutes away is a town called Bryson City. This small town is home to the Great Smoky Mountain Railway.

    Mural on a wall in Bryson City, NC.
    Mural on the back of a building in Downtown Bryson City, NC

    If you want to see the fall leaves changing color in a new and exciting way, take a ride through the mountains in an open-air train car. This is such a cool experience. 

    While in Bryson City, NC, visit the road to Nowhere, also known by its real name, Lakeview Drive. It is a road that was built back in the 1960s. The story goes that when Fontana Dam was being built, Fontana Lake was going to flood the town.

    Road to nowhere in Bryson City, NC.
    Road to Nowhere | Bryson City, NC

    The government agreed to build this road to allow access to graveyards that were on the other side. The road was started but never finished after running into many issues, such as environmental issues and rising costs to complete the project.

    You can now visit this area, which is located on the far eastern edge of the Great Smoky Mountains National Parkway. There is a parking lot, then you get out and can walk through the tunnel. It is pretty cool to see.

    Our family standing in front of the tunnel on the road to nowhere in Bryson City, NC.

    While in town, grab a bite to eat at Nate and Nicks Pizza, and try the Smoky Mountain BBQ Chicken Pizza there. It is so good. There is also a public aquarium in Bryson City, North Carolina that houses species of fish and amphibians that are native to the area which is pretty neat to see.

    A picture of a Tiger Trout in an aquarium in Bryson City, NC.
    Tiger Trout | Appalachian Rivers Aquarium Bryson City, NC

    #15 Stompin' Ground

    If you want to experience true Appalachian culture, live music, and clogging, head on down to Stompin' Grounds. This is a great option on Saturday nights.

    Make sure to check their schedule for the best time to visit as they are not open every weekend or throughout the whole year. The group that dances travels to other areas for shows. 

    The Stompin' Grounds is the self-proclaimed Clogging capital of the world, while you are here, you can listen to bluegrass music, old country music, clogging, square dancing, and line dancing. It is a must-see. 

    #16 Wheels Through Time Museum

    "Wheels Through Time" is a famous motorcycle museum located in Maggie Valley, North Carolina. Founded by Dale Walker, the museum is renowned for its extensive collection of vintage and rare motorcycles. It has also been featured on the History Channel hit show " American Pickers" many times. 

    Here's some information about Wheels Through Time:

    1. Motorcycle Collection: The museum boasts a remarkable collection of over 350 rare and historic motorcycles. These bikes span various eras, from the early 20th century to more recent decades. Visitors can see a wide range of brands, including Harley-Davidson, Indian, Excelsior, and many others.
    2. Interactive Experience: Wheels Through Time is not your typical museum; it offers an interactive and immersive experience. Many of the motorcycles on display are in running condition.
    3. Restoration Workshops: The museum has an on-site restoration shop where visitors can witness the meticulous process of bringing vintage motorcycles back to life. The restoration team often shares their expertise and knowledge with enthusiasts.
    4. Other Vintage Vehicles: In addition to motorcycles, Wheels Through Time also features a variety of vintage cars, memorabilia, and related artifacts that provide insights into the history of motorcycling in America.
    5. Special Exhibits: The museum frequently hosts special exhibits and events, highlighting specific aspects of motorcycle history or showcasing unique pieces from their collection. Check their website or social media for the latest updates on exhibits and events.
    6. Retail Shop: Visitors can shop for motorcycle-related merchandise and memorabilia at the museum's gift shop, including apparel, books, and collectibles.

    Wheels Through Time is not just a museum for motorcycle enthusiasts; it's a place where history comes to life, offering a captivating journey through the evolution of American motorcycling. It's a must-visit destination for anyone interested in the history of motorcycles and the role they've played in American culture. 

    Please note that operating hours and admission fees may vary, so it's a good idea to check their official website for the most current information before planning your visit. Come check out Dale's Wheels!

    #17 ​Great Smoky Mountain National Park

    The Great Smoky Mountains National Park is a cherished and iconic national park located on the border of North Carolina and Tennessee in the Southeastern United States. It's renowned for its breathtaking natural beauty, diverse ecosystems, and rich cultural history. It is also the most visited National Park in the United States. 

    Here's an overview of what you can expect when visiting the Great Smoky Mountains National Park

    1. Scenic Beauty: The park is characterized by its stunning mountain landscapes, dense forests, cascading waterfalls, and misty valleys. It's known for its ethereal smoky mist that often hangs over the peaks, giving the park its name.
    2. Hiking Trails: The park offers a vast network of hiking trails, catering to all levels of hikers. Whether you're seeking a short, family-friendly hike or a challenging backcountry adventure, there are options for everyone. Some popular trails lead to scenic viewpoints, historic structures, or waterfalls.
    3. Wildlife Viewing: The Great Smokies are home to a diverse array of wildlife, including black bears, white-tailed deer, wild turkeys, elk, and a variety of bird species. Wildlife enthusiasts will find ample opportunities for observation and photography.
    4. Auto Tours: The park features several scenic drives, including the Cades Cove Loop Road and the Newfound Gap Road, which offer panoramic views and opportunities to spot wildlife. Fall foliage drives are particularly popular.
    5. Cultural Heritage: The park preserves a rich cultural history, with historic structures such as churches, cabins, and grist mills from the Appalachian pioneer era. The Oconaluftee Visitor Center and Mountain Farm Museum provide insights into the region's history. You may also see the Elk from Cataloochee Valley grazing in the fields of the Oconaluftee Visitor Center. 
    6. Camping and Picnicking: The park offers a range of campgrounds and picnic areas for those looking to immerse themselves in the natural surroundings. Camping is available for both tents and RVs.
    7. Visitor Centers: Several visitor centers throughout the park provide information, maps, exhibits, and ranger-led programs to enhance your understanding of the park's natural and cultural resources.
    8. Fishing: The park boasts numerous streams and rivers, making it a popular destination for fishing. Anglers can try their luck at catching trout and other native fish species.
    9. Seasonal Activities: Depending on the season, the park offers unique activities such as wildflower hikes in spring, synchronous firefly viewing in early summer, and snowshoeing in winter.
    Cades Cove | Townsend, TN

    The Great Smoky Mountains National Park is also designated as a UNESCO World Heritage Site and International Biosphere Reserve due to its ecological significance.

    It attracts millions of visitors each year who come to enjoy its natural wonders and recreational opportunities. Whether you're an outdoor adventurer, a nature enthusiast, or someone seeking a peaceful retreat, the Great Smoky Mountains National Park has something to offer everyone.

    ​​#18 Maggie Mountaineer Crafts

    This store is one of our favorite places to shop when we are in Maggie Valley. We always stop here heading home and take our annual fall picture in front of the store. We also buy freshly picked mountain apples to bring home to our friends and family. 

    Our Annual fall picture in front on Maggie Mountaineer Crafts.

    Maggie Mountaineer Crafts is one of those unique stores that you find in small towns like Maggie Valley. 

    They have the usual gifts you see at stores throughout Western NC such as Hillbilly gag gifts, Maggie Valley T-shirts, magnets, souvenirs, etc. In addition, they also sell fresh fudge, honey, jams, jellies, and other items along those lines.  

    #19 Mini Golf

    Miniature golf, often referred to as mini golf or putt-putt, is a fun and family-friendly activity that can be enjoyed in Maggie Valley, North Carolina. You have the choice between two places to play mini golf in Maggie Valley. Furthermore, both are unique in their way and both have been in operation for many years. 

    1. Fantasy Golf & Game Room: Located in Maggie Valley, Fantasy Golf & Game Room offers a classic mini-golf experience with 18 holes. It's a great place for families and groups to enjoy a round of miniature golf. They also have an arcade game room for additional entertainment.
    2. Maggie Valley Carpet Golf: This mini golf course is situated in the heart of Maggie Valley and offers 18 holes of miniature golf. It's designed to provide a fun and challenging experience for visitors of all ages. Per their Facebook Page, "Two 18-hole championship courses for lots of family fun!
      Family Owned And Operated Since 1963."

    Please verify the status and operating hours of these mini golf courses before planning your visit, as seasonal variations and maintenance schedules can affect their availability. Enjoy a round of mini golf as part of your recreational activities while exploring the beautiful Maggie Valley area.

    Conclusion

    In conclusion, Maggie Valley, North Carolina, is a hidden gem nestled in the heart of the Great Smoky Mountains, offering a diverse range of activities and attractions for visitors seeking natural beauty, outdoor adventures, and a taste of Appalachian culture. From the majestic landscapes of the Great Smoky Mountains National Park to the excitement of the Cataloochee Ski Area in winter, and the rich history at Wheels Through Time museum, Maggie Valley has something to offer every traveler.

    Whether you're hiking through lush forests, exploring the scenic Blue Ridge Parkway, or enjoying the serenity of Lake Junaluska, the possibilities for adventure and relaxation are endless. And don't forget to savor the local cuisine, take in the charm of the Maggie Valley Festival Grounds, and immerse yourself in the cultural heritage of this welcoming mountain town.

    Maggie Valley is more than just a destination; it's an invitation to reconnect with nature, create lasting memories, and experience the warm hospitality of a community steeped in tradition. So, whether you're seeking outdoor thrills or a tranquil escape, embark on your Maggie Valley adventure and discover the magic of this enchanting corner of North Carolina.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35​

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    How to Make Baked Sweet Potato in the Microwave

    by Leave a Comment

    Are you Looking for a quick and hassle-free way to enjoy the deliciousness of baked sweet potatoes? Look no further! Our guide will show you how to make perfectly tender and flavorful baked sweet potato in the microwave. 

    How to bake sweet potato in the microwave.

    This method not only saves you time but also ensures you have a delightful side dish or snack in a matter of minutes. Whether you're in a rush, craving a nutritious treat, or simply looking to simplify your cooking routine, this microwave-baked sweet potato recipe has got you covered.

    With a few simple steps, you'll have a piping hot, fluffy sweet potato ready to enjoy, complete with your favorite toppings. So, let's dive in and discover how to make this microwave marvel!

    Why a Microwave Baked Sweet Potato

    You may ask yourself, why should I make microwaved sweet potato? The key may come down to convenience and quickness.

    Putting sweet potato in the microwave on a microwave safe plate.

    Whether you want to cook a baked sweet potato for a side dish or snack, or you need the sweet potatoes cooked for a recipe such as Old Fashioned Southern Sweet Potato Casserole, baking or cooking them in the microwave is so convenient! 

    This cooking process is by far the best one I have found yet and it is my favorite way to bake a sweet potato. It is almost a foolproof method.

    Baking a sweet potato in the oven the conventional way can take upwards of an hour to an hour and a half. Cooking in the microwave takes a fraction of the time and will reduce the cooking time down to five to ten minutes. As you can see, the microwave is far superior and by far the fastest way to cook a sweet potato. 

    Picture of a oven opened with the words "baking in the oven can take upwards of an hour."

    A Perfect Side Dish

    Sweet potatoes make a perfect and easy side dish. They are a much healthier option than their cousins the regular potatoes (white potatoes), and are packed with nutrients such as fiber, vitamins, and minerals.

    Closeup picture of a baked sweet potato with butter and cinnamon sugar.
    Baked sweet potato with butter, cinnamon, and sugar.

    According to Healthline, sweet potatoes are nutritious, good for your gut, may have cancer-fighting properties, support healthy vision, may help with brain function, and support your immune health. No wonder so many people love them. 

    Not only can they be part of a healthy meal as a side dish, but they can also make the perfect main dish meal. Add a little grilled chicken or pork tenderloin on top for a well-rounded meal. 

    How to cook baked sweet potato

    The ingredients for this recipe are super simple, you really only need a few things. I am also going to include optional toppings as well. Don't forget to check the recipe card down below for a printable recipe so you can save it for later. 

    Ingredients

    • Medium sweet potato- If you have a larger one, you may need to adjust the cooking time. 
    • Olive oil: This makes the skin of a sweet potato tender. If you do not like olive oil, use coconut oil or any vegetable oil you wish.  

    Optional (sweet) toppings

    • Pat of butter
    • Sprinkle of cinnamon and sugar
    • Brown sugar
    • Marshmellow fluff
    • Honey
    • Maple syrup

    Optional (savory) toppings

    • Salt
    • Black pepper
    • Garlic powder
    • Cumin

    Tools needed to make baked sweet potato in the microwave

    • Microwave
    • Fork
    • Paring knife
    • Oven mitt
    • Microwave-safe plate
    • Tea towel

    Note: For a rundown of brands I suggest, take a look at the Kitchen Essential Tools page.

    Preparation

    • Wash and scrub the sweet potato to remove any dirt. Make sure to dry it afterward.
    washing and scrubbing a sweet potato before cooking it.
    • Using the fork tines, punch small holes around the sweet potato. 
    using a fork to puncture holes in a sweet potato.
    • Rub a little olive oil on the skin of the potato. 
    coating the skin of a sweet potato with olive oil.
    Picture of what the sweet potato looks like after coating it in olive oil.
    Sweet potato with holes to let steam escape and coated in oil.

    Microwaving

    • Place on a microwave-safe plate.
    Putting sweet potato in the microwave on a microwave safe plate.
    • Cover the sweet potato with a damp paper towel or a microwave-safe cover.
    • Microwave on high power.
    • For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork tender.

    Pro Tip: Adjust the time depending on the size of the potato. If you have a larger potato, after 5 minutes, microwave in 30-second increments then check the potato to see if the center of the potato is done. 

    How to Serve Baked Sweet Potato

    • Cut the potato with the paring knife down the center and let the steam escape.
    Using a paring knife to cut open the baked sweet potato.
    cutting the potato down the middle with a paring knife.
    • Using a kitchen towel, grab each end and push towards the center.
    Using a tea towel to push the ends to open up the middle of the baked sweet potato first photo.
    Using a tea towel to push the ends to open up the middle of the baked sweet potato second photo.
    • This will cause the potato to form a pocket where you will add your toppings. Add toppings of choice. 
    adding cinnamon sugar.
    Cinnamon Sugar
    adding a pat of butter.
    Adding a pat of butter

    Conclusion

    In just a matter of minutes, you've learned how to create a delectable side dish that's not only quick and convenient but also brimming with nutrition and flavor. Baked sweet potatoes in the microwave are a culinary marvel that proves that fast doesn't mean sacrificing taste.

    Whether you're looking to add color to your plate, satisfy your sweet tooth the healthy way, or simply enjoy a fuss-free culinary experience, these tender and customizable gems are your answer. So, savor each bite, experiment with toppings, and make this your go-to side dish for any occasion. Happy cooking!

    FAQ's

    How much time does it take to bake a sweet potato in the microwave?

    For a typical medium sweet potato, it takes 5-6 minutes on high power in the microwave.

    Does a microwaved sweet potato taste different than one cooked in the oven?

    To me, a sweet potato cooked in the oven has a slightly richer flavor, most would not be able to tell though.

    Why is my sweet potato hard after microwaving?

    The simple answer is you have not cooked it long enough. Try cooking for additional time in 1-minute to 30-second intervals until the center is tender when pricked with the tines of a fork.

    Should I peel sweet potatoes?

    If baking in the oven or microwave, there is no need to peel a sweet potato. If you prefer to parboil them, you may want to peel them first.

    Do I need to poke holes in the sweet potato before baking?

    Yes. Poking holes allows the steam to escape while baking which helps the sweet potato to cook faster.

    Can I eat the skin of a microwaved sweet potato?

    Yes. The skin of the microwave sweet potato is safe to eat and also nutritious according to many experts.

    Is it better to microwave or bake a sweet potato?

    The simple answer is the microwave is best if you are in a time crunch. One that has been baked may have a richer flavor. Some experts claim that boiling or microwaving sweet potato allows the vitamins to remain intact in the peeling while baking can diminish it.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35​

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
    Yield: 1

    How to Make Baked Sweet Potato in the Microwave

    baked sweet potato in the microwave.

    Quick & healthy microwave-baked sweet potatoes - a perfect side dish in minutes! Enjoy natural sweetness & customizable toppings.

    Prep Time 2 minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes
    Total Time 2 minutes

    Ingredients

    • Medium sweet potato
    • Olive oil (or other neutral oil)

    Sweet Toppings

    • Butter
    • Cinnamon and Sugar
    • marshmallow fluff
    • Honey
    • Maple syrup

    Savory Toppings

    • Salt
    • Black pepper
    • Garlic powder
    • Cumin

    Instructions

    Preparation

    • Wash and scrub the sweet potato to remove any and all dirt. Make sure to dry it afterward.
    • Using the fork tines, punch small holes around the sweet potato. 
    • Rub a little olive oil on the skin of the potato. 

    Microwaving

    • Place on the microwave-safe plate.
    • Cover the sweet potato with a damp paper towel or a microwave-safe cover.
    • Microwave on high power.
    • For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork tender.
    • Adjust the time depending on the size of the potato. If you have a larger potato, after 5 minutes, microwave in 30-second increments and check the potato to see if the center of the potato is done.

    Serving

    Cut the potato with the paring knife down the center and let the steam escape. Using a kitchen towel, grab each end and push towards the center. This will cause the potato to form a pocket where you will add your toppings. Add toppings of choice. 

    Did you make this recipe?

    Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

    © Ronnie Williams
    Cuisine: American

    Unraveling the Truth: Is Zucchini Bread Healthy?

    by Leave a Comment

    Zucchini bread, with its tantalizing aroma and moist texture, has become a beloved treat for many. Often touted as a healthier alternative to conventional baked goods, this delightful bread incorporates the goodness of zucchini, a nutrient-rich vegetable. But amidst the accolades and mouthwatering recipes, the question lingers: is Zucchini bread genuinely a healthy option?

    Zucchini Bread Recipe over head shot.

    In this blog post, we embark on a culinary journey to uncover the truth about zucchini bread's healthiness. We will delve into the nutritional aspects of zucchini, explore the typical ingredients used in various recipes, and evaluate how its preparation impacts its overall nutritional profile.

    So, let's set aside our preconceptions and take a closer look at the facts behind the delectable world of zucchini bread. Are you ready to slice through the myths and savor the truth about this beloved baked good? Let's get started!

    Let's get right to the point, Is Zucchini Bread Healthy?

    ​The simple answer to this question is Zucchini Bread is a Healthier option than many traditional baked breads. But, there is more to this answer than a simple yes or no. To thoroughly answer this question, we must first look at what Zucchini bread is and then break down the recipe to uncover the ingredients. If you want to know how to make zucchini bread, this Grandma's Best Zucchini Bread recipe is my absolute favorite!

    zucchini bread slice closeup.

    What is Zucchini Bread?

    You may be wondering, why make Zucchini bread and what it tastes like. Zucchini bread is a quick bread recipe similar to Banana Nut Bread. Instead of using Bananas though, It contains shredded Zucchini. 

    This recipe combines simple ingredients to make this classic zucchini bread recipe. In addition, adding this summer squash to the bread gives the bread a wonderful texture and adds moisture. Since Zucchini is full of water, it helps the bread to stay moist, just like the Bananas in Banana Bread. 

    Also,  if you have a vegetable garden once mid-summer hits there is an abundance of zucchini. It can become hard to find new ways to use garden zucchini so this is one of our favorite ways to use that abundance of the summer crop from our garden.  

    Zucchini.

    Zucchini, also called courgette, is a very mild-tasting summer squash. Since it is so mild tasting, it doesn't impart much flavor to the bread. Rather it helps it maintain moisture. Zucchini does have more flavor once it has been cooked. It also adds some nutrient content to the bread in the way of vitamins and fiber.

    Zucchini bread also has many other wonderful ingredients that make this wonderful bread recipe so delicious such as Cinnamon and nuts. 

    Zucchini Bread Ingredients

    These are the main ingredients you will need to make this homemade Zucchini Bread:

    • Flour: This recipe calls for all-purpose flour. 
    • Salt: Enhances the flavor of the bread. Do not omit this, your bread will taste flat. I prefer to use sea salt or Kosher salt. 
    • Baking Powder and Baking Soda: These are the leaveners that allow the bread to rise. Make sure to use this amount specified or the bread will not rise correctly. Quick breads call for more Leveners than other breads since they tend to be moist and heavy.  
    • Cinnamon: We love the warmness that cinnamon adds to this bread. 
    • Oil: We like to use a neutral oil such as any vegetable oil. A healthier alternative would be to use Olive oil or avocado oil. If using Olive Oil, make sure to use an extra virgin oil that is light in taste if you decide to go that route. 
    • Sugar: We are going to use white sugar and brown sugar. There are a few healthier alternatives such as honey, maple syrup, coconut sugar, date sugar, and stevia.
    • Zucchini: Make sure to get fresh Zucchini. Also, do not use large zucchini. They can have a bitter taste and will be mushy when you grate them. You want medium firm fruit to use. You will need 2 cups of grated zucchini.
    • Eggs: Eggs add to the moisture of the bread, provide structure, and bind the ingredients together. 
    • Vanilla Extract: We prefer to use vanilla extract over vanilla flavoring. It is a better quality ingredient and enhances the flavor more. 
    • Nuts: You can use pecan or Walnuts. Both add a crunch to the bread giving it a better texture. Either one balances the flavor of the bread.

    The main two ingredients that are not healthy in this recipe is the flour and sugar. For the flour, you could experiment with swapping out some of the regular all-purpose flour for whole wheat flour for a healthier alternative. For the sugar, you could experiment with other sugar alternatives such as honey, maple syrup, date sugar, coconut sugar, or Stevia. 

    White sugar

    Pros and Cons of Zucchini Bread

    Pros

    Here are some reasons why zucchini bread can be considered healthy:

    1. Zucchini: Zucchini is a nutritious vegetable that provides essential vitamins and minerals, such as vitamin C, potassium, and manganese.
    2. Fiber: Zucchini is a good source of dietary fiber, which promotes digestive health and helps regulate blood sugar levels.
    3. Reduced sugar: Many zucchini bread recipes use less sugar than conventional sweet bread recipes, making it a healthier option for those watching their sugar intake.
    4. Substitutes: Some recipes replace part or all of the refined flour with whole wheat or other healthier alternatives, increasing the fiber and nutrient content.
    5. Healthy fats: Some recipes incorporate more beneficial fats like olive oil or avocado instead of butter or margarine.

    However, not all zucchini bread recipes are created equal. Some variations may still contain significant amounts of refined flour, added sugars, and unhealthy fats. Additionally, some recipes call for chocolate chips, nuts, or other additions that can increase the calorie and fat content.

    Chocolate chips.

    Cons

    While zucchini bread has its merits, there are some cons to consider before indulging in this tasty treat:

    1. Calorie Content: Despite the addition of zucchini, which provides moisture and nutrients, zucchini bread can still be calorie-dense. The use of sugar, oil, nuts, and other ingredients in traditional recipes can contribute to higher calorie levels, which may not align with a calorie-restricted diet.
    2. Added Sugar: Many zucchini bread recipes call for added sugar to enhance the sweetness. Consuming excessive added sugar can lead to health issues such as weight gain, increased risk of type 2 diabetes, and tooth decay.
    3. Refined Flour: Most zucchini bread recipes use refined flour, which lacks the fiber and nutrients present in whole grains. Consuming large amounts of refined flour may lead to rapid spikes in blood sugar levels and offer fewer health benefits compared to whole grain alternatives.
    4. High Carbohydrate Content: Traditional zucchini bread can be high in carbohydrates, which may not be ideal for individuals on low-carb or ketogenic diets or those with specific blood sugar concerns.
    5. Limited Vegetable Benefits: While zucchini is a nutritious vegetable, the amount used in zucchini bread may not be sufficient to provide substantial health benefits. Other recipes might overshadow the nutritional value of zucchini with high amounts of sugar and unhealthy fats.
    6. Allergens and Sensitivities: Some zucchini bread recipes include nuts or other allergenic ingredients. This can be problematic for individuals with nut allergies or other dietary restrictions.
    7. Portion Control: Due to its delicious taste and texture, it's easy to overindulge in zucchini bread. Moderation is crucial to avoid consuming excessive calories and sugar.
    8. Commercial Varieties: Store-bought or commercially prepared zucchini bread may contain preservatives, artificial flavors, and other additives that can compromise its nutritional value.
    Grandma Beard's Best Zucchini recipe.

    In conclusion, while we looked at the question of is zucchini bread healthy, it is important to know that it can be a tasty and enjoyable treat. But it's essential to be mindful of its potential drawbacks.

    Making healthier versions at home by using whole grains, reducing added sugars, and choosing healthier fats can help mitigate some of the cons associated with traditional zucchini bread recipes. As with any food, enjoying zucchini bread in moderation as part of a balanced diet is key to reaping its benefits without falling victim to its potential downsides.

    Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
    John 6:35​

    -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

    Grandma’s Best Zucchini Bread Recipe

    by Leave a Comment

    Welcome to the delightful world of homemade goodness with a recipe that has stood the test of time – Grandma’s Best Zucchini Bread recipe! Passed down through generations, this time-honored treasure is a testament to the love and skill that only a grandmother's kitchen can provide. 

    Grandma Beard's Best Zucchini recipe.

    The Ultimate Zucchini Bread Recipe

    Bursting with the wholesome flavors of freshly grated zucchini, warm spices, and a touch of nostalgia, this delectable bread is a true celebration of comfort and tradition. Whether you're an avid baker or a novice in the kitchen, join us as we embark on a culinary journey that captures the essence of cherished family recipes and leaves your taste buds craving for more. 

    Zucchini bread recipe closeup in a bread pan hot out the oven.

    So, roll up your sleeves, dust off that mixing bowl, and let's unlock the secrets to creating this moist, fragrant, and utterly irresistible Zucchini Bread – just like Grandma Beard used to make. If this is your first time trying this recipe, you are in for a real treat. 

    Grandma's Zucchini Bread Recipe

    This Zucchini bread recipe contains just the right amount of sweetness for a moist and flavorful quick bread. Just like Grandma made it. It is perfect to enjoy hot out of the oven with a pat of butter or enjoy it for breakfast, a snack, or dessert any time of the day. 

    I love to have a slice hot out of the oven topped with a pat of butter. It smells so wonderful and so will your house. If you ever talk your friends into trying it, they will request you to make grandma's recipe all the time. 

    If you love making this homemade Zucchini bread, you are going to love making this Homemade Sourdough Bread that uses a Potato Flake Starter!

    What is Zucchini Bread?

    You may be wondering, why make Zucchini bread and what it tastes like. Zucchini bread is a quick bread recipe similar to Banana Nut Bread. Instead of using Bananas though, It contains shredded Zucchini. It is a sweet bread with a crunchy top, moist and flavorful on the inside. It is mouthwatering good, no lie!

    This recipe combines simple ingredients to make this classic zucchini bread recipe. In addition, adding this summer squash to the bread gives the bread a wonderful texture and adds moisture. Since Zucchini is full of water, it helps the bread to stay moist, just like the Bananas in Banana Bread. 

    Zucchini.

    Also,  if you have a vegetable garden, once mid-summer hits there is an abundance of zucchini. It can become hard to find new ways to use garden zucchini so this is one of our favorite ways to use that abundance of the summer crop from our own garden.  

    Zucchini, also called courgette, is a very mild-tasting summer squash. Since it is so mild tasting, it doesn't impart much flavor to the bread. Rather it helps it maintain moisture. Zucchini does have many wonderful health benefits such as vitamins and fiber. Since it adds some nutrient content to the bread, many may think it is healthy. Although Zucchini bread is a sweet bread, it may be a healthier choice than other types of sweet bread.

    Zucchini bread also has many other wonderful ingredients that make this wonderful bread recipe so delicious such as cinnamon and nuts. 

    Zucchini Bread Ingredients

    These are the main ingredients you will need to make this homemade Zucchini bread:

    • Flour: This recipe calls for all-purpose flour. 
    • Salt: Enhances the flavor of the bread. Do not omit this, your bread will taste flat. I prefer to use sea salt or Kosher salt. 
    • Baking Powder and Baking Soda: These are the leaveners that allow the bread to rise. Make sure to use this amount specified or the bread will not rise correctly. Quick breads call for more Leveners than other breads since they tend to be moist and heavy.  
    • Cinnamon: We love the warmness that cinnamon adds to this bread. 
    • Oil: We like to use a neutral oil such as any vegetable oil. You can also use Olive oil but use an Extra virgin that is light in taste if you decide to go that route. 
    • Sugar: This recipe calls for white granulated sugar but you can also substitute it for brown sugar. 
    • Zucchini: Make sure to get fresh Zucchini. Also, do not use large zucchini. They can have a bitter taste and will be mushy when you grate them. You want medium firm fruit to use. You will need 2 cups of grated zucchini.
    • Eggs: Eggs add to the moisture of the bread, provide structure, and bind the ingredients together. 
    • Vanilla Extract: We prefer to use vanilla extract over vanilla flavoring. It is a better quality ingredient and enhances the flavor more. 
    • Nuts: You can use pecan or walnuts. Both add a crunch to the bread giving it a better texture. Either one balances the flavor of the bread.

    Tools you Will Need

    • Bread Pan: Most of the time Zucchini bread is baked in bread or loaf pans. I use two 9 ½ inch by 5-inch sizes. You can also use a bundt cake pan or muffin pan as well depending on the desired shape and size. 
    • Box Grater or Food Processor: This will be used to grate the zucchini. 
    • Mixing Bowl: Various-sized bowls to mix ingredients in. 
    • Colander and measuring spoons/cups: These will be used to drain the moisture from the zucchini and measure the ingredients. 
    • Spatula: This will be used to mix the ingredients and scrap the sides of the bowl when dumping the mixture into the bread or loaf pan. 
    • Sifter: To sift the dry ingredients so they get mixed really well.
    • Electric hand mixer or stand mixer: These make mixing wet ingredients easier. You can do it with a wooden spoon if you do not have either though.  
    • Toothpicks: These are used to check the doneness of the bread. 
    • Cooling rack: Use the cooling racks or wire rack to place the bread on once it has baked. This allows the bread to cool to room temperature before slicing and serving. 

    How To Make Zucchini Bread

    Preparation:

    Step 1: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Step 2: Using a food processor or box grater, grate the Zucchini and add to a colander. Let drain to remove the excess water or moisture.

    Letting shredded Zucchini drain.
    Let the shredded Zucchini drain off some of the moisture in a colander.

    Mixing the Batter

    Step 3: Mix flour, salt, baking soda, baking powder, and cinnamon together and mix well together. You can use a sifter if you prefer to get the dry ingredients mixed well together. 

    Dry ingredients for Zucchini Bread.
    Salt
    Baking Soda
    Adding baking powder to flour.
    Baking Powder
    Mixing the dry ingredients.
    Mix or sift the dry ingredients together.

    Step 4: Beat eggs, oil, sugar, and vanilla together in a separate large mixing bowl. You can use a hand mixer for this process if you have one or even better, a stand mixer. 

    Adding vanilla to eggs.
    Adding Vanilla to the eggs.
    Adding sugar to eggs and vanilla.
    Creaming sugar, eggs, and vanilla together.
    This is what the creamed eggs, sugar, and vanilla should look like.
    This is what the creamed sugar, eggs, and vanilla should look like.

    Step 5: Add the flour mixture to the wet mixture and mix well. Then fold in the drained Zucchini and walnuts.

    Adding dry ingredients to wet ingredients.
    Add dry ingredients to wet ingredients a little at a time.
    Fold in the drained Zucchini into the batter mixture.
    Fold the drained Zucchini into the batter mixture.
    Add in the chopped Walnuts into the batter mixture.
    Add the chopped Walnuts to the batter mixture.

    Baking 

    Step 6: Pour batter into 2 greased loaf pans or 1 bundt pan. 

    Step 7: Bake for 40 to 50 minutes in the preheated oven at 325 degrees Fahrenheit. Do the toothpick test to see if it comes out clean to know if it is done or not.  

    Cooling:

    Step 8: Set the pans on a cooling rack for 20 minutes, then run a rubber spatula around the edges to help remove the bread. Give the pan a couple of shakes and it should break loose so you can remove it from the pan.

    Serving: 

    • Slice the bread and serve with a pat of butter or spread some cream cheese on top. 
    zucchini bread slice closeup.

    Storage:

    Store the bread in an airtight container. You can also wrap it in plastic wrap or aluminum foil. It will stay fresh for up to 4 days or it can be placed in the refrigerator for up to a week.  

    Variations (Optional Ingredients):

    There are many variations and different ingredients you can add to this bread. We will go over them now. 

    • Chocolate chips to make Chocolate Chip Zucchini Bread.
    • Add dried fruit such as raisins.
    • Lemon: You can add in lemon zest and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice to make this awesome Lemon Zucchini Bread recipe. 
    • Add in Blueberries to make Blueberry Zucchini Bread.
    • Use a muffin pan to make Zucchini muffins. They bake quicker so check them in 18 to 22 minutes. 
    Is Zucchini Bread healthy for you?

    Although Zucchini is a healthy vegetable that is low in calories and high in vitamins and fiber, adding it to bread doesn't make it healthy per se. This does make the bread healthier than it otherwise would be without it though.

    Do I leave the skin on Zucchini when making bread?

    Yes, leave the skin on it. You will not notice any difference in the flavor and the skin adds to the fiber and vitamin content of the bread.

    Should you cover Zucchini bread after baking?

    After baking, allow the bread to cool uncovered on a cooling rack or wire rack until it has reached room temperature. This will allow the crust to develop. After it has cooled, follow the instructions for storing the bread above in the recipe.

    Grandma Beards Zucchini Bread Recipe Pinterest Picture.
    Yield: 2 loves

    Grandma’s Best Zucchini Bread Recipe

    Grandma beards zucchini bread closeup picture.

    Experience love & tradition in every bite with Grandma Beard's Zucchini Bread. A comforting classic filled with fresh flavors & cherished memories.

    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups of All Purpose Flour
    • 1 Tablespoon of Cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon of salt (Kosher or Sea Salt)
    • 3 large eggs
    • 1 teaspoon of baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon of baking soda
    • 1 cup of oil (neutral oil)
    • 2 ¼ cups of White granulated sugar
    • 2 ½ teaspoons of vanilla extract
    • 2 cups grated Zucchini (drained)
    • 1 cup chopped walnuts (can use pecans too)

    Instructions

    Preparations

    • Step 1: Preheat oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Step 2: Using a food processor or box grater, grate the Zucchini until you have 2 cups. Add shredded zucchini to a colander and let it drain in the sink while preparing other ingredients.

    Mixing the batter

    • Step 3: Mix flour, salt, baking soda, baking powder, and cinnamon together in a large or medium size bowl. You can also use a sifter to sift the ingredients together. Mix until well combined.
    • Step 4: Add eggs, oil, vanilla, and sugar to a separate large mixing bowl and beat ingredients together until they have "creamed." You can use a hand mixer for this process if you have one or do it by hand with a whisk.
    • Step 5: Add the dry mixture to the wet mixture and mix well. Then fold the Zucchini into the batter. Next fold in the walnuts.

    Baking

    • Step 6: Pour batter into two greased loaf pans or 1 round bundt pan.
    • Step 7: Bake for 40 to 50 minutes at 325 degrees Fahrenheit. Do the toothpick test to see if it comes out clean to know when it is done. I like to remove my bread when it is slightly undercooked because it will continue to cook as you remove it from the oven and let it cool. This ensures it is not overly cooked and dried out.

    Cooling

    • Step 8: Set the pans on a cooling rack for 20 minutes, then run a rubber spatula around the edges to help remove the bread. Give the pan a couple of shakes and the bread should break free from the pan and you will be able to flip it out.

      Nutrition Information:

      Yield:

      24

      Serving Size:

      1
      Amount Per Serving: Calories: 258Total Fat: 13gSaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 12gCholesterol: 23mgSodium: 171mgCarbohydrates: 32gFiber: 1gSugar: 19gProtein: 3g

      Did you make this recipe?

      Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

      © Ronnie Williams
      Cuisine: American / Category: Bread Recipes

      The Best Spicy Cucumber Salad Recipe

      by Leave a Comment

      Home

      Spicy Cucumber Salad is a refreshing and vibrant dish that brings together the crispness of crunchy cucumbers and the fiery kick of spices. This invigorating salad is perfect for those who crave a burst of tangy flavors and a cooling sensation on hot summer days.

      Spicy cucumber salad with zesty dressing.

      This recipe is an adaptation of one of my most popular dishes on my website, Marinated Cucumbers Onion & Vinegar Recipe.

      Quick and Easy Zesty Cucumber Medley

      With its simple yet bold combination of fresh cucumbers, spicy flavors, and tangy dressing, Spicy Cucumber Salad makes a great side to any meal or a delightful standalone snack. Nonetheless, whether you're hosting a barbecue, planning a picnic, or simply looking for a quick and healthy side dish, this flavorful side dish is guaranteed to tantalize your taste buds and leave you wanting more.

      Spicy Cucumber & Onion Salad.

      All you need to make this simple recipe is sliced cucumbers, zesty Italian dressing, and red pepper flakes. Yet it is so simple and easy to make, but don't let that fool you it has so much flavor. All you have to do is place them in a serving bowl and you are in business!

      Furthermore, another great thing about this dish is that it caters to a wide range of dietary preferences, including vegan, paleo, and even gluten-free. Regardless of which category you fall into, if this is your first time making it, you are in for a treat.

      If you really love spicy food and want to create an epic meal, serve it alongside this Cajun Roasted Chicken to really elevate the spice level! Anyone who loves spicy food will love this combination together. Both of these are very simple recipes that can be made without much effort. 

      Not the same Spicy Cucumber Salad you may know

      Before we start, I want to point out that this recipe is slightly different from the traditional Spicy Asian Cucumber Salad (Spicy Korean Cucumber Salad). Furthermore, don't let this stop you from trying this one though. The main difference is I "Southernized" this recipe. This variation is so quick to whip up in a hurry. 

      This recipe is also different from the more popular or traditional Cucumber Salad that many Southerners may know about. Both are equally delicious, it will just depend on which one you are craving.

      Pinterest picture of Spicy Cucumber Salad.

      Great use for an abundance of cucumbers

      In the summer months once cucumbers start to come out of the garden, there are only so many ways you can eat them. Fresh, cut up in salads or in pasta salad, homemade pickles, and there aren’t many more ways to enjoy them. Similarly, that is why this Spicy Cucumber Salad Recipe is such a treat. This is a way to spice up raw cucumbers in a way that is different from the normal cucumber salad.

      Cucumbers and Onions on a cutting board.

      Ingredients notes:

      • Cucumbers- You can use garden fresh cucumbers or English Cucumbers. Either one is fine. If you are going to use a garden fresh cucumber I would recommend peeling them for best results. They tend to have thick skin. If you use English Cucumbers, they have a thin skin and can be left on. For the best flavor, use smaller cucumbers. This recipe will use 3 small to medium size cucumbers.
      • Onion- I like to use sweet onion for this recipe such as a Vidalia Onion. A red onion is an excellent addition if you cannot find one. It will add sharpness and spiciness to the recipe. This recipe will use 1 large onion.  
      • Zesty Italian Dressing- For this recipe, we use a Zesty Italian Dressing such as Kraft Zesty Italian Dressing. This recipe will use 2 cups of dressing. 
      • Red Pepper Flakes-Red Pepper Flakes is the spice that we use to give us that kick. This spice really elevates the recipe and compliments the zesty dressing. This recipe will use 1 teaspoon of red pepper flakes.
      • Optional: Top with some green onions.  

      ​Step-by-step instructions

      Preparation:

      Step 1: Wash all vegetables. If using garden fresh cucumbers, peel the skin off and slice them into ¼ inch slices. 

      Peeling the skin off of cucumbers.
      Slicing cucumbers.

      Step 2: Peel the onion and cut it in half, then cut it into thin slices. 

      Slicing the onions.
      Pro Tip: After peeling the cucumbers, place them in a colander in the sink. Add a few pinches of salt and toss them to coat all the sides. Allow them to dwell for up to 30 minutes. This will help draw out some of the moisture and will help the cucumbers stay crisp.

      ​Assembly:

      Step 3: Grab a medium bowl, and add the cucumber slices and onions. 

      adding onions to the cucumbers in a medium size bowl.

      Step 4: In a small bowl, add the dressing and red pepper flakes. Then, mix until it is combined. 

      Adding Red Pepper Flakes to the dressing.
      Add Crushed Red Pepper flakes to the dressing

      Step 5: Pour Dressing over cucumbers and onions. After that, mix well until the vegetables are fully coated. 

      adding dressing to the cucumbers and onions.
      Pour dressing over the vegetables
      Mixing up dressing with the onions and cucumbers.
      Mix the ingredients together

      ​Serving Suggestion:

      You can serve right away but for best results, place in the refrigerator and let chill. 

      ​

      Variations

      If you are looking for the traditional way to make Cucumber Salad, such as Cucumbers and Vinegar, Check out this recipe called Marinated Cucumbers Onion & Vinegar Recipe. This is one of my favorite recipes that I grew up eating as a kid, consequently making it my favorite cucumber salad recipe.

      Conclusion

      In conclusion, Spicy Cucumber Salad is a vibrant and flavorful dish that brings together the cool crunch of cucumbers with a fiery twist of spices. Its refreshing nature and bold taste make it a versatile addition to any meal or a delightful standalone snack.

      Pinterest picture of Spicy Cucumber Salad.

      Whether you're looking to add a zesty kick to your barbecue spread, a tangy side dish for your picnic, or simply a healthy and quick snack, this recipe has got you covered. The combination of fresh cucumbers, zesty spices, and tangy dressing creates a tantalizing flavor explosion that will leave you craving more. 

      So, don't hesitate to try this recipe and embark on a culinary adventure that will awaken your taste buds and keep you coming back for seconds. Enjoy the invigorating goodness of Spicy Cucumber Salad and savor every spicy, refreshing bite!

      Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
      What recipes can I use raw cucumbers in?

      There are many recipes you can use raw cucumbers for such as:
      House Salad
      Homemade Pickles
      Pasta Salad
      Cucumbers Onions & Vinegar

      How can I store leftover Spicy Cucumber Salad?

      Store them in an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

      What can I do if I like this recipe but do not like it spicy?

      You can omit the red pepper flakes to make this same recipe not spicy.

      Do I have to peel the cucumbers?

      No, you can leave the peeling or skin on. The peeling does contain more vitamins and nutrients. On garden fresh cucumbers, the peeling can be bitter sometimes and they tend to have thick skin.

      How can I keep the cucumbers crisp in cucumber salad?

      Once you slice the cucumbers, place them in a colander in the sink and add a few pinches of salt. Toss them a few times to coat all the sides then allow them to dwell for up to 30 minutes. This will help draw out some of the moisture to help them stay crisp. Make sure to rinse them before making the recipe.

      Should I rinse the cucumbers after soaking them in salt?

      Yes. You should rinse the salt off before making the recipe.

      Yield: 6 servings

      The Best Spicy Cucumber Salad Recipe

      Spicy Cucumber Salad.

      Spicy Cucumber Salad is a refreshing and vibrant dish that brings together the crispness of  crunchy cucumbers and the fiery kick of spices. This invigorating salad is perfect for those who crave a burst of tangy flavors and a cooling sensation on hot summer days.

      Prep Time 10 minutes
      Total Time 10 minutes

      Ingredients

      • 3 small to medium size Cucumbers
      • 1 large onion
      • 2 cups of Kraft Zesty Italian Dressing
      • 1 teaspoon of red pepper flakes

      Optional

      • Chopped green onion for garnish

      Instructions

      Preparation

      Step 1: Wash all vegetables. If using garden fresh cucumbers, peel the skin off and slice them into ¼ inch slices. 

      Step 2: Peel the onion and cut in half, then cut into thin slices. 

      Assembly

      Step 3: Grab a medium bowl, add in the cucumber slices and onions. 

      Step 4: In a small bowl, add in the dressing and red pepper flakes. Mix until it is combine. 

      Step 5: Pour Dressing over cucumbers and onions. Mix well until the vegetables are fully covered. 

      Serving Suggestion

      You can serve right away but for best results, place in the refrigerator and let chill. 

      Notes

      Pro Tip: After peeling the cucumbers, place them in a colander in the sink. Add a few pinches of salt and toss them to coat all the sides. Allow them to dwell for up to 30 minuets. This will help draw out some of the moisture and will help the cucumbers stay crisp.

      YouTube video

      Nutrition Information:

      Yield:

      6

      Serving Size:

      1
      Amount Per Serving: Calories: 109Total Fat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 6gCholesterol: 0mgSodium: 391mgCarbohydrates: 8gFiber: 1gSugar: 6gProtein: 1g

      Did you make this recipe?

      Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

      © Ronnie Williams
      Cuisine: American / Category: Salad
      YouTube video

      The Best Old Fashioned Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls Recipe

      by 18 Comments

      Home

      Imagine waking up to the enticing aroma of freshly baked Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls, their golden-brown swirls peeking through a generous layer of frosting. These aren't just any cinnamon rolls, though—they're the best old-fashioned sourdough cinnamon rolls you've ever had! 

      Combining the tangy goodness of potato flake sourdough starter with the comforting warmness of cinnamon, these old-fashioned sourdough cinnamon rolls are the epitome of home-baked perfection. Get ready to embark on a mouthwatering journey as we unravel the secrets behind this timeless recipe that will leave you craving for more. 

      Buttery rich cinnamon bun recipe.

      So roll up your sleeves, dust your countertops with flour, and let's dive into the art of creating the best sourdough cinnamon rolls you've ever tasted!

      What Makes These Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls Different?

      • Sourdough: To start with, most cinnamon rolls are yeast rolls. They use baker's yeast to help the bread rise. My recipe uses a sourdough starter instead of active dry yeast. Both are technically yeast, one is a commercial yeast versus a more natural working yeast in the sourdough starter
      • Sourdough Starter: The sourdough starter we are using for this recipe is made from Potato Flakes. This is different than the more traditional sourdough starter that uses just flour and water, the potato flake starter uses potato flakes to "feed" the starter. This starter is sweeter, and less sour than a traditional starter.
      • Soft, Tender, Fluffy, and Slightly Sour: The flavor of these Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls is soft and tender, with a less sour or tangy flavor than traditional sourdough cinnamon rolls. Combine that with the richness of the butter, the sweetness of the sugar, and the warmth of the cinnamon, you have a treat that you will love.

      No doubt you will love these fluffy sourdough cinnamon rolls!

      What is Sourdough Bread?

      Since we mentioned Sourdough above, we thought you might be curious about what Sourdough Bread is. Sourdough Bread is made from a natural leavening agent. The leavening agent, which is yeast, is fermented which gives the bread its sour or tangy flavor. The yeast is a natural yeast vs. a commercial yeast like you would buy in the store to make yeast bread. 

      sourdough bread made with a potato flake starter.
      Sourdough bread made from a sourdough potato flake starter

      This is also why sourdough bread is a healthier option because the fermented starter is full of probiotics, natural wild yeasts, and good bacteria. Traditional sourdough starters use flour and water to ferment. Wild yeasts and bacteria grow on this and this is what causes the bread to rise.

      In this case, we are using an easy-to-make sourdough bread using a potato flake starter which starts with a commercial yeast called active dry yeast to get it started, but then wild yeast takes over after it has fermented.

      Before you Start

      In order to make this recipe, you have to have a starter. If you do not have a starter or know how to make one, I have made that easy for you. Before you do anything else, go make this Easy to Make Sourdough Starter Using Potato Flakes.

      Sourdough starter made from potato flakes

      This starter is easy to make but it takes 5 days to make it so make sure you leave yourself enough time for that. Once you make It, it is also easy to maintain so you will always have it on hand when you want to make this recipe or others that use the starter. 

      Maintaining Your Starter

      I wanted to touch on maintaining your sourdough starter. The starter is easy to maintain but you do have to feed it once every 5 days. 

      If you happen to not be able to feed it one week on the 5th day, don't fret, you can go a few days past this and it will be ok. Once you are able to get back on the schedule though, try to stick to it as it will keep your starter strong.

      Adding potato flakes to "feed" sourdough starter

      The above-mentioned post about how to make the starter will give you all the information on how to make and maintain the sourdough starter.

      There are also many other recipes that you can use this starter for such as this Easy to Make Sourdough Bread Using a Potato Flake Starter. So it is a good idea to keep a starter on hand. 

      To Start, Feed The Starter

      Once you have the starter made, we can continue in the process. The very first thing you have to do is feed the starter unless your starter is brand new. If you just made the starter and are on the fifth day, you are ready to make your cinnamon buns.

      If you need to feed the starter, once you have fed it, you will wait 6 to 8 hours for the starter to come up to room temperature and ferment. Then you will be ready to make your cinnamon rolls. 

      How to Make Cinnamon Buns

      Making Old Fashioned Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls is easy if you have the right recipe and tips. It does take a little prep time though. Here is how to do it:

      Dough Ingredients:​

      Active Starter 

      This recipe calls for 1 cup of active sourdough starter that is made from potato flakes.

      Warm Water

      You will need 1 ½ cups of water that is lukewarm. This should have a temperature range of 95 to 115 degrees Fahrenheit. I like to use my instant-read thermometer to check the temperature.

      Salt

      Try to use sea salt or Kosher salt if you can. Normal table salt has iodine in it and can give an off-taste. You will need 1 ½ teaspoons of salt

      Sugar

      You will need ½ cup of White Granulated Sugar. I often use organic cane sugar if I have it on hand. You can also use brown sugar for a richer flavor. 

      Vegetable Oil

      You will need ½ cup of Vegetable oil. I typically use canola or corn oil. I have used Olive oil in the past with great results. If you use olive oil, make sure it is a Light Extra Virgin Olive oil, something with a light taste. 

      Flour

      In order to make this recipe, you will need either bread flour or all-purpose flour. I like to use unbleached all-purpose flour when I make my bread. Bread flour is excellent to use as well. 

      Bread flour will give a little more structure to the bread because it has a slightly higher protein count than all-purpose flour. Most people have all-purpose on hand so that is why I recommend going with it. Any brand will do but I tend to like King Arthur flour. You will need 6 cups of flour

      For the Filling:​

      Butter

      9 tablespoons of softened butter. You want it soft enough to spread.

      Sugar

      1 cup of sugar. I use white sugar for this recipe but you could also use brown sugar or Turbinado Sugar.

      ​Cinnamon

      ​8 teaspoons of ground cinnamon.

      For the Icing

      Powder sugar

      2 cups of powdered sugar or you may know it as confectioners sugar.

      Butter

      2 tablespoons of softened butter.  

      Vanilla 

      2 teaspoons of vanilla extract.

      Milk

      ​¼ cup of milk or heavy cream.

      ​

      Making the Bread:

      Step 1: In a large bowl, add 1 ½ cups of lukewarm water. Then add in 1 cup of starter and ½ cup of vegetable oil.​

      Step 2: Next, add the sugar and salt. Mix to dissolve the sugar and salt in the mixture. 

      Step 3: Add in the 6 cups of flour. 

      Mix

      Step 4: Mix until all the flour has been incorporated making sure to scrape the sides of the bowl until a ball is starting to form.

      Step 5: Turn the ball of dough out onto a floured work surface. If you have a pastry mat, that works well too. 

      Knead The Dough

      Step 6: Knead until you have a slightly smooth dough ball formed. It should be a little sticky but not too sticky. If you have a stand mixer, use the dough hook attachment and this will make light work out of this step.

      Let The Dough Rise

      Step 7: Place the ball into a clean bowl. I like to add a little vegetable oil or olive oil to the ball and smear it around. This helps to prevent the dough from sticking to the bowl. I also like to put a little bit of oil on top of the dough to keep it from drying out. 

      Step 8: Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, a tea towel, or Cheesecloth. You could also use parchment paper to cover it as well. Place in a warm spot to let the dough rise for the first time. The rise time will vary but I let mine go overnight. Typically you want to a least let it double in size which should take 4 to 8 hours

      Roll The Dough Out

      Step 9: The next day or after the dough has doubled in size, punch the dough down, then turn it out onto a floured surface again.

      Step 10: Knead for several minutes, then divide the dough into three equal parts. 

      The dough divided into three equal parts

      Assemble The Rolls

      Step 11: Working with one section of dough at a time, sprinkle a little flour on your working surface. Also, rub some flour on a rolling pin. Pat your dough into a rectangular shape. and start to roll out the dough. You want to form a large rectangle that is approximal 9 x 13 inches. 

      Step 12: In a small bowl, mix the sugar and cinnamon together.  Then spread softened butter on the entire surface of the dough using a basting brush. Spread a thin layer of the cinnamon sugar mixture on top of the softened butter. Make sure to save enough butter and cinnamon/sugar mixture to use on the other two sections. If need be, you can divide the ingredients into thirds.

      Step 13. Starting with the long side of the dough (13-inch side) use your thumbs to pick up the dough across the entire edge and start to roll the dough evenly as possible. Try to roll it up as tight as you can. 

      Starting on the long side of the dough, use thumbs to pick dough up and start to roll it. 
      Pro Tip: I found that I could my bench scraper to pick up on the edges and use it to help roll the dough. This worked great for helping the dough to start rolling and to help roll it as I went along. 

      Cut The Rolls

      Step 14: Using your bench scrapper, sharp knife, or even dental floss, cut the roll into 2 to 3-inch rolls. Place the rolls in a greased round baking pan. Place the first one in the middle, then place each additional roll around it in a circle. 

      Let the Rolls Rise Again

      Step 15: Place the pans in a warm spot in your kitchen, cover them with plastic wrap or a damp towel, and let rise for the final rise until the rolls have doubled in size. 

      Cinnamon rolls rising (second rise)

      Bake The Rolls

      Step 16: Bake in the oven at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for about 22 to 25 minutes or until the rolls are golden brown. 

      Making the Icing:

      While the cinnamon rolls are baking in the oven, now is the time to mix up the icing.

      Step 1:  Add the powdered sugar, melted butter, vanilla extract, and milk to a small to medium-sized mixing bowl. 

      Step 2: Next mix until it is smooth. 

      Step 3: Pour over warm cinnamon rolls and spread evenly. 

      Drizzling homemade icing on sourdough cinnamon buns.
      Sourdough Cinnamon rolls with homemade icing.

      Serve

      Once you have put the icing on, it is time to serve the Sourdough Cinnamon rolls. Break a roll apart and place it on a dish to serve.

      Old Fashioned Sourdough cinnamon rolls picture for Pinterest.

      Conclusion

      In conclusion, these sourdough cinnamon rolls made from a potato flake starter offer a delightful fusion of tangy sourdough goodness and the comforting sweetness of cinnamon and sugar. The unique twist of using a potato flake starter not only adds a distinct flavor but also enhances the texture, making them irresistibly soft and pillowy.

      Whether enjoyed as a special breakfast treat or a delightful dessert, these sourdough cinnamon rolls are a testament to the creativity and versatility of sourdough baking. They're sure to satisfy your cravings and leave you with a warm, homemade taste that lingers in your memory. So, roll up your sleeves, bake a batch, and relish in the joy of homemade sourdough cinnamon rolls that are truly a labor of love.


      Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

      FAQ's

      What Can I Do with Leftovers?

      If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container and put them in the refrigerator. They will last up to 3 to 4 days.

      Can I Use A Different Frosting?

      Yes, an alternative frosting to use is Cream Cheese Frosting. You will use the same ingredients as above except to omit the milk and add in one 8 oz. package of room-temperature cream cheese. Mix until smooth and spread on the rolls once they have cooled to room temperature.

      Can I Bake these Cinnamon Rolls in a Cast Iron Skillet?

      Yes, if you prefer to make these cinnamon rolls in a cast iron skillet versus the round baking pans, you can do that. Just note that this recipe makes 36 rolls so you will have to have 3 cast iron pans, or not bake them all at one time.

      Can I Freeze Sourdough Rolls?

      Yes, you can freeze baked cinnamon rolls if they have not been frosted. Line them on a baking sheet and stick them in the freezer until they are frozen. Then remove them and place them in an airtight container or freezer-safe zip lock bag to store for up to 6 months.

      Yield: 36 Rolls

      The Best Old Fashioned Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls

      The Best Old Fashioned Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls

      Imagine waking up to the enticing aroma of freshly baked Sourdough Cinnamon Rolls, their golden-brown swirls peeking through a generous layer of frosting. These aren’t just any cinnamon rolls, though—they’re the best old fashioned sourdough cinnamon rolls you’ve ever had! 

      Prep Time 20 minutes
      Cook Time 25 minutes
      Total Time 45 minutes

      Ingredients

      Dough Ingredients

      • 1 cup of active starter
      • 1 ½ cups of luke warm water
      • 1 ½ teaspoons of salt
      • ½ cup of sugar
      • ½ cup of vegetable oil
      • 6 cups of flour

      For the Filling

      • 9 tablespoons of softened butter
      • 1 cup of sugar
      • 8 teaspoons of cinnamon

      For the Icing

      • 2 cups of powdered sugar
      • 2 tablespoons of softened butter
      • 2 teaspoons of vanilla extract
      • ¼ cup of milk or heavy cream

      Instructions

      Making the Bread

      1. Step 1: In a large bowl, add 1 ½ cups of lukewarm water. Then add in 1 cup of starter and ½ cup of vegetable oil.
      2. Step 2: Next, add the sugar and salt. Mix to dissolve the sugar and salt in the mixture. 
      3. Step 3: Add in the 6 cups of flour. 

      Mix

      1. Step 4: Mix until all the flour has been incorporated making sure to scrape the sides of the bowl and a ball is starting to form.
      2. Step 5: Turn the ball of dough out onto a floured work surface. If you have a pastry mat, that works well too. 

      Knead the Dough

      1. Step 6: Knead until you have a slightly smooth dough ball formed. It should be a little sticky but not too sticky. If you have a stand mixer, use the dough hook  attachment and this will make light work out of this step.

      Let the Dough Rise

      1. Step 7: Place the ball into a clean bowl. I like to add a little vegetable oil or olive oil to the ball and smear it around. This helps to prevent the dough from sticking to the bowl. I also like to put a little bit of oil on top of the dough to keep it from drying out. 
      2. Step 8: Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, a tea towel, or Cheesecloth. You could also use parchment paper to cover it as well. Place in a warm spot to let the dough rise for the first rise. The rise time will vary but I let mine go overnight. Typically you want to a least let it double in size which should take 4 to 8 hours

      Roll the Dough Out

      1. Step 9: The next day or after the dough has doubled in size, punch the dough down, then turn it out onto a floured surface again.
      2. Step 10: Knead for several minutes, then divide the dough into three equal parts. 

      Assemble the Rolls

      1. Step 11: Working with one section of dough at a time, sprinkle a little flour on your working surface. Also rub some flour on a rolling pin. Pat your dough into a rectangular shape. and start to roll out the dough. You want to form a large rectangle that is approximal 9 x 13 inches.
      2. Step 12: In a small bowl, mix the sugar and cinnamon together.  Then spread soften butter on on the entire surface of the dough using a basting brush. Spread a thin layer of the cinnamon sugar mixture on top of the soften butter. Make sure to save enough butter and Cinnamon/sugar mixture to use on the other two sections. If need be, you can divide the ingredients into thirds.
      3. Step 13. Starting with the long side of the dough (13 inch side) use your thumbs to pick up the dough across the entire edge and start to roll the dough evenly as possible. Try to roll it up as tight as you can. 

      Cut the Rolls

      1. Step 14: Using your bench scrapper, sharp knife,  or even dental floss, cut the roll into 2 to 3 inch rolls. Place the rolls in a greased round baking pan. Place the first one in the middle, then place each additional roll around it in a circle. 

      Let the Rolls Rise Again

      1. Step 15: Place the pans in a warm spot in your kitchen, cover with plastic wrap or damp towel and let rise for the final rise until the rolls have double in size.

      Bake the Rolls

      1. Step 16: Bake in the oven at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for about 22 to 25 minutes or until the rolls are golden brown. 

      Making the Icing

      1. While the cinnamon rolls are baking in the oven, now is the time to mix up the icing.
      2. Step 1:  Add the powdered sugar, melted butter, vanilla extract, and milk to a small to medium size mixing bowl. 
      3. Step 2: Next mix until it is smooth. 
      4. Step 3: Pour over warm cinnamon rolls and spread evenly. 

      Did you make this recipe?

      Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

      © Ronnie Williams
      Category: Dessert Recipes

      11 Easy Camping Dinner Ideas for Large Groups

      by Leave a Comment

      Home

      We've curated a collection of 11 easy camping dinner ideas for large groups that are not only delicious but also designed to satisfy the appetites of large groups. From simple one-pot wonders to crowd-pleasing grilled feasts, these recipes will have everyone lining up for seconds.

      11 easy camping dinner ideas for large group.
      Photo from Canva

      Imagine the crackling sound of the campfire, the scent of nature filling the air, and the laughter and camaraderie of a large group of friends or family gathered together in the great outdoors. As the day winds down and hunger sets in, there's nothing quite like enjoying a delicious meal under the starlit sky.

      So, let's dive into the world of camping recipes and discover the joy of creating memorable meals that will fuel your adventures and forge lasting memories. Get ready to ignite your culinary creativity and embark on a camping dinner extravaganza!

      Here is the list of Camping Dinners for Large Groups:

      1. Easy Slow Cooker Beef & Bean Chili Recipe

      When looking for camping recipes, I like to look for recipes that are easy to fix and feed a large group. One that is perfect for this is Easy Slow Cooker Beef & Bean Chili recipe. Made with McCormick chili seasoning and slow-cooked to perfection in a crock pot, this hearty beef recipe is sure to warm you up on even the coldest of nights while camping. 

      easy slow cooker beef and bean chili recipe with saltine crackers.

      This recipe is cooked in a slow cooker so if you have a camping site with electricity, it is perfect for that. But even if you do not, it can be cooked over a fire or in a large pot on a propane burner. Either way, it will feed a crowd.

      You can double or even triple this recipe based on the number of people in your group. This is one of my favorite go-to meals when camping.

      What To Serve It With

      I love to serve this with saltine crackers or you can even make this wonderful Homemade Sourdough Bread ahead of time to serve with it.  I also love to bring lots of toppings such as cheddar cheese, sour cream, and pickled jalapenos.

      2. Low Country Boil

      When it comes to camping, there's something special about enjoying a meal that brings everyone together, and few dishes accomplish this as perfectly as the famous Low Country Boil. Originating from the coastal regions of South Carolina, this hearty and flavorful feast has become a staple for large group gatherings, creating memories that linger long after the last bite. 

      Picture a large pot simmering, filled with an enticing medley of fresh seafood, succulent sausages, vibrant vegetables, and a blend of fragrant spices. As the flavors meld and mingle, the tantalizing aroma drifts through the campsite, whetting the appetite of all who gather around. 

      3. South Carolina Chicken Bog

      Chicken Bog is another localized recipe that came from the coastal regions of the south, specifically South Carolina. This dish is a variation of chicken and rice and as the name implies, it is sort of boggy or sticky as I like to call it. 

      Making Southern Chicken Bog.

      It is a hearty meal that sticks to your ribs and feeds a large crowd. This dish starts with a whole chicken stewed in vegetables to make a flavorful broth. The chicken is then separated and the broth is used to cook the rice. Add in the smoked sausage and you have a meal that is sure to please. 

      Don't overlook this simple but flavorful meal. It is a great camping dinner idea for large crowds on your next camping trip.  Chicken Bog can be cooked in a large Dutch oven over an open fire or you can cook it in a large pot on your propane burner. Either way, it will turn out great.  

      4. Irresistible Spaghetti Pasta Salad

      What would a camping trip be without Pasta Salad? It seems that it is always included in meals to serve when grilling out or camping. The best thing about this Irresistible Spaghetti Pasta Salad recipe is it can be made ahead of time at home. You can pack it in the cooler and bring it with you. 

      Spaghetti Pasta Salad Recipe

      Spaghetti pasta salad is a cold pasta salad that is full of fresh veggies, Parmesan Cheese, and a zesty dressing mix that is to die for. One of the key ingredients in this dish is Salad Supreme Seasoning.

      What To Serve It With

      Spaghetti Pasta Salad feeds a lot of people and it makes the perfect side dish for hot dogs or hamburgers. So the night that you plan to grill out, make sure to make this recipe to bring along. One thing to note is, it is even better after it has sat overnight (Make sure to keep it chilled though).

      5. Tin Foil Packet Meals

      When it comes to camping, simplicity, and convenience are key, especially when it comes to mealtime. That's where Tin Foil Packet Meals comes to the rescue! These versatile and fuss-free creations are a game-changer for campfire cooking, offering a delicious and mess-free dining experience that is sure to please everyone in your large group.

      Photo from Canva

      With just a few simple ingredients and a roll of trusty aluminum foil, you can create an array of mouthwatering meals that are cooked to perfection over an open flame. If you do not want to fool with the fire and get a bed of coals to cook them on, another quick option is to use an outdoor grill. You can use a charcoal grill or even a propane grill. 

      YouTube video

      This recipe combines ground beef with fresh vegetables such as carrots, celery, and red potatoes for a hearty meal that is easy to make. Either way, by making foil packets you will have a simple meal that can feed a large crowd when camping but have virtually no mess or cleanup. This truly is one of the best camping meals there is. 

      6. Southern Style Egg Salad

      ​If you are looking for a recipe that is more on the lighter side, serving Southern Style Egg Salad sandwiches is a great option. The best part is this meal is cheap to make and can feed a large crowd. 

      Not only does egg salad feed a large crowd, but it is quick to make. Having quick camping meals is essential to having a great camping experience in my opinion. No one wants to waste a lot of time cooking to feed a large crowd. 

      Closeup of a southern style egg salad sandwhich.

      This easy recipe starts with just simple ingredients. The basics are eggs, mayo, mustard, salt, and pepper. Ingredients are mixed up as a bound salad and served on just plain white bread or as a spread on crackers. For a low-carb or Keto option, serve it on a bed of lettuce. Either way is a great way to enjoy this delicious recipe.

      What To Serve It With

      Typically if we are having sandwiches, we will serve them with a side of our favorite potato chips. 

      7. Old-Fashioned Pancakes

      If you are like us, we love to have breakfast for dinner. One of our favorite breakfast meals to have is Old-Fashioned Pancakes.  These pancakes are buttery, perfectly sweet, with crispy edges, making them a favorite among breakfast lovers everywhere.

      closeup of pouring syrup on a stack of pancakes with butter on top.

      One idea that I keep meaning to try is to make the pancake batter ahead of time and put it in an empty coffee creamer bottle. The one I am talking about is similar to the International Delights Coffee Creamer bottle. The bottle is perfect for this and by making it ahead of time, it is ready to go when you want to make dinner or even breakfast. 

      Pancakes are cheap to make and are a filling meal. Because of this, we love to include them in our camping meals, even if it is for dinner one night. To make pancakes to feed a large group of people, you need a large skillet or large cooking surface. The best thing I have found to cook them on is this Blackstone Tabletop Griddle. It is perfect for this application.

      BLackstone 22 inch table top griddle.
      Click for Price

      What To Serve It With

      Add some sausage or bacon to round out the meal so you have protein. Don't forget the maple syrup and make sure to bring some fresh fruit for a side or topping. The kids love to add chocolate chips as a topping. One more thing, I am going to let you in on a little secret, try adding some peanut butter on top. I have done this since I was a kid and I love it! 

      8. Brunswick Stew

      Brunswick Stew is an excellent choice for a camping meal that can feed a crowd. Its hearty and comforting nature makes it perfect for sharing and enjoying with a large group of campers. The stew is typically made in large batches, simmering low and slow to develop its rich flavors. It's a one-pot dish that combines meat, vegetables, and seasonings, making it a convenient and fuss-free option for camping cooking.

      Since Brunswick Stew can be made ahead of time and reheated, it allows you to focus more on enjoying your time outdoors and less on meal preparation. Whether you're camping with family, friends, or a community gathering, this flavorful stew is sure to please everyone's palate. It can be served on its own as a main course or paired with cornbread, rice, or even grilled sandwiches for a more substantial meal.

      It is hard to beat a good soup or stew while camping. Stews or soups just make perfect sense. They give you that rustic camping feeling but they also can be stretched to feed a large crowd making it one of the best camping dinner ideas for large groups.

      9. South Carolina Catfish Stew

      Sticking with the soups and stew theme, the next camping dinner idea for a large group is Catfish Stew. Like the Low Country Boil and Chicken Bog recipes, Catfish Stew is a recipe that is a traditional South Carolina Recipe, one that originated in that state. 

      If you are camping near a body of water, one of the unique things about Catfish Stew is it allows you to catch and cook while you are camping. There will be no fresher meal than catching your fish, and cooking them right there on the banks while camping. 

      Overall, Catfish Stew offers a delicious way to enjoy the bounty of nature while camping. It combines the thrill of fishing with the joy of cooking a flavorful and hearty stew. So, if you're a fan of catfish and looking for a camping recipe that showcases its flavors, Catfish Stew can be a great choice for your outdoor culinary adventures.

      If you prefer not to rely on your fishing skills, just bring your catfish fillets with you. This meal is pretty simple to make and like a lot of the others on this list just requires a big pot and a heat source whether that be a propane burner or a campfire. 

      10. Quick and Easy Chicken and Vegetable Stir Fry

      If you’re looking for a quick and easy dinner that’s packed with flavor and healthy vegetables, look no further than this chicken and vegetable stir fry. This recipe is perfect for camping when you don’t have a lot of time to spend.

      As you gather around the campfire, eagerly awaiting the fragrant stir fry, the excitement builds. Serve the Quick and Easy Chicken and Vegetable Stir Fry over a bed of fluffy rice or noodles, allowing everyone to customize their portions. The combination of tender chicken, vibrant vegetables, and a flavorful sauce will tantalize your taste buds and provide a satisfying meal that's both nourishing and delicious.

      Quick and Easy Stir Fry

      ​

      Not only is this stir fry bursting with flavor, but it's also a practical choice for camping. With its quick cooking time and easy cleanup, you can spend more time enjoying the great outdoors and less time fussing over meal preparation. So, gather your camping group, prepare your ingredients, and get ready to savor the simplicity and deliciousness of this Quick and Easy Chicken and Vegetable Stir Fry.

      The best way to cook this meal is by using the Blackstone Tabletop Griddle as we mentioned in the Old-Fashioned Pancake recipe. This makes cooking so simple and easy with this flat-top grill. If you do not have one of those, you could use a large cast iron skillet or griddle as well. Either way, this is a great meal if you are looking for something a little different than the normal camping meals. 

      11. Crispy Southern Fried Catfish

      There is nothing more synonymous with camping than cooking fresh fried catfish on the banks of a river or lake while camping. That is where the term "Fish Camp" comes from. If you do not know what a fish camp is, that is what Southerners call a restaurant that serves fried fish.

      Golden fried catfish

      Catfish is a moist, slightly sweet, and flaky textured fish. Catfish is one of the tastiest fishes once it is fried up if it is prepared right. One of the main things to consider on catfish fillets is taking out the bloodline before cooking them.

      You can feed a lot of people with fried catfish. Best of all, it can be a very cheap meal since you can catch the fish yourself.

      What to serve it with

      Most of the time when you have fried Catfish you will serve it with slaw, hushpuppies, and French fries. We also like to have Pork and Beans with it. Make sure to top it off with some Homemade Southern Tarter Sauce!

      Conclusion

      As our journey through 11 Easy Camping Dinner Ideas for Large Groups comes to an end, we hope you're feeling inspired and excited to embark on your next camping adventure. From hearty stews to sizzling stir-fries, from comforting classics to inventive creations, these recipes have showcased the delicious possibilities that await when cooking for a crowd in the great outdoors.

      Preparing meals for a large group while camping can be both enjoyable and rewarding. It's an opportunity to bond with fellow campers, share stories and laughter, and create lasting memories around a communal table. The beauty of these easy camping dinner ideas lies in their simplicity, as they require minimal equipment, ingredients, and preparation time.

      Whether you're seeking nourishing comfort food or exploring new flavors, our curated collection has provided a diverse range of options to suit different tastes and dietary preferences. From the comforting warmth of Brunswick Stew to the quick and vibrant Chicken and Vegetable Stir Fry, these meals showcase the versatility and adaptability of camping cooking.

      We encourage you to embrace the spirit of adventure and culinary creativity during your camping trips. Don't be afraid to experiment, customize, and make these recipes your own. Remember, the most important ingredient in any camping meal is the joy of sharing good food and good company amid nature's embrace.

      So, pack your camping gear, stock up on ingredients, and get ready to embark on culinary adventures that will leave your taste buds satisfied and your camping companions delighted. These easy camping dinner ideas for large groups are your passport to creating memorable feasts under the open sky. Happy camping and bon appétit!

      Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
      How Can I Plan and Prepare These Meals for a Large Group?

      Make a meal plan ahead of time. Prep ingredients in advance such as vegetables. Pre-cook items that can be such as soup, which can be reheated.

      What if I do not like fish, can I use another protein in the soups?

      Yes, if you do not like fish you could use chicken or beef in the soup.

      Do You Have Rusty Grill Grates?

      by Leave a Comment

      Home

      Let's talk about grill grates. Do you have rusty grill grates? Well, I had rusty grill grates and I am going to show you how I fixed my issue with my rusty, crusty, and flaky grill grates. No one wants that stuff in their food so what do you do to fix this issue? Let's talk about it.

      The Problem With My Rusty Grill Grates

      My grill, a Broil King Baron, originally came with cast iron grates. While I initially loved their heaviness and performance, over time, they started deteriorating due to moisture and usage.

      Broil King Baron Gas Grill.
      Broil King Baron Gas Grill

      I opted for the cast iron grates to put that perfectly great sear and grill marks on my steaks and chicken. The problem is, they are a lot of maintenance and upkeep.

      You have to constantly oil them to keep them from rusting. Also, the constant heating and cooling cycles from the grill cause them to sweat thereby rusting.

      My grates were in total disarray. They were flaking and breaking bits and pieces off each time I grilled. It was awful. I was getting all those rusty bits on my food and I couldn't stand it any longer. I knew there had to be a better way.

      Closeup of my rusty grill grates

      The Search for New Grates

      Considering my options, I contemplated purchasing a new grill or exploring a pellet smoker. But I really loved this grill as it was a high-quality grill.

      The idea hit me to just replace the grates with new grates. That's when I began searching for stainless steel grates.

      Exploring Alternatives

      After visiting the Broil King website, I discovered that they offered stainless steel grates for $49.95 each, with each grate measuring around six to eight inches. With four sections needed for my grill, the cost started adding up.

      I was determined to find an affordable alternative, so I turned to Amazon and stumbled upon a brand that provided the grates I was looking for at a significantly lower price point.

      Stainless Steel Grates to Replace Grill Grates

      I finally settled on a brand-name Votenli to replace the rusty grill grates on my gas grill. The great thing about this company is that they have replacement grates for just about every manufacturer of gas grills.

      The grates I purchased are made of 304 stainless steel and measure seven millimeters in diameter. While the grates from Broil King may have been eight millimeters, I found these stainless steel ones to be incredibly sturdy and of high quality.

      Votenli stainless steel grill grates.
      Check Price on Amazon

      I was thrilled with my find, especially considering the entire set cost me under fifty dollars! That is the same cost as just one section from the manufacturer.

      Installation Process

      Installation is a breeze. You pretty much just remove the old grates and lay the new ones back in place. After thoroughly vacuuming the grill and removing the old grates, it was time to install the new ones.

      I carefully placed the heat shields back in their proper positions and then proceeded to fit the stainless steel grates in place. The new grates looked impressive and promising, giving my grill a fresh and upgraded appearance.

      Burning in the Grates

      Before using the new grates for cooking, I wanted to ensure they were properly seasoned and ready for action. To do this, I fired up the grill and allowed the grates to burn in for a while. This process helps remove any residue or oil from the manufacturing process and prepares the grates for optimal performance.

      Cleaning the New Grill Grates

      Cleaning the new grill grates is a cinch. A few years ago, I was fortunate enough to work with a company that sells a product called The Great Scrape. The Great Scrape is a wooden paddle that you use to clean your grill grates with.

      The awesome thing about using The Great Scrape is that you no longer have to worry about using a wire brush. Using a wire brush can risk getting metal bristles in your food.

      Conclusion

      By investing in new stainless steel grates for my gas grill, I've enhanced my outdoor cooking experience without breaking the bank. The durability and quality of these grates are impressive, and they provide an excellent cooking surface for my favorite recipes.

      If you're considering upgrading your grates, I encourage you to explore affordable alternatives like the ones I found on Amazon. Remember to properly season your new grates before use, and soon you'll be enjoying mouthwatering meals prepared on your revamped gas grill. Don't forget to check out our YouTube video on this topic for visual guidance. Until next time, happy grilling!

      YouTube video

      ​Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
      Do You Have Rusty Grill Grates Pinterest picture.

      Cooking Revolutionized: A NuWave Air Fryer Review

      by Leave a Comment

      Home

      In today's fast-paced world, finding efficient and healthy cooking methods is a perpetual quest for many food enthusiasts. The NuWave Air Fryer emerges as a game-changer in the culinary landscape. It promises a revolutionary approach to preparing delicious meals with minimal effort and without compromising on taste. 

      Nuwave Air Fryer Review

      With its cutting-edge technology and intuitive design, this appliance has captured the attention of home cooks everywhere. In this comprehensive NuWave Air Fryer review, we'll delve into its features, functionality, and overall performance.

      We will uncover whether this appliance truly lives up to the hype and delivers a new era of cooking satisfaction.

      Get ready to discover a world where crispy, flavorful dishes meet convenience and simplicity.

      What Is an Air Fryer?

      Before we consider the NuWave Air Fryer brand, we must first consider what an air fryer is. The Air Fryer is a small appliance that does a great job of cooking foods healthier. This small appliance has been all the rage for the last few years and for good reason.

      Photo from Amazon

      The air fryer has been around now for a number of years. According to the New York Times, Fred Van Der Weij invented the air fryer back in 2005. He was looking for a way to crisp up French Fries without deep-frying them.

      An air fryer is a small appliance, similar to a small deep fryer such as a fry daddy. The air fryer has a basket that slides into the front of it, this is where the food is placed.

      It is basically a small convection oven that has high-speed air circulation which allows food to crisp up quickly. It works similarly to convection ovens. 

      Why Use an Air Fryer

      The main reason someone would choose to use an air fryer versus a deep fryer is for health reasons. The air fryer doesn’t use hot oil to submerge the food in to cook it. The reason we love deep-fried food is for the way it cooks food with a crispy exterior, but moist and tender inside. The Air fryer creates this same texture, only a healthier version of it.

      Deep Frying with baskets hanging on the edge.

      Another reason or benefit of using an air fryer is based on cooking time. When using an air fryer, you do not have to wait on the oil to heat up and the time to cook many items is lesser than that of a oven or deep fryer. 

      Now that we have talked about what an air fryer is and why we use one, let's now talk about one of the most popular brands, the Nuwave Air Fryer. 

      Features and Design of The Nuwave Air Fryer

      The NuWave Air Fryer boasts an array of impressive features that set it apart from traditional cooking appliances. Equipped with advanced air frying technology, it harnesses the power of hot air circulation to achieve crispy results without the need for excessive oil. 

      The appliance's sleek and user-friendly design ensures intuitive operation, with a digital control panel and pre-programmed settings for various cooking needs. Additionally, its compact size and efficient storage capabilities make it an excellent choice for kitchens of any size.

      Functionality and Performance

      When it comes to functionality, the NuWave Air Fryer does not disappoint. Its rapid air circulation technology ensures quick and even cooking, resulting in perfectly crispy and evenly cooked dishes. 

      Whether you're preparing french fries, chicken wings, or even baked goods, this appliance proves to be versatile and capable. The NuWave Air Fryer's adjustable temperature settings and timer allow for precise control over cooking, ensuring consistent results with each use.

      ​

      Speaking of delicious dishes, one recipe that truly shines when prepared in the NuWave Air Fryer is Air Fryer Hash Browns. These golden-brown delights are the perfect breakfast or brunch addition, with a crispy exterior and a fluffy interior. 

      Taste and Texture of Food

      One of the most remarkable aspects of the NuWave Air Fryer is the incredible taste and texture it imparts to food. By using significantly less oil than traditional deep-frying methods, it manages to achieve a crispy exterior while maintaining a juicy and tender interior. 

      how to cook hash browns in the air fryer.
      Hash Browns cooked in an Air Fryer

      Air-fried dishes retain their natural flavors, and the reduction in grease leads to a cleaner and lighter eating experience. Whether you're enjoying crispy fries or indulging in a perfectly cooked piece of chicken, the NuWave Air Fryer elevates the taste of your favorite dishes.

      Health Benefits and Nutritional Value

      The NuWave Oven not only delivers exceptional taste but also offers several health benefits. With its ability to fry food with minimal oil, it allows for a healthier alternative to traditional frying methods. 

      By significantly reducing oil consumption, it helps to lower calorie and fat content in meals without compromising on flavor. Moreover, air frying retains more nutrients in the food compared to deep-frying, making it a healthier choice for you and your family.

      Customer Feedback and Ratings

      The NuWave Air Fryer has received overwhelmingly positive feedback from customers worldwide. Users praise its ability to deliver consistently crispy results, its user-friendly design, and the versatility it offers in preparing a wide range of dishes.

      While some individuals mention a slight learning curve in determining the optimal cooking times and temperatures for specific recipes, the majority of users express high satisfaction with the appliance's performance.

      Disadvantages of Using an Air Fryer

      While air fryers offer many benefits and are generally well-regarded, it's important to consider some potential drawbacks or limitations associated with using them:

      1. Limited Capacity Air Fryer Oven: Most air fryers have a limited cooking capacity compared to traditional ovens or deep fryers. This means that you may need to cook food in multiple batches, which can be time-consuming, especially when preparing meals for larger groups.
      2. Uneven Cooking: Although air fryers are designed to provide even heat distribution, certain foods may still cook unevenly. Items that are stacked or placed too closely together may not receive equal heat, resulting in some portions being overcooked while others remain undercooked.
      3. Longer Cooking Times: While air fryers are generally faster than conventional ovens, they often require longer cooking times compared to deep frying. This is because hot air needs to circulate around the food to crisp it up, which can extend the overall cooking duration.
      4. Food Texture Differences: While air fryers can produce crispy results, they may not replicate the exact texture and taste of deep-fried foods. Deep frying typically results in a different level of crispness and a slightly different flavor profile due to the immersion in oil.
      5. Kitchen Space: Air fryers, especially larger models, can take up a significant amount of counter space. If you have a small kitchen or limited countertop area, finding a suitable spot for your air fryer may be a consideration.

      Despite these potential drawbacks, many users find that the benefits of air fryers outweigh the limitations. It's important to assess your specific cooking needs and preferences to determine if an air fryer is the right fit for you.

      Now Let's Go Over a Few of the Models

      When considering the NuWave Air Fryer, it's important to note that there are different models available, each with its own set of features and capacities. Let's take a closer look at some popular models to help you choose the one that suits your needs best:

      NuWave Brio 6-Quart Air Fryer with Ultimate Accessory Kit

      Designed for small-sized families or gatherings, the Brio 6-Quart Air Fryer offers a smaller cooking capacity.

      • Digital Control Panel
      • Pre-Programmed Settings
      • Easy Operation
      • Perfect for a small family or single user
      • Easy to clean

      NuWave Brio 8-Quart Digital Air Fryer

      Designed for medium-sized families or gatherings, the Brio 8-Quart Air Fryer offers a larger cooking capacity. It provides ample space to prepare multiple servings of your favorite dishes, making it ideal for main courses, side dishes, or even desserts.

      • 8-qt size is the perfect size for most families
      • Precise Temperature and Time Control
      • Easy Operation

      NuWave Brio 15.5-Quart X-Large Digital Air Fryer:

      If you have a larger family or frequently entertain guests, the Brio 15.5-Quart Air Fryer is a perfect choice. With its spacious capacity, it can accommodate larger portions and bigger food items.

      • Same User-Friendly digital control panel
      • Pre-Programmed Settings
      • Very Large Capacity

      NuWave Bravo XL Smart Oven Air Fryer

      For those seeking a multifunctional cooking appliance, the NuWave Bravo XL Smart Oven Air Fryer is an excellent option. In addition to air frying, it combines the functionalities of an air fryer, toaster oven, and convection oven.

      With a larger cooking capacity and a variety of cooking modes, such as baking, roasting, grilling, and dehydrating, it provides versatility and allows you to experiment with a wide range of recipes.

      • Very Versatile
      • Sleek Design
      • Stainless Steel

      Conclusion

      When choosing the right model, consider factors such as the size of your household, the amount of food you typically cook, and the specific functionalities you desire. By selecting the appropriate NuWave Air Fryer model, you can enhance your cooking experience and enjoy delicious meals tailored to your needs.

      NuWave Air Fryer Review for Pinterest

      ​FAQ's

      1. Can I cook frozen foods in an air fryer?
        • Yes, air fryers are excellent for cooking frozen foods. They can quickly and evenly cook frozen items such as French fries, chicken nuggets, and even frozen vegetables. Just follow the recommended cooking times and temperatures for the best results.
      2. Do I need to preheat the air fryer before using it?
        • Preheating the air fryer is not always necessary, but it can help achieve more consistent results, especially for certain recipes. Preheating typically takes around 3-5 minutes, depending on the model. Check the user manual or recipe instructions to see if preheating is recommended.
      3. Can I use aluminum foil or parchment paper in the air fryer?
        • Yes, you can use aluminum foil or parchment paper in the air fryer. They can be useful for preventing certain foods from sticking to the basket or for easy cleanup. However, it's important to follow the manufacturer's instructions and ensure that the foil or paper does not obstruct the airflow.
      4. How much oil do I need to use in an air fryer?
        • One of the advantages of air fryers is that they require significantly less oil compared to traditional frying methods. Generally, you only need a light coating of oil on the food's surface to achieve crispy results. Some recipes may not require any oil at all, depending on the food being prepared.
      5. Can I cook raw meat in an air fryer?
        • Yes, air fryers can effectively cook raw meat. However, it's essential to ensure that the meat reaches the proper internal temperature to ensure it is fully cooked and safe to eat. Use a meat thermometer to check for doneness.
      6. Are air-fried foods healthier than deep-fried foods?
        • Air-fried foods are generally considered healthier than deep-fried foods because they require significantly less oil. Air frying can reduce calorie and fat content, resulting in a healthier alternative. However, it's still important to consider the overall nutritional value of the food you're cooking.
      7. How do I clean an air fryer?
        • Cleaning an air fryer is usually simple and straightforward. Most air fryers have dishwasher-safe parts, such as the basket and pan. You can also clean them by hand using warm soapy water. Be sure to consult the user manual for specific cleaning instructions.
      8. Can I bake or roast in an air fryer?
        • Yes, many air fryers offer baking and roasting functionalities. They can be used to prepare a wide range of dishes, including cakes, bread, roasted vegetables, and even meats. Explore the settings and capabilities of your specific air fryer model for more options.

      ​Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

      Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with Walnuts and Chia recipe

      by 2 Comments

      Looking for a nutritious and delicious way to start your day? This Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with Walnuts and Chia recipe is a great option! Packed with fiber, protein, and healthy fats, this hearty breakfast will keep you feeling full and satisfied all morning. 

      homemade oatmeal with chia seeds and walnuts closeup shot.

      This recipe starts off with Almond milk. The combination of cinnamon and maple syrup adds a delicious warmth and sweetness to the creamy oats, while the chia seeds and walnuts provide a satisfying crunch and pack a protein boost.

      Oatmeal is a great source of whole grains. Plus, it's easy to make and can be customized to suit your preferences - so why not give it a try?

      Quick Breakfast Ideas

      If you are on a mission to find a healthy, quick breakfast idea, this recipe fits the bill. This Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is such an easy breakfast recipe that you will be making it at least once a week if not more. 

      This recipe is for busy people who are always on the go. The ones that have busy mornings. If you fit that category then you will love this recipe. 

      We use simple ingredients in this recipe and utilizing quick cooking oats allows this recipe to be cooked in under 5 minutes. Not only is it an easy recipe that is quick to cook but this recipe is the perfect breakfast that has many health benefits for you.

      Speaking of quick breakfast ideas, when I make this oatmeal dish, I love to make these Crispy Air Fryer Hash Browns as a side dish to go along with it. The two pair so well together.

      Health Benefits

      The combination of creamy oatmeal, walnuts, cinnamon, and chia seeds has many health benefits. Now let me first say that I am not a dietician so make sure to do your own research on food.

      This dish really doesn't even feel like a healthy dish because it tastes so good. However doing research over the years, I have come across many articles mentioning the facts about the ingredients used in this recipe that we have put together. 

      cinnamon maple oatmeal overhead shot.

      Let's list some of the benefits and various articles that we have found online.

      Oatmeal

      Oatmeal comes from the grain portion of the Oat grass plant. It is the seed that grows on top of the stem. In this recipe, we are using whole grain Oats but we are using quick oats, so they cook faster.

      Oats hanging from the plant in a field

      Quick oats are simply oat seeds that have been steamed and then rolled flat. This process allows the oats to cook quickly when making this recipe. 

      One of the biggest advantages of eating Oatmeal is the added fiber you get in your diet. According to Harvard University, Most Americans get less than half the suggested amounts of daily fiber."

      This is why eating a breakfast full of healthy fiber is important. Fiber helps regulate the body's blood sugar levels and cholesterol levels. It also helps to keep you feeling full longer throughout the day. 

      According to WebMD, "Oatmeal is nutritionally rich. It has more protein than most grains and also contains numerous vitamins and minerals.

      It contains antioxidants and a soluble fiber called Beta-glucan, which aids several systems of the body." So it is not hard to see that Oatmeal ranks high on the health benefits scale when we take all this information into consideration. 

      Walnuts

       According to Harvard University, "Diets enriched with walnuts led to lower total and LDL cholesterol compared to other diets." Walnuts contain healthy fats as well as protein and some fiber. So as we can see, walnuts, when eaten in moderation, can pack a healthy punch. 

      Chia Seeds

      You may or may not know what chia seeds are. If you remember back to the early 90's there was a popular item that was always advertised on tv called Chia Pet.

      Chia Pet

      It had a popular theme song that I can still hear ringing in my head today. The chia pet was a clay pot that was shaped into different animals, people, etc. You spread chia seeds on it and watered it and the seeds grew. 

      Well, the seeds you were spreading onto the clay pot were what we use in this recipe. Who knew then that the seeds were a superfood packed with all sorts of health benefits?

      According to Eatright, "Chia seeds come from the desert plant Salvia Hispanica, a member of the mint family." 

      What makes Chia seeds so unique is all the nutrition but also the gelling or thickening action they have when you put them into anything with moisture such as almond milk or even water.

      Chia seeds have tons of dietary fiber at 10 grams per ounce and have protein and minerals such as iron, calcium, magnesium, and zinc.  

      This thickening or gelling action is also good for gut health. This helps pull in moisture into the intestines and helps you go to the bathroom easier, such as a laxative. 

      Pure Maple Syrup

      Pure maple syrup is made from sap that is harvested from wild maple trees. The benefits are numerous versus what they call syrup in the store which is actually Corn Syrup. Pure Maple Syrup contains lots of antioxidants, vitamins, and minerals. It also ranks lower on the glycemic index scale as well.

      If you do not like maple syrup, I highly recommend using date syrup as a replacement.

      Now, let's go over the list of ingredients that we need for this awesome recipe.

      The Ingredients

      1 cup of Unsweetened Almond milk

      For this recipe, we are using almond milk. Other choices include whole milk, oat milk, or soy milk. You can choose any type of milk you prefer as it doesn't make much difference in this recipe. 

      ½ Cup of Quick Oats

      We are using quick oats in this recipe. Quick oats are whole grain but the process they go through allows them to cook quicker. If you prefer, you can use Old fashioned oats or Steel cut oats. 

      Additionally, both Old-Fashioned oats and Steel-cut oats take longer to cook and can change the texture of the recipe. Just allow extra time to cook those if you choose to go that route.

      I would avoid instant oats such as the instant oatmeal packets as they can contain preservatives and added sugar.

      ½ Teaspoon of Cinnamon

      Cinnamon gives this dish a nice warm flavor. It really pairs well with the maple syrup and the walnuts or pecans. 

      ¼ Cups of Shelled Walnuts

      Walnuts are our preferred choice for this recipe but shelled pecans are also a nice choice. You could also add in some almond slivers if you choose. 

      1 Tablespoon of Pure Maple Syrup

      Maple Syrup is used to sweeten this recipe. This is the only sweetener this recipe calls for but if you prefer it to be slightly sweeter, you can use brown sugar as well. 

      Another alternative to Pure Maple Syrup is Date Syrup. I highly recommend it if you can get it. If not, honey works great as well.

      I use either one depending on what I have available. Both are great natural sweeteners to use. The use of honey will change the taste of the dish, but only slightly. 

      ​Optional Toppings

      I love to top this dish with fresh fruit that is in season. A couple of my favorites are blueberries, strawberries, and bananas. 

      Additional toppings include chocolate chips, raisins, almond butter, or even peanut butter.

      Preparation:

      Now that we know what our ingredients are, let's go over the tools that we need to make this delicious recipe. It only requires minimum tools to make this recipe. 

      However, we will cover a few of them here, just in case. 

      ​Tools needed to make this recipe:​

      • Medium saucepan
      • Whisk or wooden spoon
      • Measuring cups
      • Measuring Spoons

      Step by Step directions for making Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with Walnuts and Chia Recipe:

      • The first step in making this recipe is to grab a medium saucepan or small saucepan and put it on the stove. 
      • ​Add in the milk, then turn the burner on to low heat. I like to use low heat so as to not scorch the milk.

       

      picture of milk in a saucepan for oatmeal recipe.

      ​

      • The next step is to add the oatmeal, chia seeds, and cinnamon. Stir the mixture using a whisk or a wooden spoon to incorporate the ingredients. 
      Adding in ingredients for homemade oatmeal.

      ​

      • Allow the dish to simmer until it has thickened, approximately 4 to 5 minutes. 
      • Turn the burner off, add in the maple syrup, and give it a good stir. 
      adding pure maple syrup to homemade oatmeal recipe.
      • ​Next, pour the dish into a small bowl for serving. 
      cinnamon maple oatmeal closeup shot.
      • ​Top with walnuts and fresh fruit. 
      homemade oatmeal with chia seeds and walnuts closeup shot.

      Sides to serve with Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal:

      Conclusion

      In conclusion, the Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with walnuts and chia recipe offers a delightful and nutritious way to start your day. The combination of warm cinnamon, sweet maple syrup, crunchy walnuts, and nutritious chia seeds creates a flavorful and satisfying bowl of oatmeal.

      Preparing this recipe is simple and can be customized to suit your taste preferences. Serve the Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with walnuts and chia in bowls, and feel free to add your favorite toppings, such as sliced bananas or berries, for an extra burst of flavor.

      Whether you enjoy it as a hearty breakfast or a wholesome snack, this recipe will leave you satisfied and nourished. It's a delicious way to fuel your body and start your day on a nutritious note, it is hard to beat homemade oatmeal!

      FAQ's

      Can I use regular oats?

      Yes, you can use regular oats (Old Fashioned Oats) but they do require a longer cooking time. Make sure to factor that into your cooking. 

      What can I do with leftover oatmeal?

      If you have leftover oatmeal, you can store it in an airtight container and place it into the refrigerator to eat at a later time. It will be good for up to 3 to 4 days. 

      ​How do I reheat leftover oatmeal?

      In order to reheat leftover oatmeal, place the oatmeal in a microwave-safe bowl and add a little water or a little milk (almond, soy, oat, or dairy) to reconstitute it. Then place in the microwave for 30 seconds then stir. Check the temperature and if it is still not warm, place it back in the microwave for 30 seconds more.

      Do you recommend any other toppings for this recipe?

      Yes, you could top chocolate chips, almond butter, or even peanut butter. 

      Can I adjust the sweetness level to this recipe?

      ​Yes, you can adjust the sweetness in this recipe. One suggestion is to add in a little brown sugar or more maple syrup. You could also add coconut sugar as well. 

      ​Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked
      Yield: 1

      Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with Walnuts and Chia Recipe

      Cinnamon maple oatmeal with chia and walnut recipe.

      Looking for a nutritious and delicious way to start your day? This Cinnamon Maple Oatmeal with Walnuts and Chia recipe is a great option! Packed with fiber, protein, and healthy fats, this hearty breakfast will keep you feeling full and satisfied all morning. 

      Prep Time 5 minutes
      Cook Time 5 minutes
      Total Time 5 minutes

      Ingredients

      • 1 cup of Unsweetened Almond Milk (Can use any type of milk)
      • ½ cup of Oatmeal (quick oats)
      • ½ teaspoon of cinnamon
      • ¼ cups of walnuts (chopped)
      • 1 tablespoon of pure maple syrup

      Instructions

        1. The first step in making this recipe is to grab a medium saucepan or small saucepan and put it on the stove. 
        2. ​Add in the milk, then turn the burner on to low heat. I like to use low heat so as to not scorch the milk.
        3. The next step is to add the oatmeal, chia seeds, and cinnamon. Stir the mixture using a whisk or a wooden spoon to incorporate the ingredients. 
        4. Allow the dish to simmer until it has thickened, approximately 4 to 5 minutes. 
        5. Turn the burner off, add in the maple syrup, and give it a good stir.
        6.  ​Next, pour the dish into a small bowl for serving. 
        7. Top with walnuts and fresh fruit. 

      Notes

      Optional Ingredients:

      Top with fresh fruit such as strawberries, bananas, blackberries, or blueberries. Add in Almond butter or peanut butter for an added protein boost.

      Did you make this recipe?

      Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

      © Ronnie Williams
      Cuisine: American / Category: Breakfast Recipes

      Old Southern Yum Yum Cake Recipe

      by 4 Comments

      If you're looking for a classic Southern dessert, look no further than this Old Southern Yum Yum Cake Recipe! Dessert lovers today still favor this old southern recipe that has been passed down for generations.

      southern yum yum cake close up.

      Once you take one bite of this little-known southern dessert, the Classic Yum Yum Cake, it will become a staple in your dessert repertoire, and you will be hooked.

      Why You'll Love this Old Southern Yum Yum Cake

      The combination of butter, pineapple, pecans, and coconut is gooey and delicious. It has a wonderful texture which is my favorite part of this Southern Yum Yum cake recipe. It has the right amount of sweetness without being over the top. I am sure it will be a hit at your family gatherings.

      This traditional cake may also go by a few other names such as Texas Tornado Cake or Do Nothing Cake. Either way, it is still a dessert that your family will love.

      If you are short on time, this Easy No-Bake Blueberry-Banana Cream Pie dessert is another awesome treat to try. I am sure your friends and family will love it as well!

      yum yum cake old southern recipe.

      This is not the modern Yum Yum Cake you may know

      This Old Southern cake recipe is homemade from simple ingredients that combine flour, eggs, pecans, pineapple, and coconut to make a moist and flavorful dessert that has a thick layer of crackly crust on top.

      Additionally, do not confuse this cake with the more modern Yum Yum Cake which combines yellow cake mix and whipped cream frosting, or the Cherry Yum Yum Cake, which is a dump cake.

      Southern yum yum cake in cake pan.
      Old Southern Yum Yum Cake

      Now, let's talk about the ingredients to make this awesome-tasting cake.

      What You Need to Make This Recipe:

      Ingredients for Old Southern Yum Yum Cake

      Note: The exact measurements will be in the recipe card down below

      For the cake:

      • Self Rising Flour
      • Teaspoons of baking soda
      • Eggs
      • Sugar (white granulated)
      • Crushed pineapple

      For the icing:

      • Sugar (White granulated)
      • Butter
      • Evaporated milk
      • Coconut (shredded)
      • Chopped pecans
      • Vanilla extract

      Preparation:

      Preparing this favorite southern cake is straightforward and requires very few tools. However, we will cover a few of them here, just in case.

      Equipment needed to make Old Fashioned Yum Yum Cake:

      • Medium Bowl- medium-sized mixing bowl to mix ingredients in.
      • Wooden spoon or silicone spatula- used to mix the ingredients and to scrape the bowl as you pour the mixture into a cake pan.
      • 9 x 13 Baking Pan- I like to use a cake pan that has an included top. This way you can put the lid on for storage in the refrigerator if there are any leftovers.
      • Electric Mixer- makes the job easier and much less effort.
      • A saucepan is used to make the icing.

      I adore my Cuisinart Power Advantage Hand mixer which I purchased in 2018 to replace the one that had stopped working. After trying out a few other brands, I ultimately settled on this one as the perfect fit for me.

      To see more about the items I recommend, check out this page for my best kitchen essentials recommendations.

      How To Make Yum Yum Cake

      Step-by-Step Directions

      • Before we start, the first thing we need to do is preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
      • Using butter, vegetable shortening, or cooking spray, lightly coat the inside of a 9 x 13 cake pan. This is to help the cake not stick to the sides and bottom of the pan.
      Greasing cake pan with butter to make yum yum cake.
      I use butter to grease the cake pan.
      • Next, add the flour, eggs, sugar, baking soda, and crushed pineapple in a medium-sized bowl.
      • Then, mix the ingredients until they are well incorporated using a whisk, wooden spoon, or silicone spatula. You could also use a hand mixer or stand mixer as well.
      All the ingredients are in a bowl ready to be mixed for yum yum cake.
      • Now pour this mixture into the greased cake pan, spreading it out to create a nice even layer.
      Pouring batter in cake pan for yum yum cake recipe.
      Pour batter into a well-greased cake pan.
      • Lastly, add the cake pan to the oven and bake dessert for 25 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit, or until a cake tester or toothpick comes out clean.
      Putting yum yum cake batter in the oven.
      Adding cake to the oven.

      How to make the icing:

      • While the cake is baking, it is time to make the icing. This is a simple but awesome-tasting icing that will absorb into the cake making it so moist and decadent.
      • To begin, you'll need a small pot or saucepan. Turn the stove or burner on to medium-high heat. Add the butter and sugar, to the pan.
      adding sugar to butter for yum yum cake topping.
      Add sugar to melted butter.
      • As the butter melts, use a whisk to incorporate the sugar. Boil sugar and butter for about two to three minutes.
      Mixing butter and sugar for yum yum cake topping.
      Whisk to incorporate butter and sugar. Bring to a boil.
      • Next, turn the burner down to medium-low to low heat. Add in the milk and vanilla extract and stir to combine. Continue to whisk for 1 to 2 minutes then cut the burner or stove off.
      • Next, add the coconut and pecans to the mixture and stir to combine.
      Adding chopped pecans to yum yum cake topping.
      Adding chopped pecans.
      adding coconut to yum yum cake topping.
      Adding shredded coconut.
      • While the cake is still hot, pour the icing mixture over top of it, and spread it out until it covers the whole cake in a single layer.
      pouring topping on top of the Yum Yum Cake.
      Pour topping over the whole cake
      spreading the topping on yum yum cake.
      Using a spatula, spread the topping evenly
      • Leave the cake out at room temperature or until it has cooled and the icing has set, about 10 to 15 minutes. Now, it's time to enjoy. Make sure to refrigerate this cake after it has cooled.

      Conclusion

      I hope you enjoy this Old Southern Yum Yum Cake Recipe. I know it is always a hit around our house and at family gatherings. Although this recipe is not well known, the dessert is very unique and tastes like nothing you have tried before. It combines simple ingredients and doesn't require many tools to make.

      It can be whipped up in about 30 minutes so it can be added to your dessert repertoire. I know you may have oodles of Southern cake recipes, but I believe this one will be at the top!

      Pinterest picture for Old Southern Yum Yum Cake.

      FAQ's

      Does this cake need to be refrigerated?

      Yes, since this cake contains evaporated milk, it is best to keep this cake refrigerated.

      What do I do with the leftover cake?

      If you happen to have leftover cake, you can use the top of the cake pan if you are using the one I mentioned in the tools needed. If you do not have a cover with your cake pan, just cover it with plastic wrap or aluminum foil. Place it in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.

      What is Old Southern Yum Yum Cake?

      Old Southern Yum Yum Cake is one of my favorite scratch recipes. It combines flour, eggs, sugar, butter, pineapple, coconut, and pecans to make a gooey and decadent Southern-style cake.

      Is Southern Yum Yum Cake gluten-free?

      This particular version of Old Southern Yum Yum Cake is not gluten-free. Feel free to change up the flour in the recipe to adjust it to your diet.

      Does this cake need to be refrigerated?

      In many cases, most cakes do not need to be refrigerated. With the Old Southern Yum Yum Cake, I would suggest refrigerating it simply because it contains milk in the icing.

      Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
      John 6:35

      -Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

      Old Southern Yum Yum Cake Recipe

      This image shows a closeup of Old Southern Yum Yum Cake. The cake is sitting on a classic white dessert plate that has a little design around the rim of the plate. In the background you can see the edge of the cake pan which the rest of the cake is in.

      The Old Southern Yum Yum Cake recipe is homemade from simple ingredients that combine flour, eggs, pecans, pineapple, and coconut to make a moist and flavorful dessert that has a thick layer of crackly crust on top.

      Prep Time 15 minutes
      Cook Time 30 minutes
      Total Time 45 minutes

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups Self Rising Flour
      • 2 large eggs
      • 2 cups of white granulated sugar
      • 2 teaspoons of baking soda
      • 2 cups of crushed pineapple. Make sure to drain the pineapple first.

      Icing

      • 1 cup of sugar
      • ½ cup or 1 stick of unsalted butter (can use margarine)
      • 1-12 oz. can of evaporated milk
      • 1 cup of shredded coconut
      • 1 cup of chopped pecans
      • 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract

      Instructions

      Cake Directions

      1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
      2. Grease a 9 x 13 cake pan.
      3. Mix together flour, eggs, sugar, baking soda, and crushed pineapple.
      4. Pour mixture into greased cake pan. Spread in an even layer.
      5. Bake dessert at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 25 minutes or until a cake tester or toothpick come out clean.

      Icing Directions:

      1. Add butter and sugar to the saucepan. Turn the heat on to medium-high heat.
      2. Boil the sugar and butter mixture for one to two minutes.
      3. Turn down to medium-low heat. Add in milk. Cook for an additional 1 to 2 minutes. Turn the burner off.
      4. Add in coconut and pecans.
      5. Pour the mixture over the cake and spread in a single layer.
      6. Allow cooling to room temperature before serving.

      Did you make this recipe?

      Please leave a comment on the blog or share a photo on Instagram

      © Ronnie Williams
      Cuisine: Southern / Category: Dessert Recipes